Home

(Thailand) Co., Ltd.

1. JVHO045X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position cp LOAD button When the button is pushed the CD loading slot will open and the loading position will be displayed Insert the CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing If the radio is already playing it will automatically turn off and the CD will start playing A caution e Do not force the compact disc into the slot This could damage the player e Do not use 8 cm 3 1 in discs After loading the CD the slot number and CD track will appear on the display To load a CD in the CD changer 1 Push the button for less than 1 5 seconds 2 Select the loading slot by pushing the CD select button If no slot is selected the CD changer will automatically select an available slot 3 Insert the CD into the slot To load 6 CDs in the CD changer 1 Push the button for more than 1 5 seconds 2 Insert a CD into the slot 3 When the next loading slot number illuminates on the display insert the next CD into the slot To load 6 CDs in the CD changer 1 Push the button for more than 1 5 seconds 2 Insert the CD into the slot 3 When the next loading slot number illuminates on the display insert the next CD into the slot
2. The slot number indicator appears on the display when the CDs are loaded in the CD changer and the audio system is turned on CD cD PLAY button When the CD button is pushed while the audio system is off and CDs are loaded the audio system will turn on and the CD will start to play automatically If the radio is already operating it will automatically turn off and the CD will start playing gt gt lt lt button FF Fast Forward REW Rewind Push the gt gt fast forward or lt rewind button while a CD is being played to fast forward or rewind through the track When the button is released the CD will return to normal play speed gt gt TRACK UP 144 DOWN button Push the 1 button while a CD is being played to skip forward to the next track The CD will skip tracks forward the number of times the button is pushed When the last track of the CD is skipped the first track will be played Push the 44 button while a CD is being played to start the present track again from the beginning Push the 1 lt 4 button several times to skip back to the previous track The CD will skip tracks backward the number of times the button is pushed When the first track of the CD is skipped the last track will be played OCD select buttons To change to another CD lo
3. Elapsed time and trip odometer km or ESR za 00 00 MILES na 000 0 DE JVI0133X Type A a ume 00 00 km 000 0 DE JVI0033X Type B Instruments and controls 2 27 Elapsed time 19 The elapsed time mode shows the time since the last reset The displayed time can be reset by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The trip odometer is also reset at the same time Trip odometer lt if equipped The trip odometer mode shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since the last reset Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The elapsed time is also reset at the same time Distance to empty Aft n AE EB BE km or MILES tate MOBERE 0000 km JVI0134X 2 28 Instruments and controls ncn RANGE 0000 km JVIOO10X Type B The distance to empty dte mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The dte is constantly being calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds The dte mode includes a low range warning feature If the fuel level is low the warning is displayed on the screen When the fuel level drops even lower the dte display will change to e If the amount of fuel added is small the display just before the igni
4. When the ignition switch is in the ON position the VDC warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is operational The VDC warning light blinks when the VDC system is operating When the warning light blinks while driving the driving condition is slippery and the vehicle s traction limit is about to be exceeded If the VDC warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the VDC system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly If a malfunction occurs in the system the VDC system function will be canceled but the vehicle is still driveable See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system for Australia and New Zealand P 5 25 2 16 Instruments and controls INDICATOR LIGHTS Cruise control on indicator light if equipped The cruise control on indicator light indicates the activation of the cruise control system When the cruise control main switch is turned on the indicator light will illuminate indicating the cruise control system is in the standby mode See Cruise control P 5 30 SET Cruise control speed limiter set indi cator light if equipped The cruise control speed limiter set indicator light indicates the status of the cruise control system When the vehicle speed is
5. ONO Ol Be Ou 10 11 12 13 14 Interior light Front turn signal light Front fog light if equipped Clearance light Headlight Side turn signal light Stop tail light High mounted stop light Model without rear spoiler High mounted stop light Model with rear spoiler Rear turn signal light Reverse light Rear fog light if equipped License plate light Cargo light if equipped Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 Replacement procedures 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself REMOVE gt INSTALL All other lights are either type A B C D E or F When replacing a bulb first remove the lens and or cover JVM0003X JVM0290X Clearance light Type B Front turn signal light example JVM0004X JVMOO006X JVM0282X Front fog light if equipped Type A Front fog light if equipped Type B Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 ear combination light Type C Rear combination light Type A 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself License plate light Type A JVC0014X License plate light Type B JVM0108X JVMO008X High mounted stop light model with rear spoiler A caution Do not reuse the packing on the back of the high mounted stop light When installing the packing must be replaced with a new one To replace the high mounted stop light bulb 1 Remove the light with a suitable tool 2 Remove the bulb
6. The frequency changes in steps of 100 kHz on the FM band and 9 kHz on the AM band Pri 144 Fast Forward Rewind buttons When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically push the 144 button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at the station 0000 Radio memory buttons During radio reception pushing the radio memory button for less than 2 seconds will select the stored radio station The audio system can store up to 18 FM station frequencies six in each of FM 1 FM 2 and FMT and 6 AM station frequencies To store the station frequency manually 1 Tune to the desired broadcasting station fre quency by using the 44 button 2 Push and hold a radio memory button 1 until a beep sounds The radio mutes when the memory button is pushed 3 The channel indicator will display and the radio mute disengages indicating that the memory is stored properly 4 Perform steps 1 3 for all other memory buttons If the battery cable is disconnected or if the audio fuse blows the radio memory will be erased If this occurs Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 47 reset the desired stations USB memory device operation s ___ N J Audio main operation The USB outlet connector is located on the instrument panel Open the lid and connect a US
7. button and it is not taken out from the loading slot the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD FM AM radio operation OBetoott JVHO004X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position FM AM FM AM button When the m button is pushed while the audio system is off the audio system will turn on and the radio will turn on When the button is pushed while CD is already operating it will automatically turn off and the radio will turn on To change the radio bands push the rw aw button until the desired band appears FM 1 gt FM 2 gt FMT gt MW gt LW During FM reception when the mm a button is pushed for longer than 1 5 seconds stations are searched for and the 6 stations of the FM T band The sound is muted until the auto store operation is completed upon which preset channel 1 is automatically tuned in gt gt lt lt When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually push the gt lt lt button until the desired frequency is achieved TUNE button The frequency changes in steps of 100 kHz on the FM band 9 kHz on the MW band and 3 kHz on the LW band PP 144 SEEK button When adjusting the b
8. e The hood is open The Stop Start System is always engaged at the start of a journey once the engine has been started The engine is automatically stopped and restarted during the journey if conditions are suitable STOP START SYSTEM DISPLAY AND IN DICATORS Engine stop AUTO ry STOP START JVS0071X When the engine is stopped the information is displayed for a few seconds Vehicle information display 1 Engine stop guidance Instrument panel 2 Stop Start System indicator light About the display see Vehicle information display P 2 20 NOTE Automatic engine restart is possible whenever the Stop Start System indicator light is illumi nated in the meter CO2 saved CO2 SAVED JVS0073X Whilst the engine remains stopped the vehicle information display shows the accumulated quantity estimate of carbon dioxide exhaust emissions pre vented by the Stop Start System Vehicle information display 1 CO2 saved information Instrument panel 2 Stop Start System indicator light e Push and hold the button to reset the CO2 Saved value e The display can be switched between Stop Start System information and drive computer informa tion by a short press of the E button System fault aS cy STOP START NOT AVAILABLE JVS0074X When automatic restart is not possible the information is displayed The engine must be started by turning or pushing the ignition switch
9. Loading Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing To stop playing push the Power button A caution Do not force the compact disc into the slot This could damage the player CD button When the CD button is pushed while a CD is loaded the CD will start playing automatically DISP button When the osr button is pushed while a CD with a title is being played the display will change as follows CD iat Display Album Title F Song Title CD with MP3 or WMA Fae Display Folder d Song Title Artist Name Album Title a yx When the button located on the left side is pushed while a CD is being played the present track will be advanced and move to the next track Push the YW button several times to skip forward tracks The CD will advance the number of times the button is SEEK TRACK FILE button pushed When the last track of the CD is forwarded the first track will be played When the button is pushed while a CD is being played the present track will start over from the beginning of the current track Push the YW button several times to skip back tracks The CD will rewind the number of times the button is pushed When the first track of the CD is rewound the last track will be played A V TUNE FF REW FOLDER button
10. Reverse position Manual Transmission MT model e Securely block the wheels CORROSION PROTECTION Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive and will accelerate corrosion and the deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In the winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional information see Corrosion protection P 7 5 For additional protection against rust and corrosion which may be required in some areas consult a NISSAN dealer Starting and driving 5 41 MEMO 5 42 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency Hazard indicator flasher switch cesesesseesssesseesssesseesseesseesstesseesseenes 6 2 Flat tire Stopping vehicle Preparing tools Changing flat tire for model with spare tire Repairing flat tire for model with emergency tire puncture repair kit Jump starting Push starting If your vehicle overheats Towing your vehicle Towing precautions Towing recommended by NISSAN we 6 12 HAZARD INDICATOR FLASHER SWITCH r SIC2475 The hazard indicator flasher switch operates with the ignition switch in any position except when the battery is discharged The hazard indicator flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have to stop or park under emergency conditions When the hazard indicator flasher switch is pushed all tu
11. The message can be cleared by pressing the E button restarting the engine or turning or pushing the ignition OFF Key LOCK warning JVS0081X Type A TURN IGNITION TO LOCK JVS0075X Type B The information is displayed and a buzzer sounded to remind the driver to turn the ignition OFF to avoid a flat battery The message can only be cleared by turning or pushing the ignition OFF or restarting the engine PRECAUTIONS ON STOP START AUTO STOP START SYSTEM FAULT JVS0076X The message is displayed when there may be some thing wrong with the Stop Start System You are advised to have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop Vehicle information display 1 System fault warning Instrument panel 2 Stop Start System indicator light The message can be cleared by pressing the m button NOTE The Stop Start System indicator in the meter flashes whilst the fault condition remains STOP START SYSTEM OFF SWITCH JVS0072X The system can be temporarily disengaged by press ing the Stop Start System OFF switch Pressing the button a second time will re engage the Stop Start System e When the Stop Start System is disengaged whilst the engine is running the engine is prevented from automatically stopping e When the Stop Start System is disengaged after the engine has been automatically stopped by the Stop Start System the engine will immediately restart if
12. Low e High High sensitive operation e Low Low sensitive operation To turn the rain sensing auto wiper system off push up the lever to the OFF position or pull down the lever to the eam LO or egg HI position A caution Do not touch the rain sensor and around it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause to an injury or a wiper damage e The rain sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain If the switch is left in the AUTO position the wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt fingerprints oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor The wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor e When the windshield glass is coated with water repellent the speed of the rain sen sing auto wipers may be higher even though the amount of the rainfall is small e Be sure to turn off the rain sensing auto wiper system when you use a car wash e The rain sensing auto wipers may not oper ate if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is raining REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH if equipped JVIO273X Type A JVIO274X Type B If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow etc the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor If this occurs turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow etc on and around t
13. NOTE The engine will not restart even if the brake pedal is released while the Idling Stop System is activated under the following condition 5 20 Starting and driving e when the shift lever is in the P Park position NOTE The engine will restart without releasing the brake pedal while the Idling Stop System is activated under the following conditions when the Idling Stop OFF switch is pushed when the fan speed control dial is in any position other than OFF 0 while the air flow control dial is in the front defogger position manual air conditioner e when the front defogger switch is set to ON automatic air conditioner when the rear defogger switch is set to ON when the accelerator pedal is depressed when the steering wheel is operated when the battery capacity is low when the power consumption is large when the brake pedal is released on sloping roads and the vehicle is moved e when the force to the brake pedal is reduced while the shift lever is in the D Drive or N Neutral position e when the shift lever is placed in the L Low D Drive or R Reverse position from the N or P position e when the negative pressure of the brake system is not sufficiently applied by depressing the brake pedal several times e when the driver s seat belt is released or the driver s door is open Use this system while waiting at stoplight
14. 4 The display will now show the name s beginning with the corresponding character If necessary turn the MENU VOL dial to select the correct name 5 Push the ENTER button and the display will show DELETE YES If applicable turn the MENU VOL dial to select DELETE NO 6 To confirm the selection push the ENTER button Speed dial buttons After entering the names and phone numbers you can assign the six preset buttons to the most frequently dialled phone numbers 1 Push the button 2 Select the name by turning the MENU VOL dial or using the search name mode 3 Once found push the assigned preset button until a confirmation beep is heard The name and phone number are now stored under that button Hands free phone control The hands free mode can be operated using the telephone button controls on the audio unit or on the steering wheel Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 69 Initiating a call A call can be initiated using one of the following methods e redial e phone book e voice tag e speed dial preset buttons NOTE During the active call you can adjust the micro phone volume by briefly pushing the MENU button then adjusting the volume by turning the MENU VOL dial within the value range of 2 to 2 To confirm the entry briefly push the ENTER or Q button or wait for 10 seconds to return to the active call main screen Redial Use the redial mode to cal
15. CLK ON or CLK OFF appears on the display while the audio system is on 2 Push the 144 button or A W button to select CLK ON The clock display can be turned on or off temporarily by pushing the FJR button Clock adjustment To adjust the clock turn the clock display on and perform the following operations 1 Push the menu button while CLK ON is on the display The hour digits blink 2 To adjust the hours push the 14 button or A button 3 Push the menu button again The minute digits blink 4 To adjust the minutes push the a button or A button If no user input is detected for 5 seconds or when the menu button is pushed the clock setting mode will 4 34 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system automatically return to the normal mode MEDIA MEDIA button Push this button to switch the mode to CD USB or another AUX device When the mepa button is pushed with no device connected the audio system does not change modes AUX IN jack The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape player CD player digital audio player or laptop computer
16. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground Carefully raise the vehicle until the clearance between the tire and ground is achieved To lift the vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands and turn the jack lever Removing tire 1 Remove the wheel nuts 2 Remove the damaged tire A caution The tire is heavy Be sure that your feet are clear from the tire and use gloves as necessary to avoid injury Installing spare tire A warnine Never use wheel nuts which are not provided with your vehicle Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts may cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident Never use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This may cause the wheel nuts to become loose The temporary use spare tire is designed for emergency use only Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts with your fingers Check that all the wheel nuts contact the wheel surface horizontally Tighten the wheel nuts alternately and evenly more than 2 times in the sequence illustrated 1 with the wheel nut wrench until they are tight Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Tighten the wheel nuts securely with the wheel nut wrench in the sequence illustrated Lower the vehicle completely Tighten the wheel nuts to the specif
17. Do not use the emergency tire puncture repair kit provided with your vehicle on other vehicles Do not use the emergency tire puncture kit for a purpose other than to inflate and check the tire pressure for the vehicle Use the emergency tire puncture kit only on DC12V Keep water and dust off the emergency tire puncture kit Do not disassemble or modify the emer gency tire puncture kit Do not galvanize the emergency tire punc ture kit Do not use the emergency tire puncture repair kit under the following conditions Contact a NISSAN dealer or professional road assistance when the sealant has passed its expira tion date shown on the label attached to the bottle when the cut or the puncture is approxi mately 6 mm 0 25 in or longer when the side of the tire is damaged when the vehicle has been driven with a considerable loss of air from the tire when the tire is completely displaced inside or outside the rim when the tire rim is damaged when two or more tires are flat Getting emergency tire puncture repair kit Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit from the back door The repair kit consists of the following items Tire sealant bottle Air compressor Speed restriction sticker Before using emergency tire puncture repair kit e If any foreign object for example a screw or nail is embedded in the tire do not remove it e Check the expirat
18. If no user input is detected for 10 seconds or when the MENU button is pushed the clock setting mode will automatically return to the normal mode X MUTE button Press the X button to mute the sound Press again to restored the sound AUX AUX button The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape CD player MP3 player or laptop computer Push the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used CD player operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 21 Loading Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing To stop playing push the Power button A caution Do not force the compact disc into the slot This could damage the player CD button When the CD button is pushed while a CD is loaded the CD will start playing
19. Ignition switch model without intelligent Key system 5 5 Ignition switch position 5 8 Intelligent Key battery 8 26 Intelligent Key battery discharge a 5 8 Intelligent Key system 3 9 5 6 Keys 3 2 Locking with key 3 5 Mechanical key 3 4 NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS key 3 3 Push button ignition switch model with Intelligent Key system 5 6 Remote keyless entry system wa 8 7 Using intelligent Key system 3 8 3 11 Using remote keyless entry functio we 3 16 Key positions 5 6 Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Engine serial NUMbE sees Vehicle identification number VIN wis Legal requirement to adjust headlight beam 8 39 Light Bulb replacement Exterior lights Fog light switch Front fog lights Front map lights Headlight aiming control Headlight and turn signal switch Headlight switch Headlights Indicator lights Interior lights Light locations Replacement Room light Warning lights Lock Anti lock Braking System ABS Child safety rear door lock Door locks Locking with inside lock knob Locking With key Locking with power door lock switch Steering ToK anara e i Vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism Lock Back door lock LW MW FM radio operation des LW MW FM radio with compact disc t OBHNWOWNWROWWN DNDOWWDRAAMDOO DON ODYINNNNN ODO 1 w N C
20. OFF position The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Carry the Intelligent Key with you The ignition switch is in the ACC or Push the ignition switch to the OFF ON position position A door is not closed securely Close the door securely When pushing the door handle request The outside chime sounds for a few switch to lock the door seconds Type A The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears on the display Type B The Intelligent Key system warning light in the meter blinks in green Type A The NO KEY warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds for a few seconds Type B The Intelligent Key system warning light in the meter blinks in yellow and the inside warning chime sounds for a few seconds When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine Action to take The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Carry the Intelligent Key with you A door is not closed securely Close the door securely Replace the battery with a new one See Battery P 8 24 The battery charge is low The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle Carry the Intelligent Key with you Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 USING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNC TION Operating range Type A with panic alarm Type B without panic alarm It is possible to lock unlock all doors including the back door using the remote keyless entry system The operating distance
21. The air conditioner system in your vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant will not harm the earth s ozone layer However it may contribute in a small part to global warming Special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your vehicle s air conditioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to the air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant P 9 5 A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioner system Air conditioner filter if equipped The air conditioner system is equipped with an air conditioner filter which collects pollen To make sure the air conditioner heats defogs and ventilates efficiently replace the filter according the specified maintenance intervals listed in a separate maintenance booklet To replace the filter contact a NISSAN dealer The filter should be replaced if the air flow decreases significantly or if windows fog up easily when operating the heater or air conditioner AUDIO SYSTEM if equipped AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS A WARNING Do not adjust the audio system while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation Radio e Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influences Intermittent
22. When the 4 or W button located on the right side is pushed and held while a CD is being played the CD will be played while forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the CD will return to the normal play speed When the button or W is pushed while a CD with MP3 or WMA is being played the first track in the next or the previous folder will be played SCAN button When the scan button is pushed while a CD is being played the first 10 seconds of all the tracks will be played When the scan button is pushed again the CD will return to normal play from the track which is playing RPT Repeat button To change the play settings push the RPT button to select the mode CD RPT DISC gt RPT TRACK CD with MP3 or WMA RPT DISC RPT FOLDER gt RPT TRACK RPT DISC All the tracks of the CD will be played continuously in sequential order The display indicates no symbol mark While the RPT button is pushed the display indicates RPT DISC RPT TRACK The selected track of the CD will be played con tinuously While the RPT button is pushed the display indicates RPT TRACK RPT FOLDER All the tracks of selected folder will be played continuously in sequential order CD with MP3 or WMA only While the RPT button is pushed the display indicates RPT FOLDER
23. When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving 5 40 Starting and driving VEHICLE SECURITY When leaving your vehicle unoccupied Always take the key with you even when leaving the vehicle in your own garage Close all windows completely and lock all doors Always park your vehicle where it can be seen Park in a well lit area during the night If the security system is equipped use it even for a short period Never leave children or pets in the vehicle unattended Never leave valuables inside the vehicle Always take valuables with you Never leave the vehicle documents in the vehicle Never leave articles on a roof rack Remove them from the rack and keep and lock them in a safe place such as inside the back door Never leave the spare key in the vehicle COLD WEATHER DRIVING A warnine Whatever the condition drive with caution Accelerate and decelerate with great care If accelerating or decelerating too fast the drive wheels will lose even more tractio
24. For Europe The Stop Start System indicator light illuminates in the meter when the Stop Start System is activated The Stop Start System indicator light blinks at a high speed when the engine hood is open for CVT model The Stop Start System indicator light blinks at a low speed when the Stop Start System is malfunctioning 2 18 Instruments and controls NOTE e When the Stop Start System indicator light blinks at a high speed twice approximately every 1 second be sure to close the engine hood When the engine hood is open the engine will be in the normal stopped state In this case restart the engine with the ignition switch for CVT model e When the Stop Start System indicator light blinks at a low speed once approximately every 1 second have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly For Hong Kong The Idling Stop System indicator light illuminates in the meter when the Idling Stop System is activated or is in the ready state The Idling Stop System indicator light blinks at a high speed when the engine hood is open The Idling Stop System indicator light blinks at a low speed when the Idling Stop System is malfunctioning NOTE e When the Idling Stop System indicator light blinks at a high speed twice approximately every 1 second be sure to check if the engine hood is open When the engine hood is opened the engine will be in the normal stopped state In this case
25. Kong The Stop Start System or Idling Stop System will not stop the engine under the following conditions e The front defogger mode is on automatic air conditioner e The air flow control dial is in the front defogger position manual air conditioner 4 6 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system e The rear window defogger mode is on While the engine is stopped by the Stop Start System or Idling Stop System taking one of the following actions will automatically start the engine e Turn the front defogger mode on automatic air conditioner e Turn the air flow control dial to the front defogger position manual air conditioner for Europe e The air flow control dial is in the front defogger position and the fan speed control dial is on manual air conditioner for Hong Kong e Turn the rear window defogger mode on When the engine is stopped by the Stop Start System or Idling Stop System performance of the heater and air conditioner may be reduced to minimize the fuel consumption For the best heating and air conditioning performance restart the engine by pushing the Stop Start System or Idling Stop System OFF switch See Stop Start System OFF switch P 5 23 or Idling Stop OFF switch P 5 21 OPERATING TIPS for automatic air condi tioner lt JVH0349X JVHO549X Left Hand Drive LHD model When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature
26. PROIZVO A OPREMI Alps Electric Co Ltd suktadna s bitnim zahtjevima iz lanka 4 Pravilnika o radijskoj opremi i telekomunikacijskoj opremi Narodne Novine br 112 2008 odnosno primjenjenim normama EN 300 220 1 V2 1 1 2008 0a EN 300 220 2 V2 1 2 2007 06 EN301 489 4 V1 8 1 2008 047 EN301 489 3 4 4 1 2002 08 IEC 50065_2001 Amd 1 2005 EN 60065 2002 Amd 1 SERN doa a7 aA Zagreb 16 10 2005 Wjesto T datum Dg i polpis odgovorne osobe JVT0009X Intelligent Key system if equipped IZJAVA O SUKLADNOSTI RENAULT ADRESA Radni ka cesia 47 Zagreb MATI NE BROJ SUBJEKTA MBB 080008704 Pod punom odgovorno u izjavijujemo da je radijska aprema I telekomunikacijska tarminaina RITT oprema TWREGESZ PWC1G135 MARKETIN KO IME OPREMI TABBO TWCIGIIS PROZVO A DPREME ALFS ELECTRIC CO LTD sukladna s bitnim zahtjevima iz Ganka 4 Praviinike o radijskoj opremii telekomunikacijskoj oprem Narodne Novine br 1412 2008 odnosno primjenjeni normama BN200 220 1 2 1 1 7 ENS00 220 2 2 1 2 EN303 499 4 V1 8 1 ENSOS 489 3 V3 4 4 ER WODSS 2002 Amd 1 ene a RERAULE NESGAN UVS Jan Radni ka JVT0010X IZJAVA O SUKLADNOSTI ration uf Caton U skadu s lankom 98 stavak 1 rikacifama NN 122 2007 TASMAN BY ONS Se ae ESSIEN INN ERPINA Renault Nissan Hrvatska IMEINAZIV OSOBE ODGOVORNE ZA STAVLJANJE NA TR I TE Rone o apak SR E TORAS ie MASE ADRESA fauw Fadas ces
27. Push the UNLOCK gg button on the remote controller again 4 All doors will be unlocked To switch to the selective door unlock mode perform the following procedure Push the LOCK f and UNLOCK p buttons simultaneously for more than 5 seconds Perform the same procedure to deactivate the selective door unlock mode e When the selective door unlock mode is set the hazard indicator flashes 3 times e When the all door unlock mode is set the hazard indicator flashes once Using panic alarm if equipped If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows 1 Push the PANIC 3p button on the remote controller for more than 0 5 second 2 The theft warning alarm will stay on for 25 seconds 3 The panic alarm stops when It has run for 25 seconds or Any of the buttons on the remote controller are pushed Note Panic button should be pushed for more than 0 5 second Battery indicator light The battery indicator light Type A or Type B illuminates when you push any button If the light does not illuminate the battery is weak or needs replace ment For information regarding replacement of a battery see Remote controller battery P 8 25 Hazard indicator operation if equipped When you lock or unlock the doors the hazard indicator will flash as a confirmation e LOCK The hazard indicator flashes once e
28. RDM Random button To change the play sequence push the RDM button to select the mode CD RDM DISC gt RPT DISC CD with MP3 or WMA RDM DISC RDM FOLDER gt RPT DISC RPT DISC All the tracks of the CD will be played continuously in sequential order The display indicates no symbol mark While the RDM button is pushed the display indicates RPT DISC RDM DISC All the tracks or folders CD with MP3 or WMA only of the CD will be played continuously in random order While the RDM button is pushed the display indicates Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 31 RDM DISC RDM FOLDER All the tracks of the selected folder will be played continuously in random order CD with MP3 or WMA only While the RDM button is pushed the display indicates RDM FOLDER SCRL Scroll button When the title is displayed but it is a long one the whole title is not shown in the display In this case push the button to scroll the title When the title is scrolled to the end of it the display will stop moving and return to the first condition amp CD EJECT button To eject a CD push the CD EJECT amp button When the amp button is pushed twice the CD will be ejected further and the CD can be removed with ease If a CD is ejected by pushing the amp button and it
29. Release the parking brake the foot brake pedal and then gradually start the vehicle in motion The CVT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from the P Park position to any driving position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P Park position and into any of the other positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed A caution e DEPRESS THE FOOT BRAKE PEDAL Shift ing the shift lever to D R or L without depressing the foot brake pedal causes the vehicle to move slowly when the engine is running Make sure the foot brake pedal is depressed fully and the vehicle is stopped before shifting the shift lever e MAKE SURE OF THE SHIFT LEVER POSI TION Make sure the shift lever is in the desired position D and L are used to move forward and R to back up e WARM UP THE ENGINE Due to the higher idle speeds when the engine is cold extra caution must be exercised when shifting the shift lever into the driving position immedi ately after starting the engine oy JVS0011X JVC0026X Right Hand Drive RHD model Push the button A while depressing the foot brake pedal Push the button A Just move the shift lever Shifting A warnine e Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in
30. The lever position HI or qa operates the wiper at high speed operates the To stop the wiper operation move the lever up to the OFF position The lever position MIST or Q operates the wiper one sweep The lever automatically returns to its original position Instruments and controls 2 37 If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow etc the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor If this occurs turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow etc on and around the wiper arms In approximately 20 seconds turn the switch ON again to operate the wiper Washer operation To operate the washer pull the lever toward the back of the vehicle S until the desired amount of washer fluid is spread on the windshield The wiper will automatically operate several times RAIN SENSING AUTO WIPER SYSTEM if equipped Type A 2 38 Instruments and controls Type B The rain sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located on the upper part of the windshield To set the rain sensing auto wiper system push the lever down to the AUTO position T The wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON position The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front 2 High or toward the rear
31. UNLOCK The hazard indicator flashes twice INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM if equipped T 2 3 Type A with panic alarm Type B without panic alarm Intelligent Key 2 Mechanical key inside the Intelligent Key 2 Key number plate A warnine Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pace maker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated uninten tionally when the unit is stored during a flight The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door including the back door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system A caution e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle e Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle e When the outside temperature is extremely low the Intelligent Key system may not function properly The Intelligent Key is always c
32. any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage e If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the foot brake pedal is de pressed the stop lights may not work Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal push the shift lever button and move the shift lever out of the P Park position If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the shift lever is in any positions other than the P Park position the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position perform the following steps 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position while depressing the foot brake pedal Move the shift lever to the P Park position Models with Intelligent Key system Place the ignition switch in the OFF position Models without Intelligent Key system Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position Starting and driving 5 15 P Park Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped and move the shift
33. cellular phones can be paired with the system A maximum of 5 cellular phones can be registered e Select Device Paired Bluetooth cellular phones are listed on the display and can be selected for connection Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 71 e Delete Device A registered Bluetooth cellular phone can be deleted e On Off If this setting is turned off the connection between the Bluetooth devices and the in vehicle Blue tooth module will be cancelled When successfully paired a notification message will be displayed During the connection the following status icons will be displayed top left of display Signal strength Am Battery status EES and Bluetooth 8 If the low battery message comes on the Bluetooth device must be recharged soon Making a call The hands free mode can be operated using the button on the audio system or on the steering wheel Initiating a call A call can be initiated using one of the following methods Redial Phone book Manual dialling Missed calls Dialled calls Received calls Redial To redial or call the last number dialled push the Phone button for more than 2 seconds Making a call from the phone book aa Call Lists a Phone Book Call number M Tull 4 Home Once the Bluetooth connection is made between the registered cellular phone and the audio system phone book data will be trans
34. contact your local authority for advice on disposal The regulations concerning the pollution of the environment will vary from country to country Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 FUEL FILTER diesel engine model DRAINING WATER Drain water in the fuel filter according to the maintenance log shown in a separate maintenance booklet If the water in fuel filter warning light illuminates while the engine is running there might be water in the fuel filter The fuel filter can be accessed after removing the fuse box and the battery from the vehicle Therefore NISSAN recommends that you contact a NISSAN dealer for servicing BLEEDING FUEL SYSTEM Bleed air out of the fuel system after refilling an empty fuel tank by the following action 1 Squeeze the priming pump A located in the engine compartment several times until there is a sudden resistance felt in the pressure then stop 2 Crank the engine until it starts Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds 3 If the engine does not start stop cranking and repeat step 1 above 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself 4 If the engine does not operate smoothly after it has started race it two or three times DRIVE BELTS NOR OWON PE 4 HR12DDR engine Supercharger Water pump Alternator Electromagnetic clutch Crankshaft pulley Drive belt auto tensioner Air conditioner compressor 1 4 2 3 5 6 7 JVM006
35. e f the windows fog up use dehumidified heating instead of the A C off heating Dehumidified defrosting defogging 1 Push the front defogger button The indicator light will illuminate 2 Push the temperature control A Ww but ton to set the desired temperature e To remove frost from the outside surface of the windshield quickly set the temperature to a high temperature and the fan speed to the maximum level e After the windshield is cleared push the front defogger button again The indicator light will turn off e When the front defogger button is pushed the air conditioner will automatically turn on when the outside air temperature is above 2 C 28 F to defog the windshield The air recirculation mode will automatically turn off The outside air circula tion mode a gt will be selected to improve the defogging performance Manual operation The manual mode can be used to control the heater and air conditioner to your desired settings MAN UAL will appear on the display To turn off the heater and air conditioner push the OFF button Fan speed control Push the fan speed control g 8 amp 8 button Push the g button to increase the fan speed Push the 8 button to decrease the fan speed Push the AUTO button to change the fan speed to the automatic mode Air flow control Push the
36. e Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF Do not mix with other fluids e Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and trans mission durability and may damage the transmission which is not covered by the warranty CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT FLUID if equipped Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or replacement is required A caution e Use only the specified transmission fluid Do not mix with other fluids See Recom mended fuel lubricants and capacities P 9 2 e Using transmission fluid other than the specified ones will cause deterioration in driveability and transmission durability and may damage the transmission which is not covered by the warranty AIR CLEANER FILTER The viscous paper type filter element should not be cleaned and reused The dry paper type filter element may be cleaned and reused Replace the air cleaner filter according to the main tenance log shown in a separate maintenance booklet Contact a NISSAN dealer if maintenance or replace ment is required warnine Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner filter not only cleans the intake air it also stops flame if the engine backfires If the air cleaner filter is not installed and the engine backfires you could be burned Never drive with the air cleaner filter off Be caut
37. ft For type B To turn on the rear fog light turn the fog light switch to the Q position with the headlight switch in the zpa or position To turn off the fog light turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The rear fog light should be used only when visibility is seriously reduced Generally to less than 100 m 328 ft WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH A warnine In freezing temperatures the washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision Warm the windshield with the defogger before you wash the windshield A caution e Do not operate the washer continuously for longer than 30 seconds e Do not operate the washer if the window washer fluid reservoir is empty WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH JVIO271X Type A example JVIO034X Type B example The windshield wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position Wiper operation The lever position INT or eum wiper intermittently operates the e f equipped the intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the adjustment control knob longer A or shorter e f equipped the speed of the intermittent opera tion varies depending on the vehicle speed The lever position AUTO 4 operates the rain sensing auto wiper system if equipped See Rain sensing auto wiper system P 2 38 The lever position LO or amp wiper at low speed
38. gt gt 4a button Push and hold the FF or REW button while a CD is being played to fast forward or rewind though the track When the button is released the CD will return to the normal play speed FF Fast Forward REW Rewind mri i TRACK UP DOWN button Push the track up button while a CD is being played to skip forward to the next track The CD will advance the number of times the button is pushed When the last track of the CD is skipped the first track will be played Push the track down button while a CD is being played to start the present track again from the beginning Push the track down button several times to skip back to the previous track The CD will skip tracks backward the number of times the button is pushed When the first track of the CD is skipped the last track will be played RPT Repeat button Push the RPT button repeatedly to change the play mode as follows RPT REPEAT TRACK RPT REPEAT ALL gt RPT REPEAT TRACK RPT TRACK The selected track will be played repeatedly RPT ALL All the tracks on the CD will be played in sequential order 4 54 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system MIX MIX button Push the MIx button repeatedly to change the play mode as follows MIX DISC gt RPT REPEAT ALL gt MIX DISC MIX DISC All the tracks on the CD will be played in a rand
39. motion This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed After more wear of the brake pad the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear warning sound is heard Have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly See Brakes P 8 18 Intelligent Key buzzer if equipped The Intelligent Key buzzer sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found e The ignition switch is not returned to the LOCK position when locking the doors e The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors e Any doors are not closed securely when locking the doors When the buzzer sounds be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See Intelligent Key system P 3 9 Key reminder chime The key reminder chime will sound if any of the following operations are detected Model with Intelligent Key system e The drivers door is opened while the ignition switch is in the ACC position Model without Intelligent Key system e The driver s door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch and the ignition switch is in the OFF position Light reminder chime The light reminder chime will sound if the driver s door is opened while the headlight switch is in the pa or D position and the ignition switch i
40. the proper seat belt fit See Seat belts P 1 7 The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked Seat lifter if equipped Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved JVRO217X The seats can be warmed by built in heaters The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other 1 Start the engine 2 Select heat range e For high heat push the HI High side of the switch 4 e For low heat push the LO Low side of the switch The indicator light will illuminate when low or high is selected 3 To turn off the heater return the switch to the level position Make sure the indicator light turns off The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on When the vehicle s interior is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn off the switch A caution e The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running e Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat e Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cushion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated e Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pi
41. the system is turned on again with the devices removed or disconnected the radio will turn on To turn off the audio system push the I dial Volume control To control the volume turn the I dial Turn the l dial clockwise to make the sound louder Turn the dial counterclockwise to make the sound quieter SETUP SETUP button To configure Audio Clock Bluetooth Language or Scroll direction settings perform the following proce dure 1 Push the setup button 2 Push the dial 3 Turn the ENTER dial clockwise or counterclockwise The setting menu will be displayed in the following order Audio lt Clock lt Bluetooth lt Language Scroll Direction After the desired levels have been set either push the button repeatedly push the serue button or wait for several seconds without pushing any buttons to exit the menu screen Audio adjustments Push the setur button to enter the setup menu screen and then select Audio Each time the enter dial is pushed the mode will change as follows BASS TREBLE gt BALANCE gt FADE AUX VOL SPD VOL Audio setup menu screen gt BASS Turn the enter dial clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the following items and push the enter dial to confirm Bass control Use this control to enhance or attenuate the bass respon
42. 1 Engine stop If the engine stops when the Stop Start System is activated the message is shown 2 26 Instruments and controls 2 Auto start deactivation If the engine stops when the Stop Start System is activated and will not start automatically the message is shown 3 System fault If the Stop Start System is activated but does not operate correctly the message is shown Visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop 4 Stop Start System If the Stop Start System is deactivated using the Stop Start System OFF switch the message is shown If the Stop Start System is activated using the Stop Start System OFF switch the STOP START ON message is shown TRIP COMPUTER for Type C JSVIOOO6X Switches for the trip computer are located on the left or right side of the combination meter panel To operate the trip computer push the switches as shown above Gy ENTER switch e NEXT switch When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the J switch Each time the m switch A is pushed the display will change as follows CO2 saved if equipped gt Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption and speed gt Elapsed time and trip odometer if equipped gt Distance to empty Outside air temperature Idling stop if equipped gt Setting gt Warning check CO2 saved if equipped VEHICLE INFO 0 CO
43. 39 For India except for Micra Active Affix the sticker as illustrated by aligning the mark with dividing lines and NOTE Align the mark with the center mark C of the headlight bulb 100 3 9 Units mm inch JVM0279X When the vehicle is driven in a country where the driving lane is different to your home country affix an opaque sticker on the headlight NOTE e Use an opaque material that prevents the light from passing through it e Note that transparent materials do not work effectively 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait until the headlights cool down 2 Prepare the stickers referring to the figure Make f f P the stickers that will be affixed to the surface 3 Affix the sticker by aligning the corner of the of the right side headlight and the left side sticker with the position of the mark that is headlight located on the surface of the headlight seen from front 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself For Thailand Brunei and Hong Kong 36 1 42 26 1 02 33 1 30 Units mm inch When the vehicle is driven in a country where the driving lane is different to your home country affix an opaque sticker on the headlight f Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait until the headlights cool down Prepare the stickers referring to the figure Make the stickers A that will be affixed to the surface of the right side headlight
44. 4GB 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Displayable character codes 3 Non BOM Big Endian 05 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 07 SHIFT JIS 1 k Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 4 When VBR files are played the playback time may not be displayed correctly 4 16 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Troubleshooting guide model with type A B C audio unit Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly Check if the disc is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player and if there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data MP3 WMA files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Files with extensions other than MP3 WMA mp3 or wma cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the disc or the fil
45. AM station frequencies To store the station frequency 1 Tune to the desired broadcasting station fre quency by using the gt or lt button 2 Push and hold a memory button 1 6 until a beep sounds 3 The switch number and frequency will appear on the display when the memory is stored properly 4 Perform steps 1 3 for all other memory buttons Push a memory button 1 6 to select a desired memory If the battery cable is disconnected or if the audio fuse blows the radio memory will be erased In such a case reset the desired stations AUTOP Automatic Preset button The audio system can store up to 6 FM station frequencies and 6 AM station frequencies To store the station frequency automatically push and hold the juror button until a beep sounds The station will be automatically stored in the AUTO P memory The display indicates AP Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 23 Push the jutor button to select a desired memory FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER Type B 4 5 6 Bluetooth TA NEWS FM AM cD E gt Of JVH0003X 1 Sound preference button 7 MENU button 2 TA Traffic Announcement NEWS button 8 SEEK TRACK button 3 FM AM band select button 9 TUNE button 4 CD button 10 ENTER button 5 AUX button 11 PHONE END BACK button 6 CD
46. C for Sports version Remove the hook cover from the bumper with a suitable tool Securely install the recovery hook as illustrated The hook is stored with the jacking tools Make sure that the recovery hook is properly secured in its storage area after use 6 14 Incase of emergency Rear Rear Do not use the hook to tow the vehicle 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior s aisina a n a A aA 7 2 Cleaning IMTS HON nio eni a a n i Washing Air fresheners Removing spots Waxing Glass 7 2 Seat belts Underbody 7 3 Corrosion protection Wheels nsss 7 3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion Environmental factors influence rate of corrosion To protect your vehicle from corrosion Aluminum alloy wheels Chrome parts CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle it is important to take proper care of it Whenever possible park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area to minimize the chances of damaging the paint surface of your vehicle When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING In the following instances wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface e After a rainfall which may cause the paint surface damage from aci
47. CD CD ERROR Check Disk e Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly the label side is facing up etc e Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches e Confirm that the disc is a CD and not a DVD e Confirm that the disc contains audio files Push eject Eject CD CD Ejecting This is a malfunction due to the temperature inside the player is too high Remove the CD by pushing the EJECT button and after a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal Unplayable model with type A B C audio unit The file is unplayable in this audio system only MP3 or WMA CD USB Universal Serial Bus if equipped A warnine Do not connect or disconnect the USB device while driving Doing so can be a distraction If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury A caution e Do not force the USB device into the USB port Inserting the USB device tilted or up side down into the port may damage the USB device and the port Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port e Do not grab the USB port cover if equipped when pulling the USB device out of the port This could damage the port and the cover e Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally Pulling the cable may break the wire USB device or the port e To avoid damage and loss of fu
48. Each radio is uniquely matched to the vehicle s immobilizer and therefore cannot be transferred to any other vehicle Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position POWER ON OFF button To turn on the audio system push the POWER ON OFF button e The system will turn on in the mode radio or CD which was used immediately before the system was last turned off e f there is no CD loaded the radio will be turned on To turn off the audio system push the POWER ON OFF button Volume control To control the volume turn the VOLUME control dial Turn the VOLUME control dial clockwise to increase the audio volume Turn the VOLUME control dial counterclockwise to decrease the audio volume D Sound preference button To enter the audio mode radio or CD push the J button To change the audio settings BASS TREBLE FADE BALANCE EQ push the button or ENTER button to select the mode BASS gt TREBLE gt BALANCE gt FADE gt EQ gt BASS To adjust each audio setting turn the MENU VOL control dial clockwise or counterclockwise BASS to decrease to increase TREB LE to decrease to increase BAL ANCE R to adjust to the right L to adjust to the left FADE R F to adjust to the front R to adjust to the rear EQ Equalizer Use this control to change the pre
49. HR12DE and HR15DE engine models P 8 13 Clean and reinstall the drain plug and new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 29 to 39 N m 3 0 to 4 0 kg m 22 to 29 ft lb Refill the recommended engine oil and quantity See Recommended fuel lubricants and capaci ties P 9 2 Securely install the oil filler cap Start the engine Check the drain plug for any sign of leakage Check the engine oil level according to the proper procedure See Checking engine oil level P 8 11 Engine oil filter replacement HR12DDR HR12DE and HR15DE engine models JVM0059X HR12DDR engine model Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 HR12DE engine model 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself mona JVMO0001X HR15DE engine model Oil filler cap Oil drain plug Oil filter Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Turn the engine off Drain the engine oil according to the proper procedure See Engine oil replacement HR12DDR HR12DE and HR15DE engine mod els P 8 12 11 Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench Depending on the engine model a special cap type wrench may be required See a NISSAN dealer for more information Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean cloth Be sure to remove any old gasket remain
50. Intelligent Key is pushed all doors will be locked automatically after another 30 seconds e Opening any door or back door e Pushing the ignition switch Selecting door unlock mode if equipped When you first receive the vehicle the door unlock mode is set to unlock all the doors with one push of the UNLOCK p button The door unlock mode can be switched to the selective door unlock mode which unlocks the passenger s doors at the second push of the UNLOCK Q button Selective door unlock mode 1 Push the UNLOCK Intelligent Key A button on the The driver s door unlocks 3 Push the UNLOCK 3 button on the Intelligent Key again 4 All doors will be unlocked To switch to the selective door unlock mode perform the following procedure Push the LOCK f and UNLOCK p buttons simultaneously for more than 5 seconds Perform the same procedure to deactivate the selective door unlock mode e When the selective door unlock mode is set the hazard indicator flashes 3 times e When the all door unlock mode is set the hazard indicator flashes once Using panic alarm if equipped If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows 1 Push the PANIC p button on the Intelligent Key for more than 0 5 second 2 The theft warning alarm will stay on for 25 seconds 3 The panic alarm stops when It has run for
51. MIL e OFF Overdrive off indicator light Rear fog light indicator light Security indicator light Slip indicator light if equipped except for Australia and New Zealand Speed limiter indicator light SPORT mode indicator light Stop Start System indicator light if equipped for Europe Idling Stop System indicator light for Hong Kong Turn signals hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light if equipped CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed apply the parking brake fasten the seat belts and turn the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine The following lights will illuminate F Cy PS If equipped the following lights will illuminate briefly and then turn off or ABS seor 2 4 SF wk red green wr amp B We If any lights fail to illuminate it may indicate a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system Have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display if equipped below the speedometer See Vehicle information display P 2 20 WARNING LIGHTS ABS Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light if equipped When the ignition switch is in the ON position
52. MODE button to change the air flow mode Air flows from the center and side ventila tors 174 Air flows from the center and side ventila tors and foot outlets p Air flows mainly from the foot outlets 4 Air flows from the defogger outlets and foot outlets Temperature control Push the temperature control a W button to set the desired temperature Push the button to increase the temperature Push the w button to decrease the temperature Outside air circulation Push the outside air circulation ea button to draw the air flow from outside the vehicle The aa indicator light will illuminate Air recirculation Push the air recirculation lt button to circulate the air flow inside the vehicle The lt gt indicator light will illuminate 4 10 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Automatic air intake control If the indicator light on either the outside air circulation e gt button or the air recirculation gt button is illuminated push and hold the button with the light illuminated The indicator light will blink twice The automatic air intake control mode is set SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER warnine The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with the proper equipment
53. NEWS button is pushed during the news interruption mode the radio returns to the previous source However the news standby mode is kept e When the CD button is pushed during the news interruption mode the radio changes to the CD mode However the news standby mode is kept If the radio band is changed to the MW or LW the news standby mode will be turned off FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER Type C OOS OOTP OLN MUTE button FM AM radio band select button CD button Radio memory buttons AUX button CD EJECT button DISP button SEEK TRACK FILE button 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 131415 JVHO200X SCAN button RDM Random button RPT Repeat button Power button Volume control knob AUX IN auxiliary input jack AUTO P Automatic Preset button SCRL Scroll button TUNE FF Forward REW Rewind FOLDER button Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 29 17 MENU button Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position POWER button To turn on the audio system push the Power button e The system will turn on in the mode radio or CD which was used immediately before the system was turned off e f there is no CD loaded the radio will be turned on To turn off the audio system push the PWR button Volume control To control the volume
54. Perform steps 1 3 for all other memory buttons Push a memory button 1 6 to select the desired memory If the battery cable is disconnected or if the audio fuse blows the radio memory will be erased In this case reset the desired stations 4 36 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system ABISP AUTO P DISP button The audio system can store up to 6 FM station frequencies and 6 AM station frequencies To store the station frequency automatically push and hold the PHRA button until a beep sounds The station will be automatically stored in the AUTO P memory The display indicates AUTO P Push the PRP button to select a memory USB memory device operation GOE peia track rower we v JVHO505X Audio main operation The USB outlet connector is located on the audio unit Open the lid and connect a USB memory device into the connector The system switches to the USB mode automatically If the system has been turned off while the USB memory device was playing pushing the dial will start playback of the USB memory device If the USB memory device cannot be played the message CHK USB will be displayed A caution e Do not force the USB memory device into the USB port Inserting the USB memory device tilted or upside down into the port may damage the USB memory device and or the port
55. Push the mepi button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used A warnine Do not allow the cable or an external device connected to the AUX terminal to affect your driving NOTE e Depending on the external device please note that the volume may be louder or quieter than that of the external device e When the AUX contacts the plug of the connector cable noise may be heard e The connected external device cannot be operated with the main audio system The volume and sound quality can be adjusted e The song title in the external device cannot be displayed on the audio display e For the power source of the external device use the special battery The external device cannot be charged with the AUX terminal Noise may be heard if the CD radio etc is operated while charging the battery with the power socket of the vehicle CD player operation Giat peia track rower we v JVHO505X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Loading Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing To stop playback push the I di
56. Resetting displays When the average fuel consumption average speed elapsed time is displayed push the trip computer mode switch A for longer than 3 seconds The display of average fuel consumption average speed elapsed time trip odometer accumulated time for Stop Start System or Idling Stop System and current saved fuel consumption for Stop Start System or Idling Stop System will be reset at the same time STOP START SYSTEM CO2 savings if equipped for Europe BACK gt RESET CO2 000 00 kg MENTER NEXT JVIO269X Type A BACK CO2 000 00 kg 00 00 00 JVIO270X Type B The CO2 savings and the engine stop time for Type B using the Stop Start System are kept in a submenu Trip Saving Type A The Trip Saving mode shows the estimated CO2 exhaust emissions prevented since last reset It is possible to reset using the RESET submenu then push the J switch to set to zero NOTE The Trip Saving value is the same information that is displayed when the engine is automati cally stopped by the Stop Start System Total Saving Type B The Total Saving mode shows e The estimated CO2 exhaust emissions prevented e The time that the engine has been stopped by the Stop Start System NOTE The Total Saving values cannot be reset and show accumulated Stop Start System informa tion since the vehicle was built TIRE ANGLE INDICATOR if equipped This system is designed so that the
57. TIRE PUNCTURE REPAIR KIT if equipped The emergency tire repair kit is supplied to the vehicle instead of a spare tire The kit must be used for temporarily fixing a minor tire puncture After using the repair kit see a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire inspection and repair replacement A caution Do not use the emergency tire repair kit under the following conditions Call a NISSAN dealer or professional road assistance 8 44 Maintenance and do it yourself when the sealant has passed its expiration date when the cut or the puncture is approxi mately 6 mm 0 25 in or longer when the side of the tire is damaged when the vehicle has been driven with a considerable loss of air from the tire when the tire is completely displaced inside or outside the rim when the tire rim is damaged when two or more tires are punctured See Flat tire P 6 2 MEMO Maintenance and do it yourself 8 45 MEMO 8 46 Maintenance and do it yourself 9 Technical information Recommended fuel lubricants and capacities oo 9 2 Uniform tire quality grading if equipped Fuel recommendation Treadwear Recommended SAE viscosity number Traction AA A B and C Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant Temperature A B and C ENGIN wo sesssscsesseeseesees 9 6 Radio approval number and information 9 12 Tires and wheels 9 8 For Europe Dimensions 0 0 9 8 For Croatia 9 9 F
58. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bags or damage to the supplemental air bag systems e Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system suspension sys tem or front end structure This could affect proper operation of the supplemental air bag systems e Tampering with the supplemental air bag systems may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel by placing materials over the steering wheel pad and above and by installing additional trim materials around the supplemental air bag systems e Work around and on the supplemental air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wiring should not be modified or disconnected Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing de vices should not be used on the supple mental air bag systems e The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and or orange for easy identification When the air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Supplemental front impact air bag system The driver s supplemental front impact air bag is located at the center of the steering wheel The passenger s supplemental front impact air bag if equipped is
59. Type B NISSAN recommends that you consult the local regulations concerning the use of lights AUTO position if equipped When the ignition switch is in the ON position and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights front clearance lights instrument panel lights rear combination light and other lights turn on automatically depending on the brightness of the surroundings The headlights will turn on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather when the windshield wiper is operated continuously for Hong Kong When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position the lights will turn off automatically JVIO023X Do not place any objects on top of the sensor The sensor senses the brightness level and controls the autolight function If the sensor is covered it reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate a position The paz position turns on the front clearance lights instrument panel lights rear combination lights and other lights zD position The Z position turns on the headlights in addition to the other lights Headlight beam To turn on the high beam push the lever towards the front position To turn off the high beam return the lever to the neutral position To flash the headlights pull the lever towards the rearmost position The headlights can be flashed even when the headlights are not on Instruments and controls 2
60. accident or other unexpected circumstances while you are in the vehicle e Place the ignition switch to the ON position the Super Lock System will be released and all the doors can be unlocked with the power door lock switch You can then open the doors e Unlock the door using the remote controller or the Intelligent Key The Super Lock System will be released and you can open the door LOCKING WITH KEY Type A To lock the driver s door or passenger s door insert the key to the door cylinder located on the driver s or passenger s side door and turn the key to the front of the vehicle 4 For locking the back door see Opening back door P 3 20 To unlock the driver s door or passenger s door turn the key to the rear of the vehicle 2 For unlocking the back door see Opening back door P 3 20 Type B To lock the door insert the key to the door key cylinder located on the driver s side door and turn the key to the front of the vehicle 4 All doors including the back door will lock To unlock the door turn the key to the rear of the vehicle 2 All doors including the back door will unlock Type C To lock the driver s door insert the key to the door cylinder located on the driver s side door and turn the key to the front of the vehicle Q For locking other doors use the power door lock switch See Locking with power door lock switch P 3 6 To unlock the driver s door t
61. and hold it to help start the engine A caution Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start turn the ignition switch off and wait 10 seconds before cranking the engine again Otherwise the starter could be damaged If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables the instructions and cautions contained in the 6 In case of emergency section should be carefully followed Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting the engine to warm up Drive at moderate speeds for a short distance first especially in cold weather A caution Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is warming up DIESEL ENGINE 1 2 3 Apply the parking brake Depress the foot brake pedal Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait until the glow plug indicator light wy turns off Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition switch to the START position Immediately release the ignition switch when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedures A caution Do not operate the starter for more than 20 seconds at a time If the engine does not start turn the ignition switch off and wait 20 seco
62. and air conditioner and audio system e Do not strike the camera It is a precision instrument Otherwise it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock A caution Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the lens HOW TO READ DISPLAYED LINES Guide lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the bumper line are displayed on the monitor Distance guide lines Indicate distances from the vehicle body e Red line 4 approx 0 5 m 1 5 ft e Yellow line approx 1 m 3 ft e Green line approx 2 m 7 ft e Green line approx 3 m 10 ft Vehicle width guide lines Indicate the vehicle width when backing up DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL DISTANCES Backing up on a steep uphill JVHO521X When backing up the vehicle up a hill the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance For example the display shows 1 m 8 ft to the place A but the actual 1 m 8 ft distance on the hill is the place Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor further than it appears Backing up on a steep downhill JVHO522X When backing up the vehicle down a hill the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown further than the actual distance For example the display shows 1 m 3 ft to the place A but
63. and the left side headlight 46 1 81 25 0 98 JVM0283X NOTE e Use an opaque material that prevents the light from passing through it e Note that transparent materials do not work effectively Using a marker pen or similar put a mark on the surface of the headlight that will be used as a guide for attaching the sticker A to the head light The mark is placed 36 mm 1 42 inch or 46 mm 1 81 inch to the left of the mark B on the surface of the headlight seen from front Affix the sticker by aligning the corner of the sticker with the position of the mark Affix the sticker as illustrated by aligning the mark with dividing lines NOTE Align the mark with the center mark C of the headlight bulb Maintenance and do it yourself 8 41 TIRES AND WHEELS If you have a flat tire see Flat tire P 6 2 TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE Periodically check the pressure of the tires including the spare An incorrect tire pressure may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling The tire pressure should be checked when tires are COLD Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 6 km 1 mile COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard For the location of the tire placard see Vehicle identification P 9 9 Insufficient pressure can lead to an overheating of the tire and subsequent internal damage At high spee
64. and then release the clutch pedal once Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R or 1 Suggested maximum speed in each gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly or if you need to accelerate Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed shown below in any gear For level road driving use the highest gear suggested for that speed Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road conditions which will ensure safe operation Do not over rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control HR12DE engine model for Micra Active km h MPH 1st 38 24 2nd 69 43 3rd 101 63 4th 128 80 5th HR12DE engine model for Thailand Pakistan Brunei Australia and New Zealand km h MPH 1st 43 27 2nd 79 49 3rd 116 72 4th 157 97 5th HR12DE engine model for Europe km h MPH 1st 51 32 2nd 93 58 3rd 137 85 4th 174 108 5th HR12DE engine model for Indonesia Singa pore km h MPH 1st 39 24 2nd 72 45 3rd 105 66 4th 143 89 5th HR12DE engine model for Central and South America and Caribbean countries km h MPH 1st 39 24 2nd 71 44 3rd 105 65 4th 142 88 5th HR12DE engine model except for Thailand Pakistan Australia New Zealand Europe In donesia Brunei Singapore Central and South America Cari
65. are too large for a child restraint system should be seated and restrained by the seat belts that are provided If the child s seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck the use of a booster seat commercially available may help overcome this The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips The booster seat should also fit the vehicle seat Once the child has grown so that the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face or neck of the child use the shoulder belt without the booster seat In addition there are many types of child restraint systems available for larger children that should be used for maximum protection PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your abdominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts Contact your doctor for specific recommenda tions CENTER MARK ON SEAT BELTS Selecting correct set of seat belts The center seat belt buckle or both the buckle and the tongue are identified by the CENTER mark The cent
66. arrow points to the front of the vehicle 5S 9 Z 4 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action gt Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and li Bluetooth censed to Clarion Co Ltd and Daewoo IS Corp 2013 NISSAN MOTOR CO LTD Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical information 0 Illustrated table of contents Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SRS 0 2 Exterior fronts Aaea niia aa V aa Higin 0 3 Exterior rear Passenger compartment Instrument panel Left Hand Drive LHD model 04 Right Hand Drive RHD model Type A Right Hand Drive RHD model Type B Right Hand Drive RHD model Type C Meters and gauges Engine compartment HR12DDR engine model HR12DE engine model HR15DE engine model K9K engine model SEATS SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS JVC0101X 1 Child restraint anchor point for top tether strap 9 ISOFIX child restraint syst
67. be resumed after the following conditions are completed while using a Hands free phone while checking a connection with a cellular phone The in vehicle antenna for Bluetooth commu nication is built in the system Do not place the Bluetooth audio device in an area surrounded by metal far away from the system or in a narrow space where the device closely contacts the body or the seat Otherwise sound degradation or connection interference may occur While a Bluetooth audio device is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual This system is compatible with the Bluetooth AV profile A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and li censed to Daewoo IS Corp Compact Disc USB memory device with MP8 or WMA if equipped Explanation of terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD can reduce the file size by approximately 10 1 ratio Sampling 44 1 kHz Bit rate 128 kbps with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear WMA Windows Media Audio
68. by a NISSAN dealer promptly Malfunction Indicator Light MIL When the ignition switch is in the ON position the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL illuminates After starting the engine the MIL turns off This indicates that the engine control system is operational If the MIL illuminates or blinks if equipped while the engine is running it may indicate that the engine control system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on steady An engine control system malfunction has been detected Have the vehicle checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction Indicator Light MIL blinking if equipped An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the engine control system Have the vehicle checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly To reduce or avoid possible damage to the engine control system when the MIL illuminates or blinks Avoid driving at speeds above 70 km h 43 MPH Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration Avoid going up steep uphill grades Avoid carrying or towing unnecessary loads A caution e Continuing vehicle operation without proper servicing of the engine control system could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel econ omy and damage to th
69. center seat belt passed through the path on the seatback 1 4 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system When loading the luggage in the luggage room be careful not to scratch or damage the seat belt If the rear seatback needs to be folded without passing the seat belt through the path be sure to observe the following items After returning the rear seatback to its original position pass the seat belt through the path When operating the seatback be careful not to scratch or damage the seat belt Folding Type B Secure the seat belt on the clip Pull up the knob T and fold the seatback down Pull the strap and lift the rear of the seat cushion and the seatback Securing of the folded rear seat if equipped lt w JVROOO8X 1 Remove the hook 4 from the anchor on the underside of the cushion 2 Secure the hook on the stalk as illustrated JVR0007X Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold down position Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats Properly secure all luggage to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place lug gage higher than the seatbacks When returning the seatbacks to the u
70. close to the object less than 30 cm 11 8 in away the number of bars decreases and the indicator stops blinking the tone sounds continuously PARKING SPACE MEASUREMENT OP ERATION if equipped System operation JVS0020X Parking space measurement switch Q Parking space measurement switch ON indicator light The system is intended to help the driver parallel park easily When the system is activated by pressing the switch it informs the driver of parallel parking availability Press the switch 4 to turn on the parking space measurement system Select left or right to parallel park by operating the turn signal switch Drive the vehicle alongside the cars you will parallel park between at approximately 15 km h 9 MPH Maintain approximately a one meter dis tance between your vehicle and the one next to your vehicle as illustrated When the parking space is measured a beep sounds JVS0030X Starting and driving 5 35 15 km h 15 km h Measurement result The display indicating the measurement result OK DIFFICULT or NOT ADVISED will appear in the meter as illustrated A caution e This system provides you with an estimation of the space in which parallel parking is possible Be aware that the system does not guarantee that parking is always possi
71. comes on while the engine is running you can drive the vehicle However in these cases contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible BB Low fuel warning light if equipped The low fuel warning light illuminates when the fuel level in the tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient before the fuel gauge reaches the empty 0 position There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty 0 position Malfunction warning light red diesel engine model When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the malfunction warning light illuminates in red This means that the system is operational After starting the engine the warning light turns off For the orange Malfunction Indicator Light MIL see Malfunction Indicator Light MIL P 2 17 for details If the malfunction warning light red illuminates continuously while the engine is running it may indicate an engine control system malfunction Have your vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer A caution Continuing vehicle operation without proper servicing of the engine control system could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and damage to the engine control system which may affect the vehicle s warranty coverage A Master warning light if equipped When the ignition
72. conditions e When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel e When the Intelligent Key is placed inside of the glove box e When the Intelligent Key is placed inside of the door pockets e When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under the spare tire area e When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials The lockout protection may function when the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle but is too close to the vehicle Unlocking doors All door unlock 1 Carry the Intelligent Key with you 2 Push the door handle request switch A or back door request switch A 3 All doors and the back door will be unlocked 4 The hazard indicator flashes twice If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors that door may not be unlocked Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle push the door handle request switch to unlock the door Selective door unlock mode 1 Carry the Intelligent Key with you 2 Push the door handle request switch driver s or front passenger s A or back door request switch 3 The corresponding door will be unlocked 4 Push the door handle request switch driver s or front passenger s A or back door request switch again within 5 seconds 5 All doors will be unlocked Switching door unlock mode if equipped To switch the door un
73. damage Therefore be sure that the required fuel is available wherever you go For additional information regarding recommended fuel see earlier in this section When transferring the registration of your vehi cle to another country state province or district contact the appropriate authorities to find out that the vehicle complies with the local legal requirements In some cases a vehicle cannot meet the legal require ments and it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations In addition there may be possibilities that a vehicle cannot be adapted in certain areas The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district therefore the vehicle specification may differ When any vehicles are to be taken into another country state province or district its modifica tion transportation registration and any other expenses which may result are the responsi bility of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconveniences that may result VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE The plate is affixed as shown A Built date plate for Australia and New Zealand Built date is stamped on the vehicle identification plate The built date means the calendar month and the year in which the body shell and power train subassemblies are conjoined and the vehicle is driven or moved from the pro
74. depends upon the conditions around the vehicle To securely operate the lock and unlock buttons approach the vehicle to about 1 m 3 3 ft from the door 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments The remote keyless entry system will not function under the following conditions e When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range e When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged For information regarding the replacement of a battery see Battery P 8 24 Locking doors When you lock or unlock the doors including the back door the hazard indicator will flash as a confirmation 1 Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and carry the Intelligent Key Close all doors including the back door Push the LOCK f button on the Intelligent Key All doors will be locked Operate the door handles to confirm that the doors have been securely locked A caution After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles Unlocking doors 1 Push the UNLOCK Intelligent Key 2 All doors including the back door will be unlocked A button on the All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the UNLOCK p button on the Intelligent Key while the doors are locked If during this 30 second time period the UNLOCK p button on the
75. details see CD player operation P 4 46 List view Quick search ppt lt lt MIX Random play RPT Repeat track Folder browsing DISP DISP button While a track with recorded music information tags ID3 tags is being played the title of the played track is displayed If the tags are not provided a notification message is displayed 4 48 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system When the ose button is pushed repeatedly further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows Track time Artist gt Album Folder name gt Track time Track details By pushing and holding the button the display will show a detailed overview and after a few seconds it will return to the main display Push the o1se button briefly to return to the main display immediately iPod player operation Connecting iPod The USB outlet connector is located in the center console Open the USB outlet connector lid and connect the iPod cable to the USB connector The battery of the iPod is charged while the device is connected to the vehicle Depending on the version of the iPod the display on the iPod shows a NISSAN or Accessory Attached screen when the connection is completed When the iPod is connected to the vehicle the iPod music library can only be operated by the vehicle audio control
76. direction will open the ventilators Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob up down left right until the preferred position is achieved Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 5 Circle type 28 SAA3126 Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by opening closing or rotating HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER if equipped A warnine e The heater and air conditioner operate only when the engine is running e Never leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in the vehicle Pets should not be left alone either They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and inadvertently be come involved in a serious accident and injure themselves On hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause se vere or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up e Do not adjust the heating and air condition ing controls while driving so that full atten tion may be given to vehicle operation The heater and air conditioner operate when the engine is running The air blower will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position even if the engine is turned off For model with Stop Start System if equipped for Europe or Idling Stop System for Hong
77. etc When the vehicle is stopped for long periods of time turn off the engine When the engine hood is opened with the Idling Stop System on the engine will be in the normal stopped state with the buzzer sounding In this case restart the engine with the ignition switch When the engine is stopped by the Idling Stop System heating cooling and dehumidifying functions will be deactivated To avoid the air conditioning functions from being deactivated turn off the Idling Stop mode by pressing the Idling Stop OFF switch OPERATING IDLING STOP SYSTEM NOTE The Idling Stop System indicator light illumi nates in the meter while driving if any of the Idling Stop System conditions are met e When the brake pedal is depressed to stop the vehicle with the shift lever in the D Drive position the engine will stop auto matically e When you release your foot from the brake pedal the engine will start automatically e The Idling Stop System indicator light and a buzzer will inform you of the Idling Stop System status For more details see Stop Start System indicator light if equipped for Europe Idling Stop System indicator light for Hong Kong P 2 18 or Idling Stop System reminder buzzer for Hong Kong P 2 19 IDLING STOP OFF SWITCH JVS0072X The system can be temporarily deactivated by pressing the Idling Stop OFF switch Pressing the switch a second time or restarting the engine by using t
78. feel the latch engage SSS0541 2 Adjust the seat belt length To shorten hold the tongue and pull the upper belt as illustrated To lengthen hold the tongue and pull the under belt as illustrated 2 3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown Unfastening seat belts Push the button on the buckle SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE Periodically check that the seat belt and all the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the seat belt webbing is found the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry CHILD RESTRAINTS PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINT USAGE e Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle Also it is dangerous to put a seat belt around a child being carried on the occu pant
79. fitted child restraints Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 19 SSS0755A Step 7 Test the child restraint before you place the child in it Push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is held securely in place Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 3 through 7 Rear facing Be sure to follow the manufacturer s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint on the rear outboard seats using ISOFIX SSS0649A Steps 1 and 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the ISOFIX lower anchors 2 SSS0756A Step 3 Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child restraint firmly tightened press downward 3 and rearward 4 firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compre
80. for which they have been designed A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and if appropriate in a child restraint system Do not run the belt behind your back or under your arm Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Serious injury may occur if a seat belt is not worn properly No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operat ing to remove slack or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack Care should be taken to avoid contamina tion of the webbing with polishes oils and chemicals and particularly battery acid Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed con taminated or damaged It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly
81. gt lt lt When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually push the gt or 44 button until the preferred frequency is obtained TUNE button The frequency changes in steps of 100 kHz on the FM band 9 kHz on the MW band and 3 kHz on the LW band PPI 144 SEEK button When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically push the 1 or 144 button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at that station Radio memory buttons The audio system can store up to 18 FM station frequencies six in each of FM 1 FM 2 and FM T 6 MW and 6 LW station frequencies To store the station frequency manually 1 Tune to the preferred broadcasting station fre quency by using the gt lt lt or gt gt I lt lt button 2 Push and hold a radio memory button until a beep sounds The radio mutes when the memory button is pushed 3 The channel indicator will be displayed and the radio mute will be cancelled indicating that the memory is stored properly 4 Perform steps 1 3 for all other memory buttons If the battery cable is disconnected or if the audio fuse blows the radio memory will be erased If this occurs reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS Alternative Frequency AF e The AF function operates in th
82. is not taken out from the loading slot the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD 12 cm discs only FM AM radio operation JVHO201X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Frequency range and step change for Central South America To change the frequency range and step specification of the radio perform the following operations 1 Turn the audio unit off by pushing the POWER button 2 Turn the audio unit on by pushing the POWER button while pushing the radio memory buttons 1 4 J and the button For Central South America specification the display indicates AM 530 kHz For the other specification the display indicates AM 531 kHz If you experience difficulties in changing radio speci fication contact a NISSAN dealer FMAM button When the m am button is pushed while the audio system is off the audio system will turn on and the radio will turn on When the mea button is pushed while another audio source is playing the another audio source will turn off and the radio will turn on To change the radio bands push the mm a button until the desired band is displayed e AM gt FM1 gt FM2 The FM stereo indic
83. is displayed When the osP button is pushed repeatedly further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows Track time Artist gt Album Folder name gt Track time Track details By pushing and holding the osr button the display will show a detailed overview and after a few seconds it will return to the main display Push the nsP button briefly to return to the main display immediately Bluetooth audio player operation Regulatory information Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and licensed to Daewoo IS Corp Bluetooth CE statement Hereby Daewoo IS Corp declares that this system is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 49 NOTE The audio system only supports Bluetooth devices with AVRCP Audio Video Remote Con trol Profile version 1 3 1 0 or earlier Bluetooth audio player setting To set up the Bluetooth system with your preferred device push the letur button and select Bluetooth and then push the enter dial or alternatively push the button The following items are available e Pair Device Bluetooth devices can be paired with the system A maximum of 5 devices can be registered e Select Device Paired Bluetooth de
84. key in the vehicle e When the key is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the power door lock switch will not lock the doors To unlock push the power door lock switch to the unlock position VEHICLE SPEED SENSING DOOR LOCK MECHANISM if equipped All doors will be locked automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 10 km h 6 MPH Once the lock has been unlocked while driving the vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism will not lock the door again unless one of the following is performed e Opening any doors e Placing the ignition switch in the OFF position To activate or deactivate vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism To activate or deactivate the door lock mechanism perform the following procedures 1 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 2 Within 20 seconds push and hold the power door lock switch to the LOCK position for 5 seconds 3 The hazard indicator light will flash as follows if the switching operation is successful Twice activated Once deactivated AUTO DOOR LOCK RELEASING ME CHANISM if equipped All doors will be unlocked automatically when the ignition switch moved ON to OFF position models with Intelligent Key system All doors will be unlocked automatically when the key is removed from the ignition switch models without Intelligent Key system To activate or deactivate auto door lock releasing mechanism To activat
85. leave the tonneau board in the vehicle with it disengaged from the holder The tonneau board keeps the luggage compartment contents hidden from the outside To remove the tonneau board 1 To block out glare from the front swing down the sun visor 4 1 Remove the straps 4 if equipped from the back door 2 To block glare from the side remove the sun visor 2 Remove the tonneau board from the tonneau from the center mount and swing it to the side board holders 2 Instruments and controls 2 45 INTERIOR LIGHTS A caution e Do not leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time to prevent the battery from being discharged e Turn off the lights when you leave the vehicle LZ FR JVIO022X ROOM LIGHT The room light has a three position switch When the switch is in the on position the light illuminates When the switch is in the center position the room light illuminates when a door is opened The interior light timer will keep the room light on for a period of time when e The key is removed from the ignition switch with all doors closed model without Intelligent Key system e The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position model with Intelligent Key sys tem 2 46 Instruments and controls e The driver s door is unlocked without the key in the ignition switch model without Intelligent Key system e The d
86. lever into the P Park position Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill first depress the foot brake pedal apply the parking brake and then move the shift lever into the P Park position R Reverse Use this position to back up Make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position N Neutral Neither the forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to the N Neutral position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving L Low Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades 5 16 Starting and driving SPORT mode switch JVC0027X Right Hand Drive RHD model To select the SPORT mode push the SPORT mode switch with the shift lever in the D Drive position The SPORT mode indicator light seort in the meter panel illuminates To turn off the SPORT mode push the SPORT mode switch again The SPORT mode indicator light will turn off When the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D the SPORT mode will be automatically turned off OFF position For normal driving and fuel economy use the OFF position ON position For driving up or down long slopes where engine braki
87. located on the meter will illuminate when the front passenger air bag is turned off with the front passenger air bag switch When the front passenger air bag is turned on the front passenger air bag status light will turn off For more details see Supplemental Restraint System SRS P 1 25 T Glow plug indicator light diesel engine model When the ignition switch is in the ON position the glow plug indicator light illuminates and turns off after the glow plugs have warmed up If the glow plugs have already warmed up the glow plug indicator flashes briefly and then turns off ZO High beam indicator light The high beam indicator light illuminates when the headlight high beam is ON The indicator turns off when the low beam is selected See Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 33 Low temperature indicator light green p equipped The low temperature indicator light illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is low When the ignition switch is in the ON position the low temperature indicator light illuminates and then turns off after the engine coolant has warmed up If the low temperature indicator light stays illuminated after the engine has sufficiently warmed up it may indicate the low temperature sensor in the engine coolant system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the system checked and if necessary repaired
88. mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The amp indicator light will illuminate Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM ESP SYSTEM if equipped for Europe A warnine e The Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or due to careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and corner ing on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully e If engine related parts such as a muffler are not standard equipment or the ESP OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indica tor lights may illuminate e Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock absorbers struts springs stabilizer bars and bushings are not NISSAN approved or are extremely deteriorated the ESP system may not oper ate properly This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance and the ESP OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate e If brake related p
89. only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the warranty T Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 3 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 3 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the warranty 8 If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid MTF HQ Multi is not available API GL 4 Viscosity SAE 75W 85 may be used as a temporary replacement However use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid MTF HQ Multi as soon as it is available 9 Refill to the proper fluid level according to the instructions in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section 10 For details see the brake fluid reservoir cap or the caution label attached to the brake fluid reservoir or the underside of the hood Never mix different types of fluids DOTS and DOTA Technical information 9 3 FUEL RECOMMENDATION Gasoline engine model with three way catalyst A caution Do not use leaded gasoline Using leaded gaso line will damage the three way catalyst Except for Europe Ukraine Sri Lanka and Thailand Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 RON For Europe Ukraine and Sri Lanka Use UNLEADED PREMIUM gasoline with an octane rating of at least 95 RON If unleaded premium gasoline is not used UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 RON may be used at slightly
90. paired or registered with the Bluetooth system If the list contains multiple phones then you can select the appropriate phone to connect with the Bluetooth system MENU PushenreR i i PAIRED LIST Push ENTER Mobilet o O 1 Mobile 2 Push ENTER PLEASE WAIT CONNECT BES E a PAIRED PAIREDUST RE H ER RE H main screen In the above example procedure Mobile 2 will be connected Turn MENU Removing a paired phone Deletes the connection between the Bluetooth system and the registered cellular phone Action Briefly push MENU Screen display l PHONE SETUP Push ENTER Turn MENU VOL dial DEL PHONE Push ENTER Mobile 1 Turn MENU VOL dial Mobile 2 Push ENTER DELETE lt YES gt Push ENTER DELETED DEL PHONE Push Leack for the main screen me For the Mobile 2 connection the screen displays DISCONNECTED followed by Mo bile 2 then DELETED In the above example Mobile 2 will be deleted while Mobile 1 remains connected to the system Bluetooth activation Activates or deactivates the Bluetooth function You will need to activate the Bluetooth function in order to enable your hands free phone system except in the pairing mode when it will be activated automatically Screen display Push MENU o PHONE SETUP Push ENTER i Turn MENU VOL dial BLUETOOTH Push ENTER B TOOT
91. position Clock Format Switch the clock display between 24 hour and 12 hour clock mode Language setting Push the setur button to enter the setup menu screen and then select Language Select the appropriate language and push the enter dial Upon completion the screen will automatically adopt the language setting Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 45 Scroll direction Set the scrolling behavior of the enter dial to scroll UP or DOWN 3 2 Day Night button Push the button to switch the display brightness between the daytime and nighttime modes AUX AUX button Push the aux button to play a compatible device when it is connected CD player operation JVHO509X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Loading Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing After loading the CD the number of tracks and the playtime will appear on the display A caution Do not force the CD into the slot This could damage the player NOTE e The CD player accepts normal audio CDs or CDs containing MP3 WMA files e The audio unit will automatically detect if a CD containing
92. reduced performance However for maximum vehicle performance and the best driveability the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended For Thailand Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline or gasohol up to E20 of at least 91 octane RON Gasohol is alcohol blended gasoline For example E20 is a mixture of approximately 20 fuel ethanol and 80 unleaded gasoline Diesel engine Use diesel fuel of at least 50 cetane If two types of diesel fuel are available use summer or winter fuel properly according to the following temperature conditions e Above 7 C 20 F Summer type diesel fuel e Below 7 C 20 F Winter type diesel fuel 9 4 Technical information A caution Do not use home heating oil gasoline or other alternate fuels in your diesel engine The use of those or adding those to diesel fuel can cause engine damage Do not use summer fuel at temperatures below 7 C 20 F The cold temperatures will cause wax to form in the fuel As a result it may prevent the engine from running smoothly RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUM BER Gasoline engine oil Outside Temperature Range Anticipated Before Next Oil Change GASOLINE ENGINE OIL 20W 40 20W 50 10W 30 10W 40 10W 50 15W 40 15W 50 For Europe Ukraine and India CVT model 5W 30 is preferable If 5W 30 is not available select the viscosity from the chart that is suitable for the outside temper
93. same frequency band 2 4 GHz Using the Bluetooth and the wireless LAN functions at the same time may slow down or disconnect the communication and cause un desired noise It is recommended that you turn off the wireless LAN Wi Fi when using the Bluetooth functions For model with navigation system see the separately provided NISSAN Connect Owner s Manual Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you are an owner of a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is paired to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connecting procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes e Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the system e Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not b
94. set speed indicator will blink Canceling speed limit To cancel the speed limiter push the CANCEL switch The SET indicator light will turn off The set speed indicator will remain on the display If the accelerator pedal is fully depressed beyond the resistance point the speed limiter is temporarily suspended and the vehicle speed may be controlled above the set speed For Continuously Variable Transmission model The transmission may downshift into a lower gear The SET indicator light will remain on the instrument panel for Type B model or vehicle information display for Type C model If the accelerator pedal returns to the resistance point and the vehicle speed returns to the set speed the speed limiter will activate and limit vehicle speed When one of the following operations is performed the speed limiter will be canceled The speed limiter indicator light and the SET indicator light and the LIMIT indicator will turn off These canceling methods will erase the set speed limit memory e Push the speed limiter MAIN switch e Push the cruise control MAIN switch Starting and driving 5 29 Speed limiter malfunction Type B model If the speed limiter malfunctions the SET indicator light on the instrument panel will blink Turn the speed limiter MAIN switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Type C model If the speed limiter malfunctions the SET indicator on the vehicle information d
95. socket and then replace the bulb Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 3 Replace the packing 4 Install in the reverse order of removal SDI2391 JVM0281X Rear fog light if equipped JVM0007X Cargo light if equipped To replace the cargo light bulb if equipped 1 Remove the light with a suitable tool 2 Remove the cover 3 Replace the bulb 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself LEGAL REQUIREMENT TO ADJUST HEADLIGHT BEAM 3 Affix the sticker by aligning the corner of the sticker with the position of the mark that is For India Micra Active located on the surface of the headlight seen from front Affix the sticker as illustrated by aligning the mark with dividing lines and NOTE Align the mark with the center mark C of the headlight bulb 100 3 9 30 1 2 Units mm inch JVM0289X When the vehicle is driven in a country where the of the right side headlight and the left side driving lane is different to your home country affix an headlight tick the headlight opaque stic er on e ea ig k NOTE 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and e Use an opaque material that prevents the wait until the headlights cool down light from passing through it 2 Prepare the stickers referring to the figure Make e Note that transparent materials do not the stickers A that will be affixed to the surface work effectively Maintenance and do it yourself 8
96. switch is in the ON position the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display Seat belt warning NO KEY warning Low fuel warning Parking brake release warning Door back door open warning See Vehicle information display P 2 20 pe P position selecting warning light if equipped The warning light blinks in red when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the shift lever in any position except the P Park position If this warning appears move the shift lever to the P Park position or push the ignition switch to the ON position An inside warning chime will also sound See Intelligent Key system P 3 9 amp Seat belt warning light if equipped When the ignition switch is in the ON position the seat belt warning light illuminates The light will continue to illuminate until the driver s seat belt is fastened See Seat belts P 1 7 When the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km h 10 MPH the light will blink and the chime if equipped will sound unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The chime if equipped will continue to sound for about 90 seconds until the seat belt is fastened Ea Speed 120 km h 75 MPH warning light for the Middle East This light blinks when the vehicle speed goes over approximately 120 km h 75 MPH Be sure to obs
97. that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or designs without notice and without obligation MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties Read first then drive safely Before driving your vehicle read this Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle Throughout this manual we have used the symbol A followed by the word WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed precisely The symbol followed by the word CAUTION is also used throughout this manual to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damages to your vehicle To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed carefully If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen O e If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration it means the
98. the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illumi nates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer promptly If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock function is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system P 5 38 Brake warning light warnine e Ifthe brake fluid level is below the minimum mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive the vehicle until the brake system has been checked by a NISSAN dealer e Even if you judge it to be safe have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous e Depressing the foot brake pedal without the engine running and or with a low brake fluid level could increase the stopping distance and require greater pedal travel distance and effort The brake warning light indicates the parking brake system operation a low brake fluid level of the brake system and an Anti lock Braking System ABS malfunction Parking brake warning indicator When the ignition switch is in the ON position and the parking brake is applied the brake warning light illuminates When the parking brake is released the brake warning light turns off If the parking brake is not fully released the brake war
99. the battery fluid level e Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water e Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened e f the vehicle is not to be used for more than 30 days disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent battery discharge e For a maintenance free battery for Type B it is not required to check the fluid level However NISSAN recommends to visually check the green indicator status periodically If the color of the indicator is changed please contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible For model with Stop Start Idling Stop System see Jump starting P 6 9 Jump starting If jump starting is necessary see Jump starting P 6 9 If the engine does not start by jump starting or the battery does not charge the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer for replacing the battery REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY Battery replacement A caution e Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts e An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment Always confirm local reg ulations for battery disposal e When changing batteries do not let dust or oil get on the components e There is danger of explosion if lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 SDI2134A To
100. the vehicle but the steering will be harder to operate The electric power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced This is to prevent overheating of the electric power steering system and protect it from getting damaged While the power assist is reduced steering wheel operation will become heavy When the temperature of the electric power steering system goes down the power assist level will return to normal Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the electric power steering system to overheat You may hear a fricative sound when the steering wheel is operated quickly However this is not a malfunction If the electric power steering warning light PS illuminates while the engine is running it may indicate the electric power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the electric power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer See Electric power steering warning light P 2 14 Starting and driving 5 37 When the electric power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running the power assist for the steering will cease operation You will still have control of the vehicle However greater steering effort is needed e
101. the Intelligent Key battery is discharged see Push button ignition switch model with Intelligent Key system P 5 6 Replace the discharged battery with a new one as soon as possible Because the steering wheel is locked electrically unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged In this case unlock ing the steering wheel would be also impossible Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments A caution e Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key e Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object e Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet immediately wipe until it is completely dry e If the outside temperature is below 10 C 14 F the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly e Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tempera tures exceed 60 C 140 F e Do not attach the Intelligent Ke
102. the air 1 Move the air intake lever to the ag position 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the sp 3 Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position 4 Push the A C button on The A C indicator light will illuminate position 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot right position Dehumidified defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air 1 Move the air intake lever to the ag position 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the position 3 Turn the fan speed control gg dial to the desired position 4 Push the A C button on The A C indicator light will illuminate 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position 6 Turn the side ventilators to the side windows to defrost or defog the side mirrors AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER Front defogger button Display Rear window defogger B button See Defogger switch P 2 39 AUTO button w N Temperature control A w buttons Fan speed control and gg buttons OFF button MODE air flow control button Air recirculation lt gt button Outside air circulation a gt button A C Air Conditioner button Automatic operation AUTO The AUTO mode may be used year round as the system automatic
103. the bumper refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 30 cm 11 8 in away the tone will sound continuously Keep the sonar sensors located on the bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the sonar parking sensor system If the sonar parking sensor system malfunc tions the beep sounds for 3 seconds when the shift lever is moved to the R Reverse position Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer PARKING SENSOR INDICATOR JVS0026X Q Parking sensor display Corner sensor indicator Center sensor indicator With the sonar parking sensor system ON in the R Reverse position when the corner center sensors sonar detect obstacles near the bumper a tone will sound and the parking sensor indicator will appear in the vehicle information display 1 The parking sensor indicators A and indicate the position of the object and the distance to the object with the rate of blinking When an object is detected the indicator appears and blinks the tone sounds intermittently When the vehicle moves closer to the object the number of bars decreases and the rate of blinking increases the rate of the tone increases When the corner of the vehicle is very
104. the fog light switch to the 0 position with the headlight switch in the Iaz or position To turn off the fog lights turn the fog light switch to the OFF position When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position if equipped e Turning the fog light switch to the 0 position will turn on the headlights fog lights and the other lights while the ignition switch is in the ON 2 36 Instruments and controls position or the engine is running if equipped REAR FOG LIGHT Type A Type B Type C For type A and C To turn on the rear fog light turn the fog light switch to the 40Q position The switch returns tothe p position automatically and the rear fog light will illuminate with the front fog lights Make sure the Q4 indicator light on the instrument panel illuminates To turn off the rear fog light turn the fog light switch to the 409 position again Make sure the Q indicator light on the instrument panel turns off To turn off both the front and rear fog lights turn the fog light switch to the OFF position When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position if equipped e Turning the fog light switch to the 0 position will turn on the headlights fog lights and the other lights while the ignition switch is in the ON position or the engine is running The rear fog light should be used only when visibility is seriously reduced Generally to less than 100 m 328
105. the lights automatically turn off the lights will turn on when the engine is started 2 34 Instruments and controls Type B If the doors are closed and locked with the remote controller the Intelligent Key or the door request switch if equipped while the headlight switch is in either the pa or gO position the battery saver function will turn off the lights to prevent the battery from being discharged The lights will turn on when the doors are being opened A caution Do not leave the lights on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time to prevent the battery from being discharged HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL if equipped Manual type The headlight aiming control operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the headlight is on to allow the headlight axis to be adjusted according to the driving condition When driving with no heavy load luggage or driving on a flat road select the normal position O If the number of occupants and load luggage in the vehicle changes the headlight axis may become higher than normal If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road the headlights may directly shine on the rearview and outside mirrors of a vehicle ahead or the windshield of an oncoming vehicle which may obscure other drivers vision To adjust to the proper aiming height turn the switch accordingly The higher the number designated on the switch the lower the headlight a
106. the news code from the tuned station or EON stations The display will then change to the PS name of the interrupting station e When pushing the NEWS button for longer than 2 seconds the news standby mode is turned off and the indicator disappears from the display 2 News interruption mode e When the NEWS button is pushed during the news interruption mode the radio returns to the previous source However the news standby mode is maintained 4 56 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system When the button is pushed during the news interruption mode the radio changes to the CD mode However the news standby mode is maintained If the radio band is changed to the MW or LW the news standby mode will be turned off MENU MENU button To configure Alternative Frequency Regional and Language settings perform the following procedure 1 Push and hold the MENU button for at least 1 5 seconds 2 Turn the VOLUME control dial clockwise or counterclockwise The display message will change as follows AF amp REG amp LANGUAGE amp AF e To activate or deactivate the AF and REG mode briefly push the ENTER button when AF or REG appears on the display and turn the VOLUME control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to switch between the off or on position After selection push the ENTER button to confirm the settings When the AF mode is enabled the audio unit will automatically re tune to a
107. the rigid attachment to have the child that do not have a top tether anchor restraint firmly tightened press downward 3 e Do not secure a child restraint in the center and rearward 4 firmly in the center of the child rear seating position using the ISOFIX lower restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle anchors The child restraint will not be seat cushion and seatback secured properly SSS0646A If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether e Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your Steps 1 and 2 strap route the top tether strap and secure the fingers into the lower anchor area and Position the child restraint on the seat tether strap to the tether anchor point See Child feeling to make sure there are no obstruc Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to restraint anchorage P 1 18 tions over the ISOFIX anchors such as seat the ISOFIX lower anchors If the child restraint is equipped with other anti belt webbing or seat cushion material The The back of the child restraint should be secured rotation devices such as support legs use them gence th tarot PIPPEN it against the vehicle seat back If necessary adjust instead of the top tether strap following the child or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct restraint manufacturer s instructions e Child restraint anchorages are designed to child restraint fit See Head restraints P 1 5 If withstand only those loads imposed by correctly
108. turned to ON gt PUSH warning Push the ignition switch ignition switch position is turned to OFF 6 Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power If this indicator appears replace the battery with a new one See Battery P 8 24 7 Engine start operation indicator Manual Transmission models This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the clutch pedal depressed 8 Cruise control indicator for Europe The cruise main switch indicator CRUISE is dis played when the cruise control main switch is pushed When the main switch is pushed again the CRUISE indicator disappears When the CRUISE indicator is displayed the cruise control system is operational The cruise control set indicator SET is displayed while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system If the SET indicator blinks while the engine is running it may indicate that the cruise control system is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer For more details see Cruise control P 5 30 9 Speed limiter indicator for Europe The speed limiter main switch indicator LIMIT is displayed when the speed limiter main switch is pushed When the main switch is pushed again the LIMIT indicator disappears The speed limiter set indicator SET is displayed while th
109. turns off and then turns back on in approximately 2 seconds Whenever the rearview monitor is off by switching the ignition switch to the ON position and then pressing the POWER ON OFF button A while the shift lever is in the R Reverse position the rearview monitor will be displayed again on the mirror display 4 4 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Language select mode To change the language of the warning text displayed on the mirror display push and hold the POWER ON OFF button A for 6 to 11 seconds when the shift lever is in the R Reverse position When the language select screen is displayed push the POWER ON OFF button A repeatedly until the preferred language is displayed If the button is not pushed for approximately 5 seconds the language select mode will auto matically return to the normal mode OPERATING TIPS e When the view is switched the display images on the screen may be displayed with some delay e When the temperature is extremely high or low the screen may not clearly display objects This is not a malfunction e When strong light is directly coming on the camera objects may not be displayed clearly This is not a malfunction e Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper This is not a malfunction e The screen may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction e The colors o
110. vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit the set speed indicator blinks and the accelerator pedal operation will not work until the vehicle speed slows down to the set speed limit Instrument panel 4 Speed limiter indicator light The speed limiter will not automatically brake the vehicle to the set speed limit Turning on speed limiter Push the speed limiter MAIN switch The speed limiter indicator light and the LIMIT indicators illuminate The set speed indicator shows Setting speed limit 1 Push the SET switch e When the vehicle is stopped the speed will be set at 30 km h or 20 MPH e While driving the speed limit will be set at the current speed 2 When the speed limit is set the SET indicator light and the set speed indicators illuminate on the vehicle information display and instrument panel for Type B model Changing set speed limit Use either of the following operations to change the speed limit e Push and hold the RES or SET switch The set speed will increase or decrease by approxi mately 10 km h or 10 MPH e Push then quickly release the RES or SET switch Each time you do this the set speed will increase or decrease by approximately 1 km h or 1 MPH Resuming preset speed limit Push the RES switch The SET indicator light illuminates and the speed limiter will resume the last set speed limit If the vehicle is driven at a speed over the last set speed limit the
111. will be played TUNE FF REW FOLDER button SCAN button When the button is pushed while a CD is being played the first 10 seconds of all the tracks will be played When the scan button is pushed again the CD will return to normal play from the track which is playing RPT Repeat button To change the play settings push the RPT button to select the mode CD RPT DISC RPT TRACK CD with MP3 or WMA RPT DISC gt RPT FOLDER gt RPT TRACK 4 22 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system RPT DISC All the tracks of the CD will be played continuously in sequential order The display indicates no symbol mark While the RPT button is pushed the display indicates RPT DISC RPT TRACK The selected track of the CD will be played con tinuously While the RPT button is pushed the display indicates RPT TRACK RPT FOLDER All the tracks of selected folder will be played continuously in sequential order CD with MP3 or WMA only While the RPT button is pushed the display indicates RPT FOLDER RDM Random button To change the play sequence push the RDM button to select the mode CD RDM DISC gt RPT DISC CD with MP3 or WMA RDM DISC RDM FOLDER gt RPT DISC RPT DISC All the tracks of the CD will be pla
112. 081 Soa ae ee e Remote keyless entry system if equipped Saar n 14854 POSTEL 2010 e Intelligent Key system if equipped NS 2425 e NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS if equipped Zagreb 20 02 2008 Mjasto F datumy Ovraraz Aaa JVT0014X JVT0012X 9 14 Technical information FOR MOROCCO Remote keyless entry system if equipped AGREE PAR LANRT MAROC Num ro d agr ment MR4382 ANRT 2008 Date d agr ment 18 08 2008 JVTO0025X AGREE PAR LANRT MAROC Num ro d agr ment MR5084 ANRT 2009 Date d agr ment 19 10 2009 JVTO108X NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS immobili zer AGREE PAR LANRT MAROC Num ro d agr ment MR4884 ANRT 2009 Date d agr ment 22 06 2009 JVT0026X FOR JORDAN Remote keyless entry system if equipped Manufacturer ALPS ELECTRIC CO LTD Model TWC1G124 Type approval No TRC LPD 2008 125 NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS immobili zer Manufacturer Calsonic Kansei Corporation Model MW1014 Type approval No TRC LPD 2009 86 FOR SOUTH AFRICA Remote keyless entry system if equipped IC ASA IC ASA TA 2009 1432 S APPROVED JVT0038X TA 2009 854 APPROVED JVT0039X Technical information 9 15 NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS immobili zer a TA 2005 863 IC A SA APPROVED JVT0040X 9 16 Technical information FOR THE UNITED ARAB EMIRATES Remote keyless entry system if equipped TRA REGISTERED No 0036447 10 DEALE
113. 12 Driver s front impact air bag Horn 13 Steering wheel mounted controls right side Cruise control switches Speed limiter switches 14 Headlight fog light and turn signal switch 15 Outside rearview mirror control switch 16 Fuse box 17 Glove box 18 Power outlet or USB AUX connector with navigation system 19 Cup holder 20 Shift lever Automatic Transmission AT model Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model Manual Transmission MT model 21 Push button ignition switch model with Intelli gent Key system 22 Tilting steering wheel lock lever 23 Ignition switch model without Intelligent Key system steering lock 24 Hood lock release handle 25 Fuel filler lid release handle 26 Parking space measurement switch 27 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch 28 Headlight aiming control switch if equipped Refer to the separate NISSAN Connect Owner s Manual if equipped RIGHT HAND DRIVE RHD MODEL Type C ONO OB Oo No Side ventilator Upper instrument box Passenger s front impact air bag Audio system Rear window defogger switch Hazard indicator flasher switch Heater and air conditioner control Center ventilator Example 9 10 11 12 13 14 Outside rearview mirror control switch 15 Fuse box 16 Glove box 17 USB AUX connector 18 Power outlet 19 Cup holder 20 Shift lever Continuously Va
114. 1X HR 12DE engine or HR 15DE engine Water pump Alternator Crankshaft pulley Air conditioner compressor with air compres sor Idler pulley without air compressor W Tension checking point PONS K9K engine Crankshaft pulley Drive belt auto tensioner Alternator Air conditioner compressor B OP T Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear cuts fraying or looseness Check regularly for condi tion and tension If the belt is in poor condition or loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer SPARK PLUGS gasoline engine model A warnine Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is applied Replace the spark plugs according to the maintenance log shown in a separate maintenance booklet If replacement is required contact a NISSAN dealer PLATINUM TIPPED SPARK PLUGS if equipped It is not necessary to replace the platinum tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type of spark plugs These spark plugs are designed to last much longer than the conventional type of spark plugs A caution e Do not reuse the platinum tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re gapping e Always replace with the recommended pla tinum tipped spark plugs Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 IRIDIUM TIPPED SPARK PLUGS if equipped It is not necessary to replace the iridium tipped spark pl
115. 2 SAVED 00 00 ks JVIO268X The CO2 saved mode shows the estimated quantity of CO2 exhaust emissions prevented by the Stop Start System every time the engine is automatically stopped For more information see Stop Start System CO2 savings if equipped for Europe P 2 31 Current fuel consumption km I or 1 100 km or MPG tate km l 6 10 JVIO160X Type A A km l 6 10 o aR 4 JVI0007X Type B The current fuel consumption mode shows the current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption km l or 1 100 km or MPG and speed km h or MPH ESR a 000 0 sm 000 0 T n JVIO161X Type A isan 000 0 000 0 Si o aR 4 km l km h JVIO008X Type B Fuel consumption The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset Reset ting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The average speed is also reset at the same time The display is updated every 30 seconds At about the first 500 m after a reset the display shows Speed The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since the last reset Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The average fuel consumption is also reset at the same time The display is updated every 30 seconds The first 30 seconds after a reset the display shows
116. 218X For model with the door key cylinder The back door can be opened by pulling the opener handle and pulling up the back door To close the back door pull down until it securely locks For model without the door key cylinder To open the back door unlock it with one of the following operations then pull the handle e Push the back door request switch if equipped See Intelligent Key system P 3 9 e Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key if equipped See Intelligent Key system P 3 9 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments e Push the UNLOCK button on the remote controller if equipped See Remote keyless entry system P 3 7 e Push the power door lock switch to the UN LOCK position Locking with key for model with the door key cylinder JVP0219X To lock the back door push it down firmly insert the key to the door key cylinder and turn the key clockwise To unlock the back door turn the key counter clockwise 2 FUEL FILLER LID A warnine e Fuel is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling e Fuel may be under pressure Turn the cap a half of a turn and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and
117. 24 Battery saver system 2 46 Intelligent Key a Intelligent Key battery discharge 5 8 Keyfob battery replacement Remote controller battery Vehicle Dattery cscssssssssseessessssesssesssssessseesease 8 24 Battery replacement Intelligent Key Battery saver system 8 26 2 34 Before starting engine 5 3 Belts See drive belts a 8 16 Bleeding fuel system 8 16 Blocking wheels 6 3 Bluetooth audio player operation 4 49 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System 4 64 Board Tonneau board 2 45 Brake Brake DOOStER in scissscscecessostecesssassesszoctesgesnieesbeessen 8 19 Brake fluid 8 19 Brake precautions 5 38 Brake system 5 38 8 18 Checking foot brake pedal 8 18 Checking parking brake 8 18 Parking brake 3 24 Parking brake operation 5 41 Warning light 2 13 Brake assist 5 39 Brake precautions Brakes Break in schedule Bulb replacement c Canceling cruising speed Canceling speed limit Car phone or CB radio Card holder Care when driving Catalytic converter Three way catalyst 5 4 CD changer operation CD player operation Center mark on seat belts Center Ventilators Certification label oie 9 10 Changing Changing engine coolant Changing engine oil and oil filte Changing tires and wheels Checking Checking bulbs 13 Checking engine c
118. 25 seconds or Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key are pushed Note Panic button should be pushed for more than 0 5 second Hazard indicator operation if equipped When you lock or unlock the doors the hazard indicator will flash as a confirmation e LOCK The hazard indicator flashes once e UNLOCK The hazard indicator flashes twice SECURITY SYSTEM if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with either or both of the following security systems e Theft warning system e NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS immobilizer The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light THEFT WARNING SYSTEM The theft warning system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed Security indicator light SIC2045 The security indicator light is located in the meter panel This light operates whenever the ignition switch is in the ACC OFF or LOCK position This is normal How to activate the system 1 Close all windows and push the ignition switch to the OFF position The system can be activated even if the windows are open 2 Carry the Intelligent Key with you and get out of the vehicle 3 Make sure the hood is closed Close and lock all doors with the door handle request switch LOCK G button Q on the Intelligent Key If the door is locked using the inside lock knob the system will not be activated or power door lock switch If t
119. 2571 HR12DDR HR12DE and HR15DE engine Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant up to the MAX level 4 If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 4 If the cooling system frequently requires cool ant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer K9K engine model K9K engine Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level 2 add coolant up to the MAX level 4 If the cooling system frequently requires cool ant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT Contact a NISSAN dealer if replacement is required Major engine cooling system repair should be per formed by a NISSAN dealer The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating A warnine e To avoid being scalded never change the coolant when the engine is hot e Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly w
120. 3 or WMA is as illustrated e The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display e If there is a file in the top level of the disc Root Folder is displayed e The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order 4 14 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Specification chart model with type A B C audio unit Supported media CD CD R CD RW ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista based computer are not supported pee p MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 Supported file systems Sampling frequency 8 kHz 48 kHz F Bitrate O O O rate 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 Supported versions 1 WMA WMA8 WMA9 WMA 3 Sameina tewens freguenc 32 kHz 48 kHz Bitrate rate 32 kbps 192 kbps VBR 4 ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 VER2 4 MP3 only Tag information Song title and Artist name WMA tag WMA only ag only Foer ves ld levels 8 Folders 255 including route folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE Displayable character codes 2 UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian 05 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz samplin
121. 33 If equipped when the lever is pulled towards the rearmost position after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position the headlight will turn on and stay on for 30 seconds The lever can be pulled 4 times for up to 2 minutes Daytime light system if equipped Even if the headlight switch is off the daytime lights will come on after starting the engine However you cannot change low beam to high beam when the light switch is off When the light switch is turned to the paz position the headlight low beam will turn off BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM The light reminder chime will sound if the driver s door is opened while the following improper operations occur e The headlight switch is in either the z gt az or 2D position and the ignition switch in the ACC OFF or LOCK position e The headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the front or rear fog light if equipped is turned on while the ignition switch is in the ACC OFF or LOCK position Be sure to turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle Type A When the headlight switch is in the az or 20 position while the engine is running the lights will automatically turn off after pushing the ignition switch to the ACC OFF or LOCK position and opening the driver s side door When the headlight switch remains in either the paz or 4D position after
122. 4 Headlight fog light and turn signal switch P 2 33 15 Outside rearview mirror control switch P 3 22 16 Fuse box P 8 28 17 Glove box P 2 44 18 Power outlet P 2 43 or USB AUX connector with navigation system 19 Cup holder P 2 44 20 Shift lever Automatic Transmission AT model P 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model P 5 14 Manual Transmission MT model P 5 17 21 Push button ignition switch model with Intelli gent Key system P 5 6 22 Tilting steering wheel lock lever P 3 21 23 Ignition switch model without Intelligent Key system steering lock P 5 5 24 Hood lock release handle P 3 19 25 Fuel filler lid release handle P 3 20 26 Parking space measurement switch P 5 34 27 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch P 5 24 28 Headlight aiming control switch P 2 34 if equipped Refer to the separate NISSAN Connect Owner s Manual if equipped RIGHT HAND DRIVE RHD MODEL Type C ONO OB Oss Side ventilator P 4 5 Upper instrument box P 2 44 Passenger s front impact air bag P 1 25 Audio system P 4 11 Rear window defogger switch P 2 39 Hazard indicator flasher switch P 6 2 Heater and air conditioner control P 4 6 Center ventilator P 4 5 Example 9 10 11 12 23 24 25 26 27 JVC0449X Wiper and washer switch P 2 37 Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio con
123. 96 N 20 kg 44 Ib CHECKING FOOT BRAKE PEDAL DI1020MR See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the foot brake pedal height does not return to normal With the engine running check the distance A between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor If it is out the range listed see a NISSAN dealer Depressing force 490 N 50 kg 110 Ib For Right Hand Drive RHD model 80 mm 3 15 in or more For Left Hand Drive LHD model 72 mm 2 83 in or more Self adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self adjusting brakes The brakes are adjusted by the foot brake pedal operation Brake pad wear indicator The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When a brake pad requires replacement it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the foot brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occasional brake squeaks squeals or other noises may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system The rear drum brakes do not have audible wear indicators Should you ever hear an unusually loud noise from the rear drum brakes have them checked as soon as possible by a NISSAN dealer Proper brake inspe
124. ADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER Type A MUTE button FM radio band select button AM radio band select button CD button AUX button CD EJECT button MENU button SEEK TRACK button ON Oa PON 10 11 12 13 14 15 TUNE FF Forward REW Rewind FOLDER button SCAN button RDM Random button Power button VOL Volume control knob AUX IN auxiliary input jack RPT Repeat button AUTO P Automatic Preset button 4 20 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 16 17 Radio memory buttons 1 6 DISP Display button Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position POWER button To turn on the audio system push the Power button e The system will turn on in the mode radio or CD which was used immediately before the system was turned off e f there is no CD loaded the radio will be turned on To turn off the audio system push the Power button Volume control To control the volume turn the VOL control knob Turn the knob clockwise to make the sound louder Turn the knob counterclockwise to make the sound quieter MENU MENU button To change the audio settings BASS TREBLE FADER BALANCE BEEP and CLOCK push the menu button to select the mode while the CD or radio is on Push the menu button until the desired mode appears on the disp
125. B memory device into the connector The system will switch to the USB memory device mode automatically JVH0518X If the system is turned off while the USB memory device is playing pushing the l dial will start the USB memory device If the USB memory device cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed e USB memory device not supported e No audio file detected A caution e Do not force the USB memory device into the USB port Inserting the USB memory device tilted or upside down into the port may damage the USB memory device and or the port Make sure that the USB memory device is connected correctly into the USB port Some USB devices come with a mark as a guide Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction before inserting the device e Do not place objects near the USB memory device to prevent the objects from leaning on the USB memory device and the port Pressure from the objects may damage the USB memory device and or the port AUX AUX button To operate the USB memory device use one of the following methods e Push the aux button then turn the Enter dial to select the USB item Once highlighted push the enter dial e Push the aux button repeatedly until USB is highlighted and then push the nrer dial Audio main operation The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of the Compact Disc CD operation For
126. CVT model The speed limiter can be set between 30 km h and 170 km h or 20 MPH and 105 MPH The speed limiter set switches are located on the steering wheel SSD0891 RES switch SET switch CANCEL switch Cruise control MAIN switch For details see Cruise control P 5 30 5 Speed limiter MAIN switch When this switch is pushed the speed limiter enters the standby mode If the cruise control system is on the system will turn off and the speed limiter enters the standby mode PLO o Speed limiter display and indicators Type B model JVS0019X The speed limiter operating condition is shown on the vehicle information display and instrument panel Vehicle information display 1 LIMIT indicator 2 Set speed indicator When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit the set speed indicator blinks and the accelerator pedal operation will not work until the vehicle speed slows down to the set speed limit Instrument panel 3 Speed limiter indicator light 4 SET indicator light The speed limiter will not automatically brake the vehicle to the set speed limit Speed limiter display and indicators Type C model JVS0025X The speed limiter operating condition is shown on the vehicle information display and instrument panel Vehicle information display 1 LIMIT indicator 2 SET indicator light 3 Set speed indicator When the
127. Continuously Variable Transmission CVT position indicator if equipped 2 10 Engine start operation indicator if equipped Warning indicator lights and audible reminders Checking bulbs Warning lights Indicator lights Audible reminders Vehicle information display if equipped Indicators for operation Warnings and alerts Indicators for birthday and anniversary Indicators for maintenance uo eects Indicators for Stop Start System if equipped for Europa eriin iae na i a i nR 2 26 Trip computer for Type C ssssessssscsssssssssessssnessessssnmessesssnneess 2 26 Stop Start System CO2 savings if equipped for Europe Tire angle indicator if equipped Headlight and turn signal switch Headlight switch controls Battery Saver System w ssssesseessessesssserseessssessssentssesstesessssesees Headlight aiming control if equipped Turn signal switch Fog light switch if equipped Front fog lights Rear fog light Wiper and washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch Rain sensing auto wiper system if equipped Rear window wiper and washer switch if equipped Defogger switch if equipped Windows Manual windows if equipped Power windows if equipped Sunshade if equipped GlOCkK sinsesstcccestanttentceni Adjusting time Power outlets if equipped Storages Glove box Upper instrument box if equipp
128. D Changera ssssscsseessssseeesesssesessneeeessnneeeesneeeessneeeees 4 57 LW MW FM radio with compact disc CD Player i ni aseta edia oat 4 52 M Maintenance Battery aeni censor heectectieceltvievpedsieteapntcnadiieee 8 4 8 2 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 3 General maintenance Indicators for maintenance dot matrix Maintenance precautions Maintenance requirements Scheduled maintenance Seat belt maintenance Malfunction indicator light MIL Manual air conditioner Manual transmission Mechanical key Mechanical Key LOCK warning Meter display model Meters and gauges Mirror Inside rearview mirror MPP OPS es ieces sve rceceeedentaveey Outside rearview mirror Vanity mirrors Mirror display Operation 4 4 Monitor Rearview MONItOV ceseccsseseeseeeeteeeeestetetesteaeeteees 4 2 N New vehicle br ak inh csceseessssesesestseeseseseeeeeeesiees 5 3 NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS key No key warning 3 18 o OGM Tiaras ahna ai 2 8 Oil Changing engine oil and oil filter 8 11 Checking engine oil level 8 11 Engine oil 8 11 10 3 Engine oil replacement indicator wee 2 25 Oil filter replacement indicator 2 25 Opening fuel filler lid 3 20 Opening hood 3 19 Operation Indicators for operation dot matrix ww 2 20 Outside rearview mirrors 3 22 Overdri
129. Disc CD player Type C 4 29 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player Type D 4 33 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player Type E 4 38 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player Type F 4 44 LW MW FM radio with compact disc CD player 4 52 LW MW FM radio with compact disc CD changer 4 57 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player and navigation if equipped essssssescsssseecessseceesseeseesseeesessnseessnees 4 62 Steering wheel switch for audio control if equipped 4 63 CD USB memory care and cleaning Car phone or CB radio Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System if equipped for model without navigation system Regulatory information CE statement Hands Free Phone System Type A Hands Free Phone System Type B sss SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A WARNING e Do not adjust the heater and air conditioner controls or audio controls while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation e If you noticed any foreign objects entering the system hardware spilled liquid on the system or noticed smoke or fumes coming out from the system or any other unusual operation is observed stop using the system immediately and contact the nearest NISSAN dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to an accident fire or electric shock e Do not disassemble or modify this system If you do it may lead to an accident fire or electric shock A caution Do
130. EJECT button 12 PONER ON OFF button VOLUME control nol 4 24 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 13 14 15 16 17 AUX IN auxiliary input jack PHONE SEND button PHONE BOOK button Radio memory buttons RPT Repeat MIX Mix play button Anti theft system if equipped This unit can only be activated when the ignition switch for NATS is in the ACC or ON position Each radio is uniquely matched to the vehicle s immobilizer and therefore cannot be transferred to any other vehicle Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position POWER ON OFF button To turn on the audio system push the POWER ON OFF button e The system will turn on in the mode radio or CD which was used immediately before the system was turned off e f there is no CD loaded the radio will be turned on To turn off the audio system push the POWER ON OFF button Volume control To control the volume turn the VOLUME control dial Turn the VOLUME control dial clockwise to make the sound louder Turn the VOLUME control dial counterclockwise to make the sound quieter D Sound preference button To enter the audio mode radio or CD push the button When no CD is loaded the audio system will automatically switch to the radio mode To change the audio settings BASS TREBLE FADER BALANCE EQ push the butto
131. Exterior lights Interior lights Light locations Legal requirement to adjust headlight beam Tires and wheels Tire inflation pressure Types of tires Tire chains Tire rotation Tire wear and damage TUG age sesser Changing tires and wheels Wheel balance Spare Uku anini inin Emergency tire puncture repair kit if equipped MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Some day to day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle s good mechanical condition as well as its emission and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance as well as general mainte nance is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper main tenance care SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE For your convenience the required scheduled main tenance items are described and listed in a separate Warranty Information and Maintenance booklet You must refer to that booklet to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your vehicle at regular intervals GENERAL MAINTENANCE General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day operation of the vehicle They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mecha
132. Foreword Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle has been delivered to you with confidence It has been produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometers miles of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information amp Maintenance Book let explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions we will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available for you IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Reminders for safety Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for you and your passengers e NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs e ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions e ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information When reading the manual This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information
133. H lt OFF gt Turn MENU VOL dial B TOOTH lt ON gt Push ENTER BLUETOOTH AA Push sack for the main screen Displaying MY NUMBER If your cellular phone is equipped with the function the phone number of the active cellular phone will be displayed on the hands free phone system Delete phone book list To delete all the contacts from the phone book proceed as follows Screen display Briefly push MENU PHONE SETUP Push ENTER Turn MENU VOL dial DEL P BOOK Push ENTER DEL ALL lt NO gt Turn MENU VOL dial DEL ALL lt YES gt Push ENTER DELETING PELTED po EL PBOOK Push for the main screen Phone book When the phone book button is pushed the following options can be selected by turning the MENU VOL dial in either direction e SEARCH Names contact names Speed dial mode 1Name contact name DELETE NAME EDIT NAME ADD NAME Send name using Bluetooth technology ADD NAME e Send all the phone book entries in the cellular phone using Bluetooth technology DOWNLOAD Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 67 The phone book can store up to 250 names with numbers and can be selected for calling To add a contact to the phone book proceed as follows Action Screen display Push with a long push button ADD NAME Push ENTER B ENTER NAME Turn MENU VOL dial 10 Focus on J Push ENTER Turn MENU VOL dial Focu
134. MP STARTING A warnine Incorrect jump starting can lead to a battery explosion The battery explosion may result in severe injury or death It may also result in damage to the vehicle Be sure to follow the instructions in this section Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery Always wear suitable eye protection and remove rings bracelets and any other jew elry whenever working on or near a battery Never lean over the battery while jump starting Never allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes skin clothes or the vehicle s painted surfaces Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid which can cause severe burns If the fluid comes into contact with anything immediately flush the con tacted area with plenty of water Keep the battery out of the reach of children The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an incorrectly rated battery will damage your vehicle Never attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause serious injury K9K engine model JVE0113X 1 If the booster battery is in another vehicle position the two vehicles A and to bring the batteries into close proximity to each other A caution If the battery of vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is discharged the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position and if the steering lock is
135. MP3 WMA files is inserted and MP3CD will be indicated e An error notification message will be dis played when an incompatible disc e g DVD is inserted or if the player cannot read the CD Eject the disc and insert another disc List view While the track is being played push either the enter dial or the button to display the available tracks in a listed view mode Turn the enter dial to select a track from the list or a track to start listening to and then push the enter dial Quick search In the list view mode a quick search can be performed to find a track from the list Push the A Z button turn the enter dial to the first alphabetic letter of the song title and then push the enter dial When found a list of the available songs will be displayed Select and push the enter dial to play the preferred track CD cD button When the CD button is pushed while the audio system is turned off and a CD is loaded the audio system will turn on and a CD will start playing automatically If the radio or AUX source mode is already playing it will automatically turn off and the CD 4 46 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system will start playing However if the CD is not loaded then a notification message will be displayed and the audio unit will remain in the radio or AUX sou
136. Make sure that the USB memory device is connected to the USB port cor rectly Some USB devices come with a mark as a guide Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction before inserting the device e Do not place objects near the USB memory device to prevent the objects from leaning on the USB memory device and the port Pressure from the objects may damage the USB memory device and or the port MEDIA MEDIA button When the menia button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory device is inserted the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted push the mepa button repeatedly until the display changes to the USB mode PPI 144 SEEK TRACK buttons When the i or 4 button is pushed and held while a USB memory device is being played the USB memory device will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the USB memory device will return to normal play speed When the or 44 button is pushed while the USB memory device is being played the next track or the beginning of the current track on the USB memory device will be played AN TUNE FOLDER buttons To change to another folder in the USB memory device push the A or W button RPT RPT button When the R
137. P 2 45 Door armrest Power window switch P 2 40 Power door lock switch models with power windows P 3 6 Fuse box P 8 28 Sun visor P 2 45 Sunshade P 2 42 Room light P 2 46 P 8 31 10 11 910 11 JVC0102X Inside rearview mirror P 3 21 Rear cup holder P 2 44 Center console Heated seats switch P 1 3 Power door lock switch models without power windows P 3 6 Parking brake P 3 24 P 8 18 Shift lever Automatic Transmission AT P 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT P 5 14 Manual Transmission MT P 5 17 12 Frontc up holder P 2 44 13 Glove box P 2 44 if equipped Illustrated table of contents O 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT HAND DRIVE LHD MODEL 0 8 171819 20 21 24 25 Example Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch P 5 24 or Electronic Stability Program ESP OFF switch P 5 27 Parking space measurement switch P 5 34 Headlight fog light and turn signal switch P 2 33 Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio control P 4 63 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con Illustrated table of contents 5 INK a U I o JVIO261X trol without navigation system P 4 64 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol with navigation system Driver s front impact air bag Horn P 1 25 P 2 40 Meters and gauges P 2 6 St
138. PT button is pushed while a USB memory device is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Normal gt Track RPT Folder RPT Normal RDM RDM button When the RDM button is pushed while a USB memory device is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Normal gt Folder RDM gt All RDM gt Normal SCAN SCAN button When the scan button is pushed while a USB memory device is being played the first 10 seconds of all the tracks will be played When the scan button is pushed again the USB memory device will return to normal play from the track which is playing Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 37 FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER Type E 1 Day Night button 9 2 FM button 10 3 RPT button 11 4 MIX button 12 5 Radio memory buttons 13 6 A Z button 14 7 AM button 15 8 CD eject button 16 JVHO506X CD button Power VOL dial Rewind button Fast Forward button DISP button SETUP button Back button TUNE MENU ENTER dial 4 38 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 17 AUX button Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position l Power voL dial Power ON OFF To turn on the audio system push the dial e The system will tu
139. R No 0034163 10 JVT0137x Intelligent Key system if equipped TRA REGISTERED 0036441 10 DEALER 0034163 10 JVT0134X TRA REGISTERED No 0036445 10 DEALER No 0034163 10 JVT0135X NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS immobili zer TRA REGISTERED No 0020559 09 DEALER No 0014517 08 JVT0136X MEMO Technical information 9 17 MEMO 9 18 Technical information 10 Index Adjusting time Air cleaner filter Air conditioner Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant Automatic air conditioner Heater and air conditioner Manual air conditionet Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Servicing air conditione Antenna Anti lock Braking System ABS wesc 5 39 Anti lock braking system ABS warning light 2 13 Anti theft SYSt M ssssssssssssrrrrsssssrrereereresssnrrrreeee 4 53 4 58 Appearance care Exterior appearance care lt 7 2 Interior appearance care 7 3 Audible reminders 2 18 Audio operation precautions 4 11 Audio SYSTEM eeeseeseeeseestesesees 4 11 Steering wheel audio controls 4 63 Automatic Automatic transmission fluid ATF 8 20 Automatic Transmission position indicator Continuously Variable Transmission position iINdiICator sssssessssssssssssssssssnssnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 2 10 B Back dOOf sine ee ee eee 3 20 Battery 8 4 8
140. RIC ene RLT lt PER ie 341 NAT LTA ATSC AT REE BE ET 000 BEOIED TERGA km Z2Z5 l Kee JVIO132X Type A 2 22 Instruments and controls RELEASE PARKING H0 r TURN OFF THE LIGHT SETTING CAN ONLY BE OPERATED FASTEN YOUR WHEN STOPPED SEATBELT JVIO032X Type B 1 Parking brake release warning This warning appears when the vehicle speed is above 7 km h 4 MPH and the parking brake is applied 2 Low fuel warning This warning appears when the fuel level in the tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient before the fuel gauge reaches the empty 0 position There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty 0 position 3 Door back door open warning ignition switch is in the ON position This warning appears if any of the doors or the back door is open or not closed securely The vehicle icon indicates which door is open on the display Make sure that all of the doors and the back door are closed 4 Time to rest indicator This indicator appears when the set time to rest indicator activates You can set the time for up to 6 hours See Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 5 Low outside temperature warning This warning appears if the outside temperature is 3 C or below The warning can be set not to be displayed See Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 6 Seat belt warning light When the ignitio
141. RS section contains important information concerning the driver s and passenger s supplemental front impact air bags Supplemental front impact air bag system if equipped This system can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest area of the driver and or front passenger in certain frontal collisions The supple mental front impact air bag is designed to inflate on the front where the vehicle is impacted Supplemental side impact air bag system if equipped This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvis areas of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions The supplemental side impact air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted Supplemental curtain side impact air bag system if equipped This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of the driver and passengers in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions The supplemental curtain side impact air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted The SRS is designed to supplement the accident protection provided by the driver s seat belt and is not designed to substitute for it The SRS can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However inflating air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries Air bags do not provide protection to the lower body Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupants should always be s
142. RS air bag systems are operational If any of the following conditions occur the air bag and or pre tensioner seat belt systems need servicing e The SRS air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds e The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermit tently e The SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate at all Under these conditions the air bag and or pre tensioner seat belt systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Contact a NISSAN dealer immediately SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS JVROO10X Crash zone sensor 7 Pre tensioner seat belt retractors Supplemental front impact air bag modules 8 Supplemental air bag diagnosis sensor unit Supplemental side impact air bag modules if equipped Supplemental curtain side impact air bag mod ules A warnine Supplemental curtain side impact air bag in facet p 9 e Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad Do not place any objects be tween the driver and steering wheel pad Such objects may become dangerous pro Satellite sensors Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 29 jectiles and cause injury if a supplemental air bag inflates e Immediately after inflation several supple mental air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supple mental air bag systems
143. System reminder buzzer will sound if the engine hood is opened while the Idling Stop System is activated NOTE Be sure to check if the engine hood is open When the engine hood is opened the engine will be in the normal stopped state In this case restart the engine with the ignition switch Reverse reminder chime if equipped The chime will sound inside the vehicle to remind the driver if the selector lever is in the R Reverse position while the ignition switch is in the ON position This is not a chime to remind people outside the vehicle Instruments and controls 2 19 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY if equipped INDICATORS FOR OPERATION JVIO701X The vehicle information display Q displays the warnings and information 1 Engine start operation indicator AT CVT model This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P Park position This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed You can start the engine directly in any position 2 20 Instruments and controls 100 kmn 100 kmn TURN IGNITION TO LOCK JVIO266X 2 Steering lock release malfunction indicator This indicator appears when the steering wheel cannot be released from the LOCK position If this indicator appears push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left 3 NO KEY warning This warning appears in eith
144. Tachometer Speedometer Vehicle information display Trip odometer reset switch Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT position indicator Odometer twin trip odometer clock Instruments and controls JVC0455X SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed Odometer Twin trip odometer for Type A and B OpOTRPREL lo Example The odometer twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position The odometer 4 displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven The twin trip odometer displays the distance of individual trips Changing twin trip odometer display Push the reset switch 8 to change the display as follows TRIP A gt TRIP B Trip computer mode gt TRIP A Resetting twin trip odometer Push the reset switch for more than 1 second to reset the trip odometer to zero For trip computer information see Trip computer for Type A and B P 2 9 Odometer Twin trip odometer for Type C JVIO702X Example The odometer twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position The odometer 4 displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven When the odometer displays the display of TRIP A and B disappears The twin trip odometer 4 displays the distance of individual trips Changing twin trip odometer display Push the reset sw
145. WMA is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music files The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequency The rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once is called a multisession Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 13 e 1ID3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of Playback order the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist album title encoding bit rate Selene track time duration etc ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album Artist Song title line on the display Windows and Windows Media are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA FOLDER MP3 or WMA SAA1025 Playback order chart The music playback order of the CD with MP
146. acceleration of corrosion on the under body and suspension Before the winter and again in the spring the under seal must be checked and if necessary re treated WHEELS e Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance e Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed e Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels e Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion This may cause loss of pressure or damage the tire bead e NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild solution especially during winter in areas where road salt is used The salt residue from road salt could discolor the wheels if it is not washed off regularly A caution Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature e Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose du
147. aded in the CD changer push the corresponding CD select button When a CD is selected the selected CD will be automatically played from the first track RPT MIX RPT Repeat MIX button Push the rmx button repeatedly to change the play mode as follows RPT REPEAT TRACK gt RPT REPEAT DISC gt MIX DISC MIX ALL gt RPT REPEAT ALL gt RPT REPEAT TRACK RPT TRACK The CD changer plays the current track con tinuously RPT DISC The CD changer repeats the disc currently being playing MIX ALL Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 59 All the tracks on all of the CDs will be played in a random order MIX DISC The CD changer plays all the tracks from one disc once in a random order RPT ALL All the tracks of all the CDs will be played continuously in sequential order CD EJECT button When the button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while CDs are loaded the previously played CD will be ejected When the button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while a CD is being played the CD being played will be ejected and the next CD will be played When the button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while CDs are loaded all of the CDs in the CD changer will be ejected If a CD is ejected by pushing the button and it is not taken out from the loading slot within 15 seconds the CD will automatically be rel
148. again to save the setting After the preferred levels have been set push the JVH0044X MENU button to exit the menu or wait at least for 10 1 CD LOAD button 9 Sound preference button seconds without pressing any buttons 2 POWER ON OFF button 10 MENU button For clock adjustments see Audio main operation 3 PHONE SEND button 11 CD EJECT button P 4 53 4 TA Traffic Announcement NEWS button 12 SEEK TRACK button 5 Radio band select button 13 PHONE BOOK button 6 Radio memory CD select buttons 14 PHONE END BACK button 7 CD button 15 VOLUME control MENU select knob 8 AUX button 16 ENTER button Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 57 17 AUX IN auxiliary input jack 18 RPT Repeat MIX Mix play button 19 TUNE SEARCH button Anti theft system if equipped This unit can only be activated when the ignition switch for NATS is in the ACC or ON position Each radio is uniquely matched to the vehicle s immobilizer and therefore cannot be transferred to any other vehicle Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position POWER ON OFF button To turn on the audio system push the POWER ON OFF button e The system will turn on in the mode radio or CD which was used immediately before the system was last turned off e f there is no CD loaded the radio will be turned on To turn off the audi
149. ake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold Make sure that the coolant level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir Engine drive belt s Make sure that drive belt s is are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level ground and turning off the engine Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident check for cause and have it corrected immediately Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general precautions which should be closely observed warnine e Park the vehicle on a level surface apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving Move the shift lever to the P Park position AT CVT model or the shift lever to the N Neutral position MT model Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when perfor
150. ake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces USING SYSTEM Depress the brake pedal and hold it down Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles A warnine Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping distances SELF TEST FEATURE The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunction it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Starting and driving 5 39 NORMAL OPERATION The ABS operates at speeds above 5 to 10 km h 3 to 6 MPH The speed varies according to road condi tions
151. al A caution Do not force the compact disc into the slot This could damage the player MEDIA MEDIA button To play a CD push the meni button repeatedly while the CD is loaded until the display changes to the CD mode PP 144 SEEK TRACK buttons Fast forward Rewind When the i or 44 button is pushed and held while a CD is being played the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the CD will return to normal play speed Track up down button while a CD To play the next track push the gt gt is playing To play the previous track push the 4 button within 2 seconds after the current track starts playing To return to the beginning of the current track push the taa button after the current track has played for at least 2 seconds AN N TUNE FOLDER buttons for CD with MP3 WMA To skip to the next or previous folder push the A or WV button SCAN SCAN button When the scan button is pushed while a CD is being played the first 10 seconds of all the tracks will be played When the scan button is pushed again the CD will return to normal play from the track which is playing RPT RPT button Push the RPT button to select the mode CD Norm
152. al gt RPT CD with MP3 or WMA Normal gt Track RPT Folder RPT Track RPT The selected track will play repeatedly Folder RPT CD with MP3 or WMA only All the tracks in the selected folder will play repeatedly in sequential order RDM RDM button Push the RDM button to select the mode CD Normal gt RDM CD with MP3 or WMA Normal gt Folder RDM All RDM Folder RDM All the tracks in the selected folder will play repeatedly in random order All RDM All the tracks on the selected CD will play in random order A cD Eject button To eject a CD push the amp button When the amp button is pushed twice the CD will be ejected further and the CD can be removed with ease If a CD is ejected by pushing the amp button and it is Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 35 not taken out from the loading slot the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD FM AM radio operation GX R Giat penia track rower we v JVHO505X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position AM FM AM band select button When the amp button is pushed while the audio system is off the audio system and the radio will turn on When the M button is push
153. al of your cellular phone for further details If the search mode finds the device it will be shown on your cellular phone display 3 Select the device name MY CAR Enter the passcode number 1234 as shown on the display of the audio unit with the keypad on your cellular phone and then push the confirmation button on your cellular phone Screen display Push briefly MENU button PSST PHONE SETUP Push ENTER Cd Turn VOLUME dial PAIR PHONE Push ENTER READY TO PAIR P asscone 1224 Your cellular phone setup select MY TEY then enter 123 If successful PAIRING OK CONNECT OK eee 1 1 PAIR PAIRPHONE Sen for the main screen 1 Mobile name Once the connection is finalized the audio unit will automatically register the cellular phone and the audio unit display shows PAIRING OK and CONNECT OK If it fails to register the display shows PAIRING FAIL then start the procedure previously described again or consult the owner s manual of your cellular phone You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones However you can only use one cellular phone at a time If you have 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones registered a new cellular phone can only replace one of the 5 existing paired phones Use DEL PHONE to delete one of the existing paired phones 4 66 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Paired phone list The paired phone list shows which phones have been
154. ally controls constant temperature air flow distribution and fan speed after the desired temperature is set manually SOs SO Ol oO To turn off the heater and air conditioner push the OFF button Cooling and dehumidified heating 1 Push the AUTO button AUTO will appear on the display 2 If the A C indicator light does not illuminate push the A C button The A C indicator light will illuminate 3 Push the temperature control A Ww but ton to set the desired temperature 4 If the indicator light on either the outside air circulation a gt button or the air recirculation gt button is illuminated push and hold the button with the light illuminated to switch to the automatic air intake control mode A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction Heating A C off 1 Push the AUTO button AUTO will appear on the display 2 If the A C indicator light illuminates push the A C button The A C indicator light will turn off Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 9 3 Push the temperature control A Ww but ton to set the desired temperature e Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature Doing so may cause the tem perature to not be controlled properly
155. amage the USB memory device and or the port Make sure that the USB memory device is connected correctly into the USB port Some USB devices come with a mark as a guide Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction before inserting the device e Do not place objects near the USB memory device to prevent the objects from leaning on the USB memory device and the port Pressure from the objects may damage the USB memory device and or the port AUX AUX button To operate the USB memory device use one of the following methods e Push the Aux button and then turn the dial to select the USB item Once highlighted push the ENTER dial e Push the aux button repeatedly until USB is highlighted and then push the ENTER dial Audio main operation The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of the Compact Disc CD operation For details see CD player operation P 4 40 List view Quick search ppt lt lt MIX Random play RPT Repeat track Folder browsing DISP DISP button While a track with recorded music information tags ID3 tags is being played the title of the played track will be displayed If the tags are not provided a notification message will be displayed When the ose button is pushed repeatedly further information about the track can be displayed along with the track
156. ame traffic information and news NOTE In some countries or regions some of these services may not be available Alternative Frequency AF mode The AF mode operates in the FM radio mode e The AF mode operates both in the FM radio and CD mode if FM was previously selected in the radio mode e The AF function compares signal strengths and selects the station with the optimum reception conditions for the currently tuned in station RBDS functions Programme Service PS function station name display function When an RBDS station is tuned in with seek or manual tuning the RBDS data is received and the PS name is displayed Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 51 LW MW FM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER f MUTE button 9 2 POWER ON OFF button 10 3 Sound preference button 11 4 FM band select button 12 5 AM band select button 13 6 Radio memory buttons 14 7 CD button 15 8 AUX button 16 TA Traffic Announcement button MENU button CD EJECT button SEEK TRACK button MIX Mix play button RPT Repeat button VOLUME control MENU select dial ENTER button 4 52 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 17 18 19 AUX IN auxiliary input jack NEWS button TUNE SEARCH button Anti theft system if equipped This unit can only be activated when the ignition switch for NATS is in the ACC or ON position
157. and supplemental restraint system 1 17 ISOFIX lower anchor location The ISOFIX anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the ISOFIX anchors ISOFIX child restraint anchor attachments Anchor attachment ISOFIX child restraints include two rigid attachments that can be connected to two anchors located in the seat With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the ISOFIX child restraints This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manu facturer ISOFIX child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap or other anti rotation devices such as support legs When installing ISOFIX child restraints carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraints See Child restraint installation using ISOFIX P 1 19 CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHORAGE if equipped Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a child restraint system on the rear seat When installing a child restraint system carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint system A WARNING e Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstan
158. any position Instruments and controls 2 11 WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS 4 a S E a gt im lt ae G u of il ss jie 2 12 Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light Brake warning light Charge warning light Door open warning light Electric power steering warning light Engine oil pressure warning light High temperature warning light red Intelligent Key system warning light Low fuel warning light Malfunction warning light red diesel en gine model Master warning light P position selecting warning light Seat belt warning light Instruments and controls Speed 120 km h 75 MPH warning light for the Middle East Supplemental Restraint System SRS air bag warning light Water in fuel filter warning light diesel en gine model Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC warning light for Australia and New Zealand Cruise control on indicator light Cruise control speed limiter set indicator light Electronic Stability Program ESP off in dicator light Front fog lights indicator light Front passenger air bag status light Glow plug indicator light diesel engine model High beam indicator light Low temperature indicator light green Malfunction Indicator Light
159. ar spoiler P 8 30 Fuel Fuel filler lid P 3 20 6 JVC0007X Fuel recommendation P 9 4 Turn signal lights Switch operation P 2 35 Bulb replacement P 8 30 Reverse lights Rear fog light Switch operation P 2 36 Bulb replacement P 8 30 Sonar parking sensor system P 5 34 Back door P 3 20 Back door operation P 3 20 Intelligent Key system P 3 9 Remote keyless entry system P 3 7 10 License plate light P 8 30 if equipped Illustrated table of contents 0 5 0 6 Stop tail lights P 8 30 Rear window Wiper and washer switch P 2 38 Rear window defogger P 2 39 High mounted stop light Model without rear spoiler P 8 30 High mounted stop light Model with rear spoiler P 8 30 Fuel Fuel filler lid P 3 20 Illustrated table of contents Bulb replacement P 8 30 11 Back door P 3 20 Back door operation P 3 20 Intelligent Key system P 3 9 Remote keyless entry system P 3 7 12 License plate light P 8 30 if equipped JVC0451X Fuel recommendation P 9 4 Turn signal lights Switch operation P 2 35 Bulb replacement P 8 30 Reverse lights Bulb replacement P 8 30 Sonar parking sensor system P 5 34 Rearview camera for rearview monitor P 4 2 Rear fog light Switch operation P 2 36 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT aarp w Tonneau board
160. are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate However this is not a malfunction After the coolant temperature warms up the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally The sensors A and located on the instrument panel help maintain a constant temperature Do not put anything on or around the sensors The illustration is for the Left Hand Drive LHD model For the Right Hand Drive RHD model the layout will be the opposite MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER 1 Rear window defogger switch if equipped See Defogger switch P 2 39 Fan speed control gg dial AIC Air Conditioner button if equipped Air flow control dial Temperature control dial Air intake lever Outside air circulation aay Air recirculation gt To turn off the heater and air conditioner turn the fan speed control g dial to the OFF 0 position oaPpPon Controls Outside air circulation Move the air intake lever to the a gt position The air flow is drawn from outside the vehicle Air recirculation Move the air intake lever to the gt position The air flow is circulated inside the vehicle JVHO545X Air flow control Turn the air flow control dial to change the air flow mode 74 Air flows from the center and side ventilators 174 Air flows from the center and side ventilators and foot outlets p Air flows mainly from the foot
161. arts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not standard equip ment or are extremely deteriorated the ESP OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate e When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners the ESP system may not operate properly and the ESP OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate Do not drive on these types of roads e When driving on unstable surfaces such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the ESP OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface e If wheels or tires other than those recom mended are used the ESP system may not operate properly and SLIP indicator light may illuminate e The ESP system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road e When the ESP system is operating the SLIP indicator amp in the instrument panel blinks e f the SLIP indicator blinks the road conditions are slippery Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions Be sure to drive carefully See Slip indicator light if equipped except for Australia and New Zealand P 2 17 and Electronic Stability Program ESP off indicator light P 2 16 e Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the system the SLIP a
162. ation frequencies six in each of FM 1 FM 2 and FMT and 6 AM station frequencies To store the station frequency manually 1 Tune to the desired broadcasting station fre quency by using the 44 button 2 Push and hold a radio memory button until a beep sounds The radio mutes when the memory button is pushed 3 The channel indicator will display and the radio mute disengages indicating that the memory is stored properly 4 Perform steps 1 3 for all other memory buttons If the battery cable is disconnected or if the audio fuse blows the radio memory will be erased If this occurs reset the desired stations USB memory device operation fans nln J Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 41 JVH0518X Audio main operation The USB outlet connector is located on the instrument panel Open the lid and connect a USB memory device to the connector The system will switch to the USB memory device mode automatically If the system is turned off while the USB memory device is playing pushing the dial will start the USB memory device If the USB memory device cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed e USB memory device not supported e No audio file detected A caution e Do not force the USB memory device into the USB port Inserting the USB memory device tilted or upside down into the port may d
163. ator ST will display during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception 4 32 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Ajy When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually push the 4 or W button until the desired frequency is achieved TUNE FF REW FOLDER button When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically push the 4 o W button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at the station Y When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically push the YW button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at the station SEEK button SCAN button When the scan button is pushed the system will seek and stop at the detected broadcasting station for 5 seconds and then it will start to seek for the next broadcasting station Push the scan button in this 5 second period to stop seeking Radio memory button The audio system can store up to 12 FM station frequencies for FM1 and FM2 and 6 AM station frequencies To store the station frequency 1 Tune to the desired broadcasting station fre quency by using the 4 or W button 2 Push and hold a memory button 1 6 until a beep sounds 3 The switch number and frequency will appear on the displ
164. ature range For Hong Kong and Thailand OW 20 is preferable If OW 20 is not available select the viscosity from the chart that is suitable for the outside temperature range Except for Europe Ukraine Hong Kong Thai land and India CVT model 10W 30 is preferable If 10W 30 is not available select the viscosity from the chart that is suitable for the outside temperature range Diesel engine oil Outside Temperature Range Anticipated Before Next Oil Change DIESEL ENGINE OIL 5W 30 5W 40 10W 30 10W 40 15W 30 15W 40 JVTO0029X 5W 30 is preferable If 5W 30 is not available select the viscosity from the chart that is suitable for the outside temperature range AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGER ANT AND LUBRICANT The air conditioner system of your vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC 134a R134a and the lubricant NISSAN A C System Oil Type R or equivalents Use of any other refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage and you may need to replace your vehicle s entire air conditioner system The release of refrigerants into the atmosphere is prohibited in many countries and regions The refrig erant HFC 134a R 134a in your vehicle will not harm the Earth s ozone layer However it may contribute in a small part to the global warming effect NISSAN recommends that the refrigerant be appropriately recovered and recycled Contact a NISSAN dealer when ser
165. ause heat build up and possible tire failure Technical information 9 11 RADIO APPROVAL NUMBER AND INFORMATION FOR EUROPE Remote keyless entry system if equipped Hereby ALPS ELECTRIC CO LTD declares that these Keyless and TPMS TUNER model TWC1G124 and Keyless Transmitter model TWB1U761 are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC A caution Do not exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine fire or the like A caution Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equiva lent type Intelligent Key system if equipped Hereby ALPS ELECTRIC CO LTD declares that these Passive Entry System Hand Unit model TWB1G662 Passive Entry System Tuner model TWC1G135 ANT ASSY IMMOBILISER model TWK1A002 are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC A caution Do not exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine fire or the like 9 12 Technical information A caution Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equiva lent type NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS immobili zer Hereby CalsonicKansei Corp declares that this ANT ASSY IMMOBILISER model MW1014 is in compli ance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC A caution Do not exposed to excessive heat su
166. automatically DISP button When the oisr button is pushed while a CD with a title is being played the display will change as follows CD iat Display Album Title Song Title CD with MP3 or WMA ie Display Folder Title Song Title Artist Name Album Title PP 144 SEEK TRACK button When the button is pushed while a CD is being played the present track will be advanced and move to the next track Push the 1 button several times to skip forward tracks The CD will advance the number of times the button is pushed When the last track of the CD is forwarded the first track will be played When the 144 button is pushed while a CD is being played the present track will start over from the beginning of the current track Push the ia button several times to skip back tracks The CD will rewind the number of times the button is pushed When the first track of the CD is rewound the last track will be played gt gt lt lt When the or lt lt button is pushed and held while a CD is being played the CD will be played while forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the CD will return to the normal play speed When the gt or lt lt button is pushed while a CD with MP3 or WMA is being played the first track in the next or the previous folder
167. ay when the memory is stored properly 4 Perform steps 1 3 for all other memory buttons Push a memory button 1 6 to select a desired memory If the battery cable is disconnected or if the audio fuse blows the radio memory will be erased In such a case reset the desired stations AUTOP Automatic Preset button The audio system can store up to 6 FM station frequencies and 6 AM station frequencies To store the station frequency automatically push and hold the AUTOP button until a beep sounds The station will be automatically stored in the AUTO P memory The display indicates AP Push the AUTOP button to select a desired memory FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER Type D OO SOON E ia CD eject button MENU button AUTO P DISP button SCAN button FM AM band select button MEDIA button SEEK button TRACK button 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 JVHO504X TUNE button FOLDER button Power VOL dial RDM button Radio memory buttons AUX IN jack RPT button USB connector Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 33 Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position l Power vOL dial Power ON OFF To turn on the audio system push the dial e The system will turn on in the mode which wa
168. bbean countries and Micra Active km h MPH 1st 47 29 2nd 86 53 3rd 126 78 4th 160 99 5th HR15DE engine model for South Africa km h MPH 1st 44 27 2nd 79 49 3rd 117 73 4th 158 98 5th HR15DE engine model for the Middle East Lebanon and Jordan km h MPH 1st 43 27 2nd 79 49 3rd 116 72 4th 157 97 5th HR12DDR engine model for Europe km h MPH 1st 47 29 2nd 86 53 3rd 127 79 4th 171 106 5th K9K engine model km h MPH 1st 36 22 2nd 65 41 3rd 92 57 4th 126 78 5th IDLING STOP SYSTEM for Hong Kong The Idling Stop System activates to prevent unneces sary fuel consumption exhaust emissions and noise e When you stop the vehicle the engine is turned off automatically e When you start the vehicle again the engine is turned on automatically A caution When the vehicle is moved at approximately 2 km h or more while the engine is stopped by the system such as on a downhill grade the engine restarts automatically To avoid an acci dent be sure to depress the brake pedal NOTE The Idling Stop System will not activate under the following conditions e when the engine is kept idling without any driving after the engine is turned on when the engine coolant temperature is low when the battery capacity is low when the battery temperature is low or extremely high when the vehicle is moved when a negat
169. bility Program ESP OFF switch 17 Fuse box 18 Glove box 19 Power outlet or USB AUX connector with navigation system 20 Shift lever Automatic Transmission AT model Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model Manual Transmission MT model 21 Cup holder 22 Push button ignition switch model with Intelli gent Key system 23 Tilting steering wheel lock lever 24 Ignition switch model without Intelligent Key system steering lock 25 Stop Start System OFF switch 26 Hood lock release handle 27 Fuel filler lid release handle 28 Outside rearview mirror control switch 29 Headlight aiming control switch if equipped Refer to the separate NISSAN Connect Owner s Manual if equipped Instruments and controls 2 3 RIGHT HAND DRIVE RHD MODEL Type B Example Side ventilator Upper instrument box Passenger s front impact air bag Audio system or Navigation system Rear window defogger switch Hazard indicator flasher switch Heater and air conditioner control Center ventilator ONO OB Oo No 2 4 Instruments and controls 11 12 1314 15 23 24 25 26 27 28 JVIO170X Wiper and washer switch Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio control Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol without navigation system Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol with navigation system Meters and gauges
170. ble in this space e This system may not be able to measure the parking space correctly between the tall vehicles such as trucks e When the tire pressure is not correct this system may not be able to measure the parking space correctly e When replacing a tire with one other than a genuine NISSAN tire the same size as the original tire have your vehicle adjusted by NISSAN dealer If genuine NISSAN tires are not used the system cannot guarantee accurate measurement of the parking space 5 36 Starting and driving JVS0031X e When the sensor is covered in snow or mud the system may not be able to measure the parking space correctly Always keep your sensor clean JVS0029X Q Parking space measurement switch ON indicator light Setting the level mode Depending on your driving level the modes can be selected from the following e Amateur e Normal e Expert To set the mode perform the following procedure 1 Push and hold the parking space measurement switch 4 for at least 5 seconds The buzzer then sounds for 5 seconds 2 Push the switch 4 the number of times needed to set the desired mode within 10 seconds After 10 seconds the buzzer sounds the number of times previously pushed If the switch is not pushed the buzzer will sound the number of times that corresponds to the current mode set The mode can be selected to Amateur Normal and Expert by pushing the switch once to t
171. cast interrupt function ALARM INTERRUPTION EBU SPEC FOR INFO When the radio receives PTY code 31 an emergency broadcast code the sound is inter rupted the emergency broadcast is heard and PTY31 ALARM is displayed The volume level at this time is the same as that for traffic announce ments Once the emergency broadcast is finished the unit immediately returns to the previous source e REG Regional mode Some local radio stations are linked together Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 55 according to their region because they only offer limited coverage due to their limited number of transmitters If the signal from one station be comes weak while you are driving around RDS mode will switch to another local station in the region with a stronger signal When the REG mode is activated in the FM band and the radio receiver is tuned to a local radio station it will keep receiving this radio station without switching to another local station For activation or deactivation use the MENU button Details are explained later in this section Traffic Announcement TA e The TA function operates in the FM and CD modes e The TA mode is turned on or off when the TA button is pushed for less than 2 seconds e The TA mode operates regardless of whether the AF mode is on or off e TA ON is displayed when the TA mode is turned on and the TA indicator turns on TA OFF is displayed when
172. ce REGULATORY INFORMATION Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and li censed to Clarion Co Ltd and Daewoo IS Corp CE STATEMENT Hereby Clarion Co Ltd and Daewoo IS Corp declares that this Bluetooth car kit AV System is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Bluetooth HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM Type A JVHOOO6X JVHO046X For South Africa 1 PHONE SEND button 2 PHONE END BACK button 3 PHONE BOOK button The following options can be selected e Paired list Pair phone Delete phone Bluetooth connection Delete phone book Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 65 e My number Pairing procedure If you wish to make a Bluetooth connection for the first time between your cellular phone and the Blue tooth system of the audio unit perform the following pairing procedure 1 Place the ignition switch in the ACC position 2 Switch on the audio system and your cellular phone For the vehicle 1 Briefly push the MENU button 2 Push the ENTER button 3 Turn the MENU VOL dial and select PAIR PHONE then push the ENTER button 4 The display shows READY TO PAIR then PASS CODE 1234 On the cellular phone 1 Activate the Bluetooth connection 2 Activate the search mode for Bluetooth equip ment Refer to the owner s manu
173. ces are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle e The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with the cargo cover or items in the luggage area Remove the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it and any luggage Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged 1 18 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Anchorage location JVROOO1X The anchor points are located on the seat behind the rear seats outboard seating positions JVROOO9X For Australia and New Zealand The center anchorage if equipped is located on the back door opening CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING ISOFIX A warnine e Attach ISOFIX child restraints only at the specified locations For the ISOFIX lower Installation on rear outboard seats Front facing Be sure to follow the manufacturer s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint Follow these steps to install a front facing child restraint on the rear outboard seats using ISOFIX anchor locations see ISOFIX child restraint system P 1 17 If a child restraint is not secured properly your child could be ser iously injured or killed in an accident SSS0754A e Do not install child restraints that require the Step 4 use of a top tether strap to seating positions Shorten
174. ch as sunshine fire or the like A caution Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equiva lent type FOR CROATIA Remote keyless entry system if equipped IZJAVA O SUKLADNOSTI RENAULT NISSAN HRVATSKA 0 0 0 ADRESA Radni ka cesta 47 10000 Zagreb Croatia MATI NI BROJ SUBJEKTA MBS 080006703 Pod punom odgovorno u izjavijujemo da je radijska oprema i telekomunikacijska terminaina RITT oprema OPIS DPREME TPMS RF prijamnik TIPSKA OZNAKA OPREME MARKETIN KOG IME OPREME PROIZVO A OPREME sukladna s bitnim zahtjevima iz lanka 4 Pravilnika o radijskoj opremi i tetekomuntkacl skoj opremi Narodne Novine br 112 2008 odnosno primjenjenim normama Alps Electric Co Ltd EN 300 220 1 V2 1 1 2006 04 EN 300 220 2 V2 1 2 2007 06 EN 301 489 1 V1 8 1 2008 04 EN 301 489 3 V4 4 1 2002 08 EN 80065 2002 Amd 1 2006 EN 60065 2002 Amd 11 2008 Abderke Daka ig i potpis origovorne osobe Zagreb 27 11 2009 Mjasto i datum JVT0008X IZJAVA O SUKLADNOSTI RENAULT NISSAN HRVATSKA d o o ADRESA Radni ka coata 47 10000 Zagreb MATI NI BROJ SUBJEKTA MBS 080006703 Pod punom odgovorno u izjavijujemo da jo radijska oprema i tefekomunikacijska tarminalna RiTT oprema Oda ilja sustava za daljinsko zaMju avanja otklju avanje vozita TIPSKA OZNAKA OPREME TWB1U761 OPIS OPREME MARKETINSKO IME OPREME
175. ch will not function under the following conditions e When the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When any door is open or not closed securely When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position e Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle e After locking the doors using the door handle request switch make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles e When locking the doors using the door handle request switch make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the door handle request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle e The door handle request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system e Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch The door will be unlocked but will not open Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 Request switch locations JVP0215X JVP0216X When you carry the Intelligent Key with you you can lock or unlock al
176. changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences e Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality Compact Disc CD player e During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the humidity If this occurs remove the CD from CD player and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD player sometimes may not function when the passenger compartment temperature is ex tremely high Lower the temperature before use Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight CDs that are of poor quality or are dirty scratched covered with fingerprints or that have pin holes may not work properly e The following CDs may not work properly Copy control compact discs CCCD Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW COMPACT Oe Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction 8 cm 3 1 in discs except for FM AM Radio with Compact Disc Player Type B CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label CDs that are warped scratched or have unusual edges CD lens cleaner discs This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs It has no capabilities to record or burn CDs Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 11 e If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed Check disc CHK
177. cle make sure the shift lever is moved to the P Park position The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P Park position without depressing the foot brake pedal Automatic Transmission model Continuously Variable Transmission model Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended When parking for an extended period of time with Stop Start Idling Stop System if equipped activated the engine will restart automatically Never leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position Never leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in the vehicle Pets should not be left alone either They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and inadvertently be come involved in a serious accident and injure themselves On hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause se vere or possibly fatal illness to people and animals Right Hand Drive RHD model Firmly apply the parking brake Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT model Move the shift lever to the P Park position Manual Transmission MT model Move the shift lever to the R Reverse position When parking on an uphill grade move the shift lever to the 1 1st position To help prevent the vehicle from moving into traffic when parked on an incline it is a go
178. cle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving 2 Second gear Use this position for climbing hills or engine braking on downhill grades 1 Low gear Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades Do not shift into the gears when the vehicle speed exceeds the following limits otherwise the engine may over rev and cause engine damage Shift lever position Engine model on f e HR12DE km h MPH 45 28 90 66 HR15DE km h MPH 50 30 95 60 Overdrive switch JVS0013X Left Hand Drive LHD model Each time the engine is started the overdrive function is automatically reset to ON ON position With the engine running and the shift lever in the D Drive position the transmission upshifts into the overdrive as vehicle speed increases Overdrive does not engage until the engine has reached operating temperature OFF position For driving up and down long slopes where engine braking is necessary push the overdrive switch The overdrive off indicator light in the meter panel illuminates When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope you may feel uncomfortable shift shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of the overdrive repeatedly In this case push the overdrive switch to turn the overdrive OFF When driving condit
179. controlled by the cruise control speed limiter system the indicator light illumi nates If the cruise control speed limiter set indicator light blinks while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the cruise control speed limiter system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly See Cruise control P 5 30 and Speed limiter if equipped for Europe P 5 28 Electronic Stability Program ESP off indicator light if equipped The Electronic Stability Program ESP off indicator ight illuminates when the ESP off switch is pushed to the OFF position When the ESP off switch is pushed to the OFF position the ESP system is turned off If the ESP off indicator light and slip indicator light illuminate while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ESP system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly See Electronic Stability Program ESP System if equipped for Europe P 5 27 4D Front fog lights indicator light if equipped The front fog lights indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on See Fog light switch P 2 36 Be Front passenger air bag status light if equipped The front passenger air bag status light
180. correct the phone system will dial the corresponding number Make a call via speed dial To make a speed dial call using one of the assigned preset buttons proceed as follows 1 Briefly push the button 4 70 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 2 Push the corresponding preset button 1 6 Alternatively you can select the corresponding preset number by turning the MENU VOL dial instead of pushing the preset button 3 To confirm the selection push the button to make the call Receiving a call When receiving an incoming call the display will show the caller identification or NO NUMBER and you can e answer the call by briefly pushing the button e end the call after the conversation by pushing the E button e reject the call by pushing the 3 button Steering wheel switch for Bluetooth The hands free mode can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel Volume control switch The volume control switch allows you to adjust the volume of the speakers by pushing the or buttons Telephone button The and buttons allows you to e accept an incoming call by pushing the C button e reject an incoming call by pushing the button during the incoming call e end an active call by pushing the C button once e redial the last outgoing call by pushing the C button twice e make a speed dial call by pushing the but
181. cted Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing de vices should not be used on the pre tensioner seat belt system e If you need to dispose of the pre tensioner seat belt system or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Correct pre ten sioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury The pre tensioner seat belt system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions Working with the seat belt retractor it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants The pre tensioner is encased with the front seat belt s retractor and anchor These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts When the pre tensioner seat belt activates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCE DURE A warnine e Once the air bags have been inflated the air bag modules will not function and must be replaced The air bag modules must be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The inflated air ba
182. ction intervals should be followed For additional information see a separate maintenance booklet BRAKE BOOSTER Check the brake booster function as follows 1 With the engine off depress and release the foot brake pedal several times When the foot brake pedal movement distance of travel remains the same from one pedal application to the next continue on to the next step 2 While depressing the foot brake pedal start the engine The pedal height should drop a little 3 With the foot brake pedal depressed stop the engine Keep the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds The pedal height should not change 4 Run the engine for 1 minute without depressing the foot brake pedal then turn it off Depress the foot brake pedal several times The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each de pression as the vacuum is released from the booster If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer BRAKE FLUID A warnine e Use only new fluid from a sealed container Old inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle s stopping ability e Clean the filler cap before removing e Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children A caution Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces This will damage the paint If fluid is spil
183. d versely affect vehicle handling performance and the VDC OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illumi nate e If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not standard equip ment or are extremely deteriorated the VDC OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate e If engine related parts such as a muffler are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated the VDC OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate e When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate Do not drive on these types of roads e When driving on unstable surfaces such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the VDC OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface e If wheels or tires other than those recom mended are used the VDC system may not operate properly and VDC OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate e The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road When accelerating or driving on slippery surfaces the tires may spin or slide With the Vehic
184. d canals rivers etc It should be disposed of at proper waste facilities NISSAN recommends hav ing your oil changed by a NISSAN dealer Be careful not to burn yourself as the engine oil may be hot Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 e Avoid direct skin contact with used oil If contacted wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner and plenty of water as soon as possible e Store used engine oil in marked containers out of the reach of children A caution Waste oil must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself Engine oil replacement HR12DDR HR12DE and HR15DE engine models JVM0059X HR12DDR engine model HR12DE engine model JVM0001X HR15DE engine model Oil filler cap Oil drain plug Oil filter Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and warm it up until the engine temperature reaches the normal operating tem perature approximately 5 minutes Stop the engine Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain back to the oil pan 10 11 12 13 Place a large drain pan under the drain plug Remove the drain plug with a wrench Remove the oil filler cap and completely drain the oil If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Engine oil filter replacement HR12DDR
185. d powertrain are in working condition before towing If any units are damaged the vehicle must be towed using a dolly or flatbed tow truck e NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving front wheels off the ground In case of emergency 6 11 TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN Towing Two Wheel Drive 2WD model 6 12 Incase of emergency NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used under the front wheels when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be placed on a flatbed tow truck as illustrated Front wheels on the ground A caution Never tow Automatic Transmission AT Con tinuously Variable Transmission CVT model with the front wheels on the ground Doing so will cause serious and expensive damage to the drivetrain Manual Transmission MT model 1 Place the ignition switch in the OFF position 2 Secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with rope or a similar device 3 Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position 4 Release the parking brake 5 Attach safety chains whenever towing Rear wheels on the ground 1 Place the ignition switch to the OFF position 2 Secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with rope or a similar device 3 Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position 4 Release the parking brake 5 Attach safety chains whenever towing All four wheels on the ground A caution Never tow AT CVT mo
186. d hold the i44 buttons to fast forward or rewind through the track When the button is released the track will play at normal playing speed 4 40 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Track up down By pushing the 144 buttons once the track will skip forward to the next track or backward to the beginning of the current track Push the i iaa buttons more than once to skip through the tracks Folder browsing If the recorded media contains folders with music files pushing the i144 button will play the tracks of each folder in sequence To select a preferred folder 1 Push the enter dial or button and a list of tracks in the current folder will be displayed Push the button Turn the enter dial to highlight the preferred folder 4 Push the enter dial to access the folder Push the enter dial again to start playing the first track or turn the enter dial and push the enter dial to select another track If the current selected folder contains sub folders push the enter dial a new screen with a list of sub folders will be displayed Turn the dial to highlight the sub folder and then push the dial to select Select the root folder item when songs are recorded additionally in the root
187. d rain e After driving on coastal roads which may cause rusting from the sea breeze e When contaminants such as soot bird droppings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface e When dust or mud builds up on the paint surface 1 Wash the vehicle surface with a wet sponge and plenty of water 2 Clean the vehicle surface gently and thoroughly using a mild soap a special vehicle soap or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water A caution e Do not wash the vehicle with strong house hold soap strong chemical detergents ga soline or solvents e Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot as the paint surface may become water spotted 7 2 Appearance and care e Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other for eign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged 3 Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water 4 Use a dampened chamois to dry the paint surface and avoid leaving water spots When washing the vehicle take care of the following e Inside flanges joints and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regularly e Be sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the doors are not clogged e Spray water to the underbody a
188. del CRUISE JVS0028X Vehicle information display Ta CRUISE indicator 2 SET indicator light 3 Set speed indicator light Instrument panel 4 Cruise control indicator light Turning on cruise control Push the cruise control MAIN switch The cruise control indicator light illuminates The set speed indicator shows Setting cruising speed 1 Accelerate to the desired speed 2 Push the SET switch and release it 3 The SET indicator light and set speed indicator illuminate on the meter panel and the vehicle information display 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal The vehicle will maintain the set speed Passing another vehicle Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate After releasing the accelerator pedal the vehicle will return to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills In such cases drive without the cruise control Resetting to slower speed Use any one of the following methods to reset to a slower speed e Lightly tap the foot brake pedal When the vehicle reaches the desired speed push and release the SET switch e Push and hold the SET switch When the vehicle reaches the desired speed release the SET switch e Quickly push and release the SET switch This will reduce the vehicle speed by about 1 km h or 1 MPH Resetting to faster speed Use any one of the followi
189. del with all four wheels on the ground Doing so will cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission Manual Transmission MT model 1 Place the ignition switch in the OFF position 2 Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position 3 Release the parking brake Freeing trapped vehicle A warnine e Never allow anyone to stand near the towing line during the pulling operation e Never spin the tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of the vehicle could also over heat and be damaged e Do not pull the vehicle using the rear hook The rear hook is not designed to pull the vehicle out in the event that the vehicle becomes trapped In the event that your vehicle s tires become trapped in sand snow or mud and the vehicle is unable to free itself without being pulled use the recovery hooks e Use the recovery hooks only Do not attach the pulling device to any other part of the vehicle body Otherwise the vehicle body may be damaged e Use the recovery hooks to free a vehicle only Never tow a vehicle using only the recovery hooks e The recovery hooks are under tremendous stress when used to free a trapped vehicle Always pull the pulling device straight out from the vehicle Never pull on the recovery hooks at an angle Type A except for Sports version JVEO114X Type B except for Sports version In case of emergency 6 13 Type
190. del without intelligent Key system Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT Manual transmission MT Steering lock Key positions Push button ignition switch model with Intelligent Key system Precautions on push button ignition switch operation Intelligent Key system Steering lock Ignition switch positions Intelligent Key battery discharge Starting engine model without Intelligent Key system Gasoline engine Diesel engine Starting engine model with Intelligent Key system Gasoline engine Diesel engine Driving vehicle Driving with Automatic Transmission AT ie Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 14 Driving with Manual Transmission MT s sssssssseseeeeeseeee 5 17 Idling Stop System for Hong Kong Operating Idling Stop System Idling Stop OFF switch Stop Start System if equipped for Europe Normal operation Stop Start System display and indicators Precautions on Stop Start Stop Start System OFF ewitch Pe Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system if equipped except f for Europe Australia and New Zealand Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system for Australia and New Zealand Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch Electronic Stability Program ESP System if equipped for Europe ssct ccscceseuesccecntesciveastensavaeviesieec
191. do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electrical conductors such as rear window defogger elements SEAT BELTS warnine e Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor e Never use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belts P 1 7 CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUT ING TO VEHICLE CORROSION e The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas e Damage to the paint surface and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture The accumulation of sand dirt and water on the inside floor of the vehicle can accelerate corrosion Wet floor carpet floor mats will not dry completely inside the vehicle They should be removed and completely dried to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated Corrosion will also be accelerated in a
192. driver can check the direction and angle of the tire on the display when driving the vehicle forward or backward The display of the tire angle indicator can be set in the settings mode The tire angle indicator is displayed when the indicator is set It shows for about 20 seconds e when the shift lever is shifted to the R position for at least one second Instruments and controls 2 31 Examples of display Tire angle indicator setting JVIO122X 1 The direction of the vehicle is indicated by the position of the shift lever and the direction of the front tire 2 The angle of the steering wheel and its measurement are indicated 3 The direction of the front tire is indicated 4 The vehicle is indicated To set the tire angle indicator push the J switch to select a menu in the settings mode Then push the switch to set a menu Push the J switch to select the ON or OFF setting in the tire angle settings mode ON Set the tire angle indicator OFF Cancel the tire angle indicator JVIO158X 1 When steering to the left with the shift lever in the D or L position 1 indicates that the vehicle is being driven forward and to the left 2 When steering to the left with the shift lever in the R position indicates that the vehicle is being driven backward and to the left 2 32 Instruments and controls HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH HEADLIGHT SWITCH Type A
193. ds this could result in tread separation and even bursting of the tire TYPES OF TIRES A caution When changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type that is summer all season or snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and avail ability Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and they may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire 8 42 Maintenance and do it yourself All season tires NISSAN specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance all year including snowy and icy road conditions All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do no
194. duction line VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The number is stamped as shown Technical information 9 9 shown CERTIFICATION LABEL if equipped VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE if equipped ST10441 The plate is affixed as shown ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER JVTO003X JVT0041X HR12DDR engine The cold tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the driver s side center pillar K9K engine The engine serial number is stamped on the engine as 9 10 Technical information AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL if equipped UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING if equipped Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to local safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TREADWEAR The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits serv
195. e Try to tug it forward and check if it is held securely in place Make sure that the child restraint system is properly secured prior to each use Installation on front seat seat belts without automatic locking mode A WARNING Never install a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger s seat when the front passenger s air bag is equipped Supple mental front impact air bags inflate with great force A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental front impact air bags in an accident and could seriously injure or kill your child Never install a child restraint system with a top tether strap on the front seat NISSAN recommends that a child restraint system be installed on the rear seat How ever if you must install a front facing child restraint system on the front passenger s seat move the passenger s seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used on the front passenger s seat when the front passenger s air bag is SSS0300A equipped Front facing If you must install a front facing child restraint system on the front seat follow these steps 1 Turn off the front passenger s air bag using the front passenger air bag switch See Supple mental air bag systems P 1 29 Place the ignition switch in the ON position and make sure that the front air bag status light on the
196. e CD currently being played However the audio unit will not be activated If a CD is ejected by pushing the button and it is not removed from the loading slot for some time the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD FM AM radio operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position FM AM FM AM buttons When the FM AM button is pushed while the audio system is off the audio system will turn on and the radio will turn on When the FM AM button is pushed while another audio source is playing the other audio source will turn off and the radio will turn on To change the radio band FM1 FM2 or AM push the FM AM button ENTER ENTER dial When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually turn the enter dial until the preferred frequency is achieved Pri 144 Fast Forward Rewind buttons When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically push the 144 button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at the station Radio memory buttons During radio reception pushing the radio memory button for less than 2 seconds will select the stored radio station The audio system can store up to 18 FM st
197. e FM radio and CD modes e When the AF mode is set to ON in the user setup menu mode the AF indicator illuminates For activation or deactivation use the MENU button Details are explained later in this section e Automatic switching function This function compares the strengths of the signals of all the stations on the AF list and selects the station with the optimum reception conditions e Program Information PI search Program Information PI search begins automati cally if no suitable station is found with the above automatic switching function The PI search function checks each RDS station with the same PI code During this time the sound is muted and PI SEARCH is displayed The PI search opera tion stops when a suitable station is found If no station is found once all the frequencies have been searched the radio returns to the previous frequency e Enhanced Other Network EON data update This function also operates when the AF mode is off When EON data is being received this enables automatic retuning of other preset stations on the same network Also network linked services can be used The EON indicator turns on during reception of RDS EON stations in the FM mode RDS functions e Programme Service PS function station name display function When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or manual tuning RDS data is received and the Program Service PS name is displayed e Emergency broad
198. e Push the AUX button AUX AUX button The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape player CD player MP3 player or laptop computer Push the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system Music may not play properly when a Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 53 monaural cable is used CD player operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Loading Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing If the radio is already playing it will automatically turn off and the CD will start playing A caution Do not force the CD into the slot This could damage the player After loading the CD the number of tracks and the playtime will appear on the display CD cD button When the CD button is pushed while the audio system is off and a CD is loaded the audio system will turn on and a CD will start playing automatically If the radio is already playing it will automatically turn off and the CD will start playing
199. e air to the defogger outlets to defrost defog the windows 1 Move the air intake lever to the a gt position 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the 7 position 3 Turn the fan speed control gg dial to the desired position 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot right position 5 Turn the side ventilators to the side windows to defrost or defog for a clear view to the side mirrors e To remove frost from the outside surface of the windshield quickly turn the temperature control dial to the maximum hot position and the fan speed control gg dial to the maximum position e f it is difficult to defog the windshield turn the A C button if equipped on Bi level heating This mode directs cool air from the side and center vents and warm air from the foot outlets When the temperature control dial is turned to the maximum hot or cool position the air between the ventilators and the foot outlets is the same temperature 1 Move the air intake lever to the a gt position wen 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the 474 position 3 Turn the fan speed control gg dial to the desired position 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position 4 8 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the windows 1 Move the a
200. e cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting the transmission into a forward or reverse position before the engine has warmed up e Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle is stopped This could cause unex pected vehicle movement e Never shift to either the P Park or R Reverse position while the vehicle is mov ing This could cause serious damage to the transmission e Except in an emergency do not shift to the N Neutral position while driving Coast ing with the transmission in the N Neutral position may cause serious damage to the transmission e Start the engine in either the P Park or N Neutral position The engine will not start in any other position If it does have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer e Shift into the P Park position and apply the parking brake when at a standstill for longer than a short waiting period e Keep the engine at idling speed while shifting from the N Neutral position to any driving position e When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal The foot brake pedal should be depressed in this situation Starting vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever to a driving position 3
201. e engine control system which may affect the vehicle s warranty coverage e Incorrect setting of the engine control sys tem may lead to non compliance of local and national emission laws and regulations ort Overdrive off indicator light if equipped The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when the overdrive is turned OFF For the use of the overdrive off switch see Driving with Automatic Transmission AT P 5 11 Q Rear fog light indicator light if equipped The rear fog light indicator light illuminates when the rear fog light is on See Fog light switch P 2 36 lt Security indicator light if equipped The security indicator light blinks when the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF or ACC position This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational If the security system is malfunctioning this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position For additional information see Security system P 3 17 bsi Slip indicator light if equipped except for Australia and New Zealand When the ignition switch is in the ON position the slip indicator light illuminates and then turns off This indicates that the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system or Electronic Stability Program ESP system is operational The slip indicator light blinks w
202. e home heating oil gasoline or other alternate fuels in your diesel engine The use of those or adding those to diesel fuel can cause engine damage e Do not use summer fuel at temperatures below 7 C 20 F The cold temperatures will cause wax to form in the fuel As a result it may prevent the engine from running smoothly RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL See Recommended fuel lubricants and capacities P 9 2 Gasoline engine For Europe Ukraine and South Africa Genuine NISSAN engine oil API grade SL SM or SN ILSAC grade GF 3 GF 4 or GF 5 ACEA A1 B1 A3 B3 A3 B4 A5 B5 C2 or C3 Except for Europe Ukraine and South Africa e Genuine NISSAN engine oil e API grade SL SM or SN e ILSAC grade GF 3 GF 4 or GF 5 Diesel engine e Genuine NISSAN engine oil e ACEA B1 B5 TIRE COLD PRESSURE See the tire placard affixed to the driver s side center pillar QUICK REFERENCE e Incase of emergency P 6 1 Flat tire engine will not start overheating towing How to start the engine P 5 1 How to read the meters and gauges P 2 1 Maintenance and do it yourself P 8 1 Technical information P 9 1
203. e is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3 WMA writing applications or other text editing applications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the disc is protected by copyright Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3 WMA disc or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music the music starts playing starts playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not Music cuts off or skips a 5 match the specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data Move immediately to the next song When a non MP3 WMA file has been given an extension of MP3 WMA mp3 wma or when play is prohibited by copyright when playing protection there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song ee do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software so the files might not play in the desired order Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 17 Troubleshooting
204. e or deactivate the auto door lock releasing mechanism perform the following procedures 1 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 2 Within 20 seconds push and hold the power door lock switch to the UNLOCK position for 5 seconds 3 The hazard indicator light will flash as follows if the switching operation is successful Twice activated Once deactivated CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK The child safety rear door locks help prevent rear doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle When the levers are in the lock position 4 the child safety rear door locks engage and the rear doors can only be opened by the outside door handles To disengage move the levers to the unlock position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM if equipped The remote keyless entry system can operate all door locks including the back door using the remote controller The remote controller can operate at a distance of approximately 1 m 3 3 ft away from the vehicle The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle As many as 5 remote controllers can be used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional remote controllers contact a NISSAN deal er The remote controller will not function under the following conditions e When the distance between the remote controller and vehicle is more than approximately 1 m 3 3 ft When the
205. e over six years old regardless of whether it has been used or not Tires degrade with age as well as with the vehicle usage Have your tires checked and balanced often by a repair shop or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer CHANGING TIRES AND WHEELS warnine Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning When replacing a tire use the same size speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped For recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels see Tires and wheels P 9 8 The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling ground clearance body to tire clearance snow chain clearance speedometer cali bration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury If the wheels are changed for any reason always replace with wheels which have the same offset dimension Wheels of a different offset could cause early tire wear possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and or interference with the brake discs drums Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and or early brake pad shoe wear WHEEL BALANCE Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and
206. e recognized by the in vehicle phone module e You will not be able to use a Hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio waves such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall build ing or in a mountainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult for the other party to hear your voice during a call Please close the windows if possible Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc This wireless hands free system is based on Blue tooth technology Frequency 2402 MHz 2480 MHz Output Power 4 14 dBm EIRP Modulation FHSS GFSK 8DPSK p 4DQPSK Number of Channel 79 This wireless equipment cannot be used for any services related to safety due to the possibility of radio interferen
207. e sound is inter rupted the emergency broadcast is heard and PTY31 ALARM is displayed The volume level at this time is the same as that for traffic announce ments Once the emergency broadcast is finished the unit immediately returns to the previous source REG Regional mode Some local radio stations are linked together according to their region because they only offer limited coverage due to their limited number of transmitters If the signal from one station be comes weak while you are driving around RDS mode will switch to another local station in the region with a stronger signal When the REG mode is activated in the FM band and the radio receiver is tuned to a local radio station it will keep receiving this radio station without switching to another local station For activation or deactivation use the MENU button Details are explained later in this section Traffic Announcement TA The on The TA function operates in the FM and CD modes The TA mode is turned on or off when the TA NEWS button is pushed for less than 2 seconds The TA mode operates regardless of whether the AF mode is on or off TA ON is displayed when the TA mode is turned on and the TA indicator turns on TA OFF is displayed when the TA mode is turned off and the TA indicator turns off following function operates when the TA mode is Traffic announcement interrupt function When a traffic announcement is received
208. e speed limiter is activated For more details see Speed limiter if equipped for Europe P 5 28 10 Mechanical Key LOCK warning if equipped for Europe The warning appears when the ignition switch is left in the ACC or OFF position instead of completely being turned to the LOCK position If this warning appears turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position When the ignition switch is in the ON position a buzzer will sound twice and the Mechanical Key LOCK warning shows when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or OFF position This is to warn the driver that the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position Make sure the shift lever is in the P Park position for CVT model or the shift lever is in the N Neutral position for MT model and then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A caution e The steering wheel can only be locked when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position if equipped Make sure the ignition switch is in the LOCK position before leaving the vehicle e The mechanical key can only be removed at the LOCK position Make sure the ignition switch is in the LOCK position before removing the mechanical key For further details see Ignition switch model without intelligent Key system P 5 5 Instruments and controls 2 21 WARNINGS AND ALERTS Betis Pag KEY R 00 7L H
209. e sure the shoulder belt does not fit close to child s face or neck If it does put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint system Never install a rear facing child restraint system in the front seat An inflating supple mental front impact air bag could seriously injure or kill your child A rear facing child restraint system must only be used in the rear seat Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit a child restraint system but as upright as possible Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 13 e Ifthe seat belt in the position where a child restraint system is installed requires a lock ing clip and if it is not used injuries could result from a child restraint system tipping over during normal vehicle braking or cor nering e After attaching a child restraint system test it before you place the child in it Tilt it from side to side Try to tug it forward and check if it is held securely in place The child restraint system should not move more than 25 mm 1 in If the restraint is not secure tighten the belt as necessary or install the restraint in another seat and test it again e Check the child restraint system in your vehicle to be sure that it is compatible with the vehicle s seat belt system e If a child restraint system is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases e Improper use of a child restraint sy
210. e transmission in the N Neutral position may cause serious damage to the transmission e Start the engine in either the P Park or N Neutral position The engine will not start in any other position If it does have Starting and driving 5 11 your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer e Shift into the P Park position and apply the parking brake when at a standstill for longer than a short waiting period e Keep the engine at idling speed while shifting from the N Neutral position to any driving position e When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal The foot brake pedal should be depressed in this situation Starting vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before shifting the shift lever out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever to a driving position 3 Release the parking brake the foot brake pedal and then gradually start the vehicle in motion The AT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from the P Park position to any driving position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P Park position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK OFF or ACC position or if the ke
211. ealer When the electric power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running the power assist to the steering will cease operation but you will still have control of the vehicle At this time greater steering efforts are required to operate the steering wheel especially in sharp turns and at low speeds See Electric power steering system P 5 37 2 14 Instruments and controls 7 Engine oil pressure warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position the engine oil pressure warning light illuminates After starting the engine the engine oil pressure warning ight turns off This indicates that the oil pressure sensors in the engine are operational If the engine oil pressure warning light illuminates or blinks while the engine is running it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible Stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer A caution e Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light illuminated could cause serious damage to the engine e The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level The oil level should be checked using the dipstick See Engine oil P 8 11 High temperature warning light red When the ignition switch is in the ON position the high temperature warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates tha
212. ear door lock Remote keyless entry system if equipped Using remote keyless entry system if equipped Intelligent Key system if equipped Operating range Using intelligent Key system Battery saver system Warning and audible reminders Trouble shooting guide m Using remote keyless entry fUNCHION oo 3 16 Security system if equipped o ssseeesssccssssseeesceessssteeseeessnnetteseeteene 3 17 Theft warning system NISSAN anti theft system NATS Hood Opening hood Closing hood Back door un Opening back door Fuel filler lid ceseessseseeesees Opening fuel filler lid Fuel filler cap Steering wheel Mirrors woes Inside rearview mirror Outside rearview mirrors Vanity mirrors if equipped Parking brake Lever type KEYS Your vehicle can only be driven with the keys specific to your vehicle A key number plate is supplied with your key Record the key number and keep the key number plate in a safe place except in the vehicle in case of the need to duplicate the keys The key can only be duplicated using an original key or the original key number The key number is required when you have lost all of the keys and do not have the original key to duplicate from If the key is lost or you need extra keys provide an original key or the key number to a NISSAN dealer A caution Do not leave the keys inside the vehicle when leaving the v
213. eated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel See Seat belts P 1 7 The air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants The force of the air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupants are too close to or are against the air bag modules during inflation The air bags will deflate quickly after deployment The SRS operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position When the ignition switch is in the ON position the SRS air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This indicates that the SRS is operational See SRS air bag warning light P 1 28 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 25 The supplemental front impact air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity frontal collision Always wear the seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in accidents The seat belts and the supplemental front impact air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front impact air bags inflate with great force If you are unrestrained leaning for SSS0131A SSS0132A ward sitting sideways or out of position in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in an accident You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supple mental front i
214. ecommended procedures e Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with vehicle s seat belt system e Refer to the tables later in this section for a list of the recommended fitment positions and the approved child restraints for your vehicle 1 14 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Approved child restraint positions models without ISOFIX Seating position f Rear Single folding Rear Tumble ie a e oiod x J ifi i L L L L L nasto wr f o fo fo foe f oe f oi i L_zios kg wr do o a o a d E X Not suitable for child restraint system UF Suitable for forward facing FWF universal category child restraint system approved for this group L Suitable for the particular child restraints provided in the following table Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 15 List of approved child restraints Weight group Name of CRS Facing position 9 to 18 kg Brita R MER DUO plus 9 to 18 kg Fair GO 1S 15 to 36 kg Brita R MER Kid Approved child restraint positions models with ISOFIX The following restrictions are applied when using child restraints varying by infants weight and installation position ISOFIX child restraint Weight aroun ISO L1 X are SOL oog SORI e so o oco Boo low kooo C E ewo Boo fome h IUF IL IUF Il 15 to 25 kg Ill 22 to 36 kg X Not suitable for child restraint system IUF Suitab
215. ed Card holder if equipped Cup holders Tonneau board if equipped Sun visors Interior lights Room light ies Front map lights if equipped eeeeseeescsssesseeseeceeenteceeseteeeees INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT HAND DRIVE LHD MODEL 2 2 171819 20 21 24 25 Example Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch or Electronic Stability Program ESP OFF switch Parking space measurement switch Headlight fog light and turn signal switch Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio control Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol without navigation system Instruments and controls IOG JVIO261X Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol with navigation system Driver s front impact air bag Horn Meters and gauges Steering wheel mounted controls right side Cruise control switches Speed limiter switches 8 Wiper and washer switch 9 Center ventilator 10 Rear window defogger switch 11 Hazard indicator flasher switch 12 Heater and air conditioner control 13 Audio system or Navigation system 14 Passenger s front impact air bag 15 Upper instrument box 16 Side ventilator 17 Headlight aiming control switch 18 Outside rearview mirror control switch 19 Fuel filler lid release handle 20 Hood lock release handle 21 Stop Start System OFF switch 22 Tilting steering wheel lock lever 23 Ignitio
216. ed Trip odometer reset switch trip computer mode switch P 2 8 Clock adjusting knob P 2 42 Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT position indicator P 2 10 P 5 11 Cruise control and speed limit er display P 5 30 P 5 28 Odometer twin trip odometer trip computer P 2 8 clock P 2 42 JVC0454X Illustrated table of contents 0 13 ONO NS 6 if e Type C Tachometer P 2 10 Speedometer P 2 8 Vehicle information display P 2 10 P 2 20 Trip odometer reset switch P 2 8 Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT position indicator P 2 10 P 5 11 Odometer twin trip odometer clock P 2 8 quipped 0 14 Illustrated table of contents JVC0455X ENGINE COMPARTMENT HR12DDR ENGINE MODEL af ON Ne Brake and clutch fluid reservoir P 8 19 P 8 20 Right Hand Drive RHD model Engine drive belts P 8 16 Engine oil filler cap P 8 11 Air cleaner P 8 21 Left Hand Drive LHD model Brake ia clutch fluid reservoir P 8 19 0 JVO0032X 6 Fuse fusible link box P 8 27 7 Window washer fluid reservoir P 8 23 8 Engine oil dipstick P 8 11 9 Radiator cap P 8 9 10 Battery P 8 24 11 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 10 For Manual Transmission MT Model Illustrated table of contents 0 15 HR12DE ENGINE MODEL 1 Engine drive belts P 8 16 2 Brake and clutch fluid
217. ed while another audio source is playing the other audio source will turn off and the radio will turn on button until To change the radio bands push the 54 the desired band is displayed AM gt FM1 gt FM2 A N NV TUNE FOLDER buttons When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually push the A or v button until the preferred frequency is achieved PPI 144 SEEK TRACK buttons To adjust the broadcasting station frequency auto matically push the or i44 button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at that station SCAN SCAN button When the scan button is pushed the system will seek and stop at the detected broadcasting station for 5 seconds and then it will start to seek for the next broadcasting station Push the scan button in this 5 second period to stop seeking 1 2 3 4 5 6 Radio memory buttons The audio system can store up to 12 FM station frequencies for FM1 and FM2 and 6 AM station frequencies To store the station frequency 1 Tune to the desired broadcasting station fre quency 2 Push and hold a memory button 1 6 until a beep sounds 3 The switch number and frequency will appear on the display when the memory is stored properly 4
218. eering wheel mounted controls right side Cruise control switches P 5 30 Speed limiter switches P 5 28 8 Wiper and washer switch P 2 37 9 Center ventilator P 4 5 10 Rear window defogger switch P 2 39 11 Hazard indicator flasher switch P 6 2 12 Heater and air conditioner control P 4 6 13 Audio system P 4 11 or Navigation system 14 Passenger s front impact air bag P 1 25 15 Upper instrument box P 2 44 16 Side ventilator P 4 5 17 Headlight aiming control switch P 2 34 18 Outside rearview mirror control switch P 3 22 19 Fuel filler lid release handle P 3 20 20 Hood lock release handle P 3 19 21 Stop Start System OFF switch P 5 23 22 Tilting steering wheel lock lever P 3 21 23 Ignition switch model without Intelligent Key system steering lock P 5 5 24 Push button ignition switch model with Intelli gent Key system P 5 6 25 Cup holder P 2 44 26 Shift lever Automatic Transmission AT model P 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model P 5 14 Manual Transmission MT model P 5 17 27 Power outlet P 2 43 or USB AUX connector with navigation system 28 Glove box P 2 44 if equipped Refer to the separate NISSAN Connect Owner s Manual if equipped RIGHT HAND DRIVE RHD MODEL Type A ONO OB ON es Example Side ventilator P 4 5 9 Upper instrument box P 2 44 10 Passenger s front
219. eesssseeseesensees E Elapsed time 2 28 Electric power steering system 5 37 Electric power steering warning light 2 14 Electronic Stability Program ESP ORF Swit cies cscs cocssnensisesnandenssptsentsoasceatintousreuieaeses Electronic Stability Program ESP System Emergency situations Emergency tire puncture repair ki Engine Before starting engine Break in schedule Changing engine coolant Changing engine oil and oil filter Checking engine coolant leve Checking engine oil level 10 2 Engine compartment check locations Engine cooling system Engine oil Engine oil replacement indicato Engine specifications Engine start operation indicator High temperature warning light If your vehicle overheats Spark plugs Engine cold start perio Engine start operation indicator Manual Transmission models c sscscssesssessessssesseeseesseesseesseess 2 21 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide Explanation of general maintenance items Exterior lights Fail safe Flat tire Floor mat cleaning Fluid Automatic transmission fluid ATF 8 20 Brake fluid Clutch fluid Continuously Variable Transmission CVD fiid nnna ein Engine coolant Engine oil Window washer fluid FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player 4 20 4 24 4 29 4 33 4 38 4 44 Fog light switch x Front fog lights Front map lights Front seats Front
220. ehicle 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments KEY Type A Your vehicle is equipped with the following set of keys 1 Master key Molded 2 Master key Plate 3 Key number plate JVC0019X Type B 1 Master key 2 Master key Plate 3 Key number plate Type C 1 Master key 2 Key number plate As many as 5 master keys with remote controller can be registered and used with one vehicle NISSAN ANTI THEFT SYSTEM NATS KEY if equipped JVC0018X Type A Your vehicle is equipped with the following set of keys 1 NATS key Molded 2 Key number plate JVC0020X Type B 1 NATS key 2 NATS key Molded 3 Key number plate JVIOO17X Type C 1 NATS key 2 NATS key Molded ao Key number plate JVC0063X Type D 1 NATS key 2 Key number plate Your vehicle can only be driven with the NATS keys which are registered to your vehicle s NATS compo nents As many as 5 NATS keys can be registered and used with one vehicle The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the NATS of your vehicle Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the NATS components when registering new keys be sure to take all NATS keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer A caution Do not allow the NATS key which contains an electrical transponder to come into contact with water or salt water Thi
221. electrical accessory power activates without the engine turned on ON 3 The ignition system and the electrical accessory power activate without the engine turned on START 4 The engine starter activates and the engine will start The ignition switch when released will automatically turn to the ON position A caution As soon as the engine has started release the ignition switch immediately PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH model with Intelligent Key system PRECAUTIONS ON PUSH BUTTON IGNI TION SWITCH OPERATION A warnine Do not operate the push button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds The steering wheel will lock and could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle This could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Before operating the push button ignition switch be sure to move the shift lever to the P Park position for Automatic Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission model or the shift lever to the N Neutral position for Manual Transmission model INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM The Intelligent Key system can operate the ignition switch without taking the key out from your pocket or bag The operating environment and or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation Some indicator
222. ely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely Check the belt webbing for cuts fraying wear or damage Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering condition such as excessive play hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield defogger Check that the air comes out of the defogger outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Under hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Except for maintenance free battery check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the UPPER and LOWER lines Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level Brake and clutch fluid level s For Manual Transmission MT model make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoirs Except for Manual Transmission MT model make sure that the br
223. em P 1 17 child restraint Page 1 18 10 Rear seats P 1 4 fe eee rae Child restraints P 1 13 a coe curtain side impact air bags 11 Pre tensioner seat belt system P 1 31 Head restraints P 1 5 2 Front seats P 1 2 Front seat belts P 1 7 if equipped Supplemental side impact air bags P 1 25 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 25 Rear center seat belts for three point type seat belts P 1 7 NoD 0 2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT a Type A Recovery hook P 6 13 Engine hood P 3 19 7 Windshield Wiper and washer switch P 2 37 Wiper replacement P 8 21 8 Washer fluid P 8 23 Antenna P 4 19 Windows P 2 40 9 Fog lights Switch operation P 2 36 12 13 14 JVC0469X Bulb replacement P 8 29 Front turn signal lights Switch operation P 2 35 Bulb replacement P 8 30 Clearance lights for Micra Active Switch operation P 2 33 Bulb replacement P 8 29 Clearance lights except for Micra Active Switch operation P 2 33 Bulb replacement P 8 29 14 15 16 Headlights Switch operation P 2 33 Bulb replacement P 8 29 Parking space measurement sensors P 5 34 Tires Tires and wheels P 8 42 P 9 8 Flat tire P 6 2 Side turn signal lights Switch operation P 2 35 Bulb replacement P 8 30 Outside rearview mirrors P 3 22 Doors Key
224. em 4 25 ENTER button to exit the menu After the desired levels have been set push the MENU button to exit the menu or wait at least for 10 seconds without pressing any buttons Clock Clock display can be turned on and off and clock can be adjusted e When clock is not displayed 1 Turn the audio unit on by pushing the POWER ON OFF button 2 Push the MENU button and turn the VOLUME control knob until CLOCK is displayed 3 Push the ENTER button CLOCK OFF is displayed 4 Turn the VOLUME control knob to turn the clock display mode on CLOCK ON is displayed 5 Push the ENTER button The hour display will start flashing Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust the time 7 Push the ENTER button The minute display will start flashing 8 Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust the time 9 Push the ENTER button to finish the clock adjustment e When clock is displayed 1 Turn the audio unit on by pushing the POWER ON OFF button 2 Push the MENU button and turn the VOLUME control knob until CLOCK is displayed 3 Push the ENTER button CLOCK ON is displayed 4 Perform steps 5 to 9 above to adjust the time AUX AUX button The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape CD player MP3 player laptop computers etc Push the AUX button to play a compatible dev
225. em will automatically stop the engine when all the following conditions are valid For MT model The shift lever is in Neutral position e The clutch pedal is fully released e The vehicle speed is below about 2 km h 1 MPH e The driver s seat belt is fastened e The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle e The driver s door is closed For CVT model e The shift lever is in the D Drive or N Neutral position The brake pedal is depressed The vehicle is stopped The driver s seat belt is fastened The driver s door is closed NOTE The following conditions must also be satisfied before the engine is automatically stopped If the engine does not stop this does not indicate a malfunction in the system e The engine coolant temperature is at normal operating levels e The vehicle has driven some distance since engine start e The battery voltage and temperature are within normal levels The hood is closed The steering wheel is not being turned The system is not in front defogger mode automatic air conditioner e The mode dial is not in front defogger mode manual air conditioner e The rear window defogger is not operated NOTE The engine will not restart if the brake pedal is released while the Stop Start System is acti vated under the following condition e The shift lever is in the P Park position for CVT model Starting and driving 5 21 When the Stop Start System indicat
226. emental restraint system 1 11 Attaching rear center seat belt Always be sure the rear center seat belt connector tongue and connector buckle are attached Discon nect only when folding down the rear seat To connect the buckle 1 Pull the seat belt tongue and connector tongue from the stowed position 4 2 Pull the seat belt and secure the connector buckle until it clicks The center seat belt connector tongue can be attached only into the rear center seat belt connector buckle To fasten the seat belt see Fastening seat belts P 1 9 A WARNING e When attaching the rear center seat belt connector be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured e Ifthe rear center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position serious personal injury may result in an accident or sudden stop JVROOO6X A caution Make sure to wear the rear center seat belt with the seat belt passing through the path i 1 12 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system TWO POINT TYPE SEAT BELTS if equipped Fastening seat belts The seatback should not be in a reclined position any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat 1 Insert the tongue into the buckle marked CENTER until you hear and
227. engaged the steering wheel cannot be moved Connect the jumper cables to the booster vehicle before turning the ignition switch and disenga ging the steering lock 2 3 Apply the parking brake Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT model Move the shift lever to the P Park position Manual Transmission MT model Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems headlights heater air conditioner etc Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position Remove the vent caps if equipped on the battery Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out moist cloth to reduce the hazard of an explosion Connect the jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated A caution Always connect positive to positive and negative to body ground NOT to the battery s negative In case of emergency 6 9 Be sure that the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment Be sure that the jumper cable s clamps do not contact any other metal Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 10 Depress the accelerator pedal of the booster vehicle B at about 2 000 rpm 11 Start the engine of the jumped vehicle in the normal manner A caution Never keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds If the engine does not start right away
228. equipped when the Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 21 glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you obstructs your vision at night Push the adjusting lever if equipped during the day for the best rearward visibility Automatic anti glare type The inside rearview mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you The anti glare system will be automatically turned on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position When the system is turned on the indicator light will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced Push the POWER ON OFF button A for 3 seconds to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally and the indicator light will turn off Push the POWER ON OFF button again for 3 seconds to turn the system on When the shift lever is moved into the R Reverse position the monitor display shows the view to the rear of the vehicle See Rearview monitor P 4 2 Do not hang any objects on the mirror or apply glass cleaner Doing so will reduce the sensitiv ity of the sensor resulting in improper 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments operation OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS A warnine Never touch the outside rearview mirrors while they are in motion Doing so may pinch your fingers or damage the mirror Never drive the ve
229. er of explosion if lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type SDI2451 To replace the battery 1 Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key 2 Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing 3 Replace the battery with a new one e Recommended battery CR2025 or equivalent e Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunc tion e Make sure that the side faces the bottom of the case 4 Align the tips of the upper and lower parts 4 and then push them together until it is securely closed 5 Operate the buttons to check its operation See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement FUSES ENGINE COMPARTMENT JVM0271X For checking and or replacing see a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and the fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace only with genuine NISSAN parts Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 00002000D 6 If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse If the new fuse also opens after installing
230. er of the following conditions No key inside the vehicle The warning appears when the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Unregistered Intelligent Key The warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed from the LOCK position and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key Use the registered Intelligent Key For more details see Intelligent Key system P 3 9 4 SHIFT P warning AT CVT model This warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the shift lever in any position except the P Park position If this warning appears move the shift lever to the P Park position or push the ignition switch to the ON position An inside warning chime will also sound See Intelligent Key system P 3 9 5 PUSH warning AT CVT model This warning appears when the shift lever is moved to the P Park position with the ignition switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT P warning appears To push the ignition switch to the OFF position perform the following procedure SHIFT P warning Move the shift lever to P gt PUSH warning Push the ignition switch gt ignition switch position is
231. er seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELTS Fastening seat belts The seatback should not be in a reclined position any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat 1 Adjust the seat See Seats P 1 2 2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage e The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat e If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown 4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and is snug across your chest Shoulder belt height adjustment if equipped SSS0351A e The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident e The shoulder belt should rest on
232. erred frequency is obtained TUNE button The frequency changes in steps of 100 kHz on the FM band 9 kHz on the MW band and 3 kHz on the LW band Pri 144 SEEK button When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically push the gt a button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at that station Radio memory buttons The audio system can store up to 18 FM station frequencies six in each of FM 1 FM 2 and FM T 6 MW and 6 LW station frequencies To store the station frequency manually 1 Tune to the preferred broadcasting station fre quency by using the PP lt lt or gt i lt button 2 Push and hold a radio memory button 1 until a beep sounds The radio mutes when the memory button is pushed 3 The channel indicator will be displayed and the radio mute will be cancelled indicating that the memory is stored properly 4 Perform steps 1 3 for all other memory buttons If the battery cable is disconnected or if the audio fuse blows the radio memory will be erased If this occurs reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS Alternative Frequency AF The AF function operates in the FM radio and CD modes When the AF mode is set to ON in the user setup menu mode the AF indicator illuminates For acti
233. ersh E avs LARON Electronic Stability Program ESP OFF Switch Speed limiter if equipped for Europe Speed limiter operations Cruise control if equipped Precautions on cruise control Cruise control operations Parking Sonar parking sensor system if equipped Parking Sensor Indicator vee Parking space measurement operation if equipped Trailer towing Electric power steering system Brake system Brake precautions Brake assist if equipped Anti lock Braking System ABS if equipped sssri 5 39 Using system Self test feature Normal operation Vehicle security Cold weather driving ccescesieseessesssissesssiessstessesssiessncesseeessans 5 40 Battery ines Engine coolant Tire equipment Special winter equipment Parking brake Corrosion protection BREAK IN SCHEDULE During the first 1 600 km 1 000 miles follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine perfor mance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommenda tions may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance e Do not drive at a constant speed either fast or slow for long periods of time e Do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm HR12 or HR15 engine or 2 500 rpm K9K engine Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Do not start quickly Do not brake hard as much as poss
234. erve the speed limit in the area where you are driving Supplemental Restraint System SRS air bag warning light if equipped When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position the Supplemental Restraint System SRS air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This indicates that the SRS air bag system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the SRS air bag system and or pre tensioner seat belt need servicing Have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly e The SRS air bag warning light remains illuminated after about 7 seconds e The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermit tently e The SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate at all Unless checked and repaired the SRS air bag system and or pre tensioner seat belt may not function properly See Supplemental Restraint System SRS P 1 25 _ Water in fuel filter warning light diesel engine model If the water in fuel filter warning light illuminates while the engine is running drain the water from the fuel filter promptly See Fuel filter diesel engine model P 8 16 Instruments and controls 2 15 A caution Continuing vehicle operation without properly draining could cause serious damage to the engine Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC warn ing light for Australia and New Zealand
235. f objects on the rearview monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects This is not a malfunction e Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment This is not a malfunction e f dirt rain or snow accumulates on the camera the rearview monitor may not display objects clearly Clean the camera Do not use alcohol benzine or thinner to clean the camera This will cause discoloration To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected Do not use wax on the camera window Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water While the shift lever is in the R Reverse position the automatic anti glare function is not operated VENTILATORS SIDE VENTILATORS 28 SAA3126 Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by opening closing or rotating The side ventilators can be used for the side defogger CENTER VENTILATORS Square type JVHO018X Open close the ventilators by moving the control 4 in either direction XK This symbol indicates that the ventilators are closed Moving the side control in this direction will close the ventilators This symbol indicates that the ventilators are open Moving the side control in this
236. f the same size loading range construction and type bias bias belted or radial as the rear front tires 2 If the vehicle is to be operated in severe winter conditions snow tires should be installed on all four wheels 3 For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some countries provinces and states prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 4 Snow chains may be used if desired Make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s instructions See Tire chains P 8 42 SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during the winter e A scraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows e A sturdy flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support e A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts PARKING BRAKE When parking in the area where the outside tempera ture is below 0 C 32 F do not apply the parking brake to prevent it from freezing For safe parking e Place the shift lever in the P Park position Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT model e Place the shift lever in the 1 1st or R
237. facing SSS0374A If you must install a front facing child restraint system on the rear seat follow these steps 1 Position the front facing child restraint system on the rear seat Always follow the child restraint system manufac turer s instructions for installation and use 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint system and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage To prevent slack in the lap belt it is necessary to secure the shoulder belt in place with a locking clip A Use the locking clip attached to the child restraint system or one which is equivalent in dimension and strength Be sure to follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions for belt routing 3 Test the child restraint system before you place the child in it Tilt it from side to side Try to tug it forward and check if it is held securely in place 4 Make sure that the child restraint system is properly secured prior to each use Rear facing SSS0375A If you must install a rear facing child restraint system on the rear seat follow these steps 1 Position the rear facing child restraint system on the rear seat Always follow the child restraint system manufac turer s instructions for installation and use 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint system and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage To prevent slack in t
238. ferred automatically to the audio system The transfer may take a while before comple tion The phone book data is available only when the phone is connected to the system The system downloads the latest phone book data each time the phone is connected To dial a contact from the phone book proceed as follows 1 Push the Phone button 2 Turn the enter dial to scroll down to Phone Book and then push the enrer dial 3 Scroll down through the list select the appropriate contact name highlighted and push the enter dial 4 A screen will show the number to be dialled If correct push the enter dial again to dial the number If there are numbers assigned for the contact s QO home J cellular phone or office scroll to select the appropriate number to dial 4 72 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Alternatively the quick search mode can be used as follows 1 Push the A Z button 2 Turn the enter dial for the first alphabetic or numerical letter of the contact name Once high lighted push the enter dial to select the letter 3 The display will show the corresponding contact name s Where necessary use the enter dial again to scroll further for the appropriate contact name to call 4 A screen will show the number to be dialled If correct push the enter dial again t
239. ff Push the ENTER button again to save the setting After the preferred levels have been set push the MENU button to exit the menu or wait at least for 10 seconds without pressing any buttons FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER AND NAVIGATION if equipped Boren C7 For details see the separately provided NISSAN Connect Owner s Manual STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL if equipped JVHO512X JVHOOO5X Type B 1 SOURCE select switch 2 VOLUME control switch 3 Tuning switch The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel SOURCE select switch Push the source select switch to change the mode to available audio source VOLUME control switch Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to increase or decrease the volume Tuning switch Memory change radio Push the tuning switch for less than 1 5 seconds to change the next or previous radio preset SEEK tuning radio Push the tuning switch for more than 1 5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station APS Automatic Program Search FF APS REW CD USB iPod Push the tuning switch for less than 1 5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present program or skip to the next program Push several times to skip back or skip through programs This sy
240. folder To return to the previous folder screen push the button RPT RPT button Push the button and the current track will be played continuously MIX MIX button Push the MIX button and all the tracks will be played in random order DISP DISP button While a CD with recorded music information tags CD text ID3 text tags is being played the title of the played track is displayed If the title information is not provided then Track is displayed When the osP button is pushed repeatedly further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows CD Track time Artist CD with MP3 WMA Track time Artist gt Album Folder name gt Track time gt Album Track time gt Song Track details By pushing and holding the se button the display will show a detailed overview and after a few seconds it will return to the main display Push the oise button briefly to return to the main display immediately A cD Eject button When the amp button is pushed while a CD is loaded the CD will be ejected When the amp button is pushed twice the CD will be ejected further so that the CD can be removed with ease When the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position it is possible to eject th
241. free mode is automatically activated on the registered cellular phone via Bluetooth when it comes into range A notification message appears on the audio display when the phone is connected when an incoming call is being received as well as when a call is initiated When a call is active the audio system microphone located in the ceiling in front of the rearview mirror and steering wheel switches enable hands free com munication If the audio system is in use at the time the radio CD or AUX source mode will be muted and will stay muted until the active call has ended The Bluetooth system may not be able to connect with your cellular phone for the following reasons e The cellular phone is too far away from the vehicle e The Bluetooth mode on the cellular phone has not been activated e The cellular phone has not been paired with the Bluetooth system of the audio unit e The cellular phone does not support Bluetooth technology BT Core v1 2 Hands Free Profile v1 0 and Object Push Profile v1 0 NOTE For details see the cellular phone s owner s manual Hands free phone setup To set up the Bluetooth system to pair with connect or register a preferred cellular phone push the serur button select the Bluetooth key and then push the enter dial It is also possible to display the set up menu directly by pushing the button e Pair Device Bluetooth
242. g frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 3 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 4 When VBR files are played the playback time may not be displayed correctly WMA7 and WMA8 are not applied to VBR roderevels levels Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 15 Specification chart model with type D E F audio unit Supported media CD CD R CD RW USB2 0 CD CD R CD RW ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported Supported file systems Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista based computer are not supported USB memory device FAT16 FAT32 MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz 48 kHz 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 Supported versions 1 WMA7 WMA8 WMA9 WMA 2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz 48 kHz 32 kbps 192 kbps VBR 4 D3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 VER2 4 MP3 only Tag information Song title and Artist name WMA tag WMA only CD CD R CD RW Folder levels 8 Folders and files 999 Max 255 files for one folder USB model with type D Folder levels 8 Folders 255 Files 65535 Max 999 files for one folder Folder levels audio unit Memory size 4GB USB model with type E F Folder levels 8 Folders 255 Files 2500 Max 255 files for one folder audio unit Memory size
243. g knob 4 To adjust the time perform the following procedure 1 Push the clock adjusting knob 4 for 1 5 or 3 seconds or more to enter time adjust mode The hours display will start to flash 2 Push the clock adjusting knob 4 to adjust the hour To advance the time hold down the knob 1 3 Wait at least 3 or 5 seconds for the minute display to flash 4 Push the clock adjusting knob T to adjust the minutes To advance the time hold down the knob Wait at least 3 or 5 seconds for the second display to flash 5 Push the clock adjusting knob 4 to reset the second counter The selected values will be stored if no user input is detected for 60 seconds or can be reset by using the adjusting knob POWER OUTLETS if equipped The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephone A caution The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window de fogger is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure to turn off the power switch of electrical accessory being
244. g modules cannot be repaired e The air bag systems should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle e If you need to dispose of the SRS or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Cor rect disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Incor rect disposal procedures could cause perso nal injury The air bags are designed to activate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless the SRS air bag warning light is damaged the SRS air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred The repair and replacement of the SRS should be done only by a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the vehicle information about the air bags and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the main tenance The ignition switch should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle 1 32 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2 Instruments and instrument panel yi isi a aa aA i ia Left Hand Drive LHD model Right Hand Drive RHD model Type A Right Hand Drive RHD model Type B Right Hand Drive RHD model Type C 2 5 Meters and gauges 2 6 Speedometer and odometer 2 8 Trip computer for Type A and B 2 9 Tachometer if equipped 2 10 FUCH GAUGE dden nne ieee aeaiaioe 2 10 Automatic Transmission AT
245. g wheel The vehicle may be moved to the desired location Replace the removed shift lock release cover after the operation For model with Intelligent Key system If the battery is discharged completely the steering wheel cannot be unlocked Do not move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P Park position have a NISSAN dealer check the CVT system as soon as possible A WARNING If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid temperature protec tion mode If the fluid temperature becomes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer engine power and under some conditions vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but engine and vehicle speed may be limited Fail safe When the fail safe operation occurs the CVT will not be shifted to the selected driving position If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subse quent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated T
246. gger continuously be sure to start the engine Otherwise it may cause the battery to discharge e When cleaning the inner side of the window be careful not to scratch or damage the electrical conductors on the surface of the window NOTE When the rear defogger is turned on the Stop Start Idling Stop System if equipped will not be activated 2 40 Instruments and controls HORN The horn switch operates with the ignition switch in any position except when the battery is discharged When the horn switch is pushed and held the horn will sound Releasing the horn switch will cease the horn sound WINDOWS MANUAL WINDOWS if equipped The side windows can be opened 1 or closed by turning the hand crank on each door POWER WINDOWS if equipped A warnine e Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before operat ing the power windows e Never leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in the vehicle They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and inadver tently become involved in an accident The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position To open a window push down the power window switch To close a window pull up the power window switch Driver s window switch The driver s switch which is the main switch can control all windows Locking passengers windows Fron
247. gs inflate with great force If you and your Passengers are unrestrained leaning for ward sitting sideways or out of position in any way you and your passengers are at greater risk of injury or death in an accident e Do not allow anyone to place their hands legs or face near the supplemental side impact air bags and supplemental curtain side impact air bags on the sides of the seatback of the front seats or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hands out of the windows or lean against the doors Some examples of dan gerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations e When sitting in the rear seats do not hold onto the seatback of the front seats If the supplemental side impact air bags and sup plemental curtain side impact air bags in flate you may be seriously injured Be especially careful with children who should always be properly restrained e Do not use seat covers on the front seat backs They may interfere with the supple mental side impact air bag inflations Pre tensioner seat belt system if equipped The pre tensioner seat belt system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions Working with the seat belt retractor and anchor it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants See Pre ten
248. guide model with type D E F audio unit Check if the disc or USB memory device was inserted correctly Check if the disc is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player and if there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and compressed audio files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA Cannot play data will be played Files with extensions other than MP3 mp3 or WMA wma cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the disc or USB memory device is protected by copyright Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty It takes a relatively long time before the music If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB memory device some time may be required before the music starts playing starts playing The writing software and hardware combination might n
249. have the electrical system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer Extended storage fuse switch if equipped JVC0023X For Stop Start Idling Stop System if equipped 1 Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF A caution position Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage 2 Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF rating than that specified on the fuse box cover position This could damage the electrical system or 3 Remove the fuse box cover with a suitable If any electrical equipment does not operate remove cause a fire tool the extended storage fuse switch and check for an If any electrical equipment does not operate check for 4 Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced open fuse an open fuse 5 Remove the fuse using the fuse puller 2 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself NOTE The extended storage fuse switch is used for long term vehicle storage If the extended storage fuse switch is broken it is not necessary to replace it Remove the fuse from the switch then replace only the fuse to the fuse box How to remove the extended storage fuse switch 1 To remove the extended storage fuse switch be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position 2 Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position 3 Remove the fuse box cover 4 Pinch the switch and pull it in the direction of the arrow LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Fog may temporaril
250. he ignition switch will reactivate the Idling Stop System e When the Idling Stop System is deactivated while the engine is running the engine is prevented from automatically stopping e When the Idling Stop System is deactivated after the engine has been automatically stopped by the Idling Stop System the engine will immediately restart if suitable conditions are present The engine will then be prevented from automatically stopping during the same journey e Whenever the Idling Stop System is deactivated the indicator light on the Idling Stop OFF switch illuminates In this condition the Idling Stop System cannot prevent unnecessary fuel con sumption exhaust emissions or noise during your journey STOP START SYSTEM if equipped for Europe The Stop Start System is designed to prevent unnecessary fuel consumption exhaust emissions and noise during a journey e When the vehicle comes to rest the engine is automatically stopped e The engine is then automatically restarted before you are ready to drive away A caution At the end of the journey the engine must be stopped and ignition switch be turned off Lock the vehicle as normal Turning the ignition OFF will shut down all electrical systems Failure to do this may result in a flat battery NORMAL OPERATION The Stop Start System stops the engine and will automatically restart the engine The Stop Start indicator light is shown in the meter The Stop Start Syst
251. he door is locked using the power door lock switch with all the doors closed the system will not be activated To activate the system lock the door using the power door lock switch with any of the doors open then close all the doors 4 Confirm that the security indicator light comes on The security indicator light stays on for approxi mately 30 seconds The vehicle security system is now pre armed After approximately 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase The security light begins to flash once every approximately 3 seconds If during this 30 second pre arm time period the door is unlocked with the door handle request switch the UNLOCK 4g button on the Intelligent Key the power door lock switch or the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position the system will not arm Even when the driver and or passengers are in the vehicle the system will activate with all doors locked and ignition switch in the LOCK position Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position to turn the system off Theft warning system operation The warning system will give the following alarm e The hazard indicator blinks and the horn sounds intermittently for approximately 30 seconds Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 17 e The alarm automatically turns off after approxi mately 30 seconds However the alarm reacti vates if the vehicle is tampered wi
252. he engine is running or while driving it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly and may need servicing When the charge warning light illuminates while driving stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible Stop the engine and check the alternator belt If the alternator belt is loose broken or missing the charging system needs repair See Drive belts P 8 16 If the alternator belt appears to be functioning correctly but the charge warning light remains illuminated have the charging system checked by a NISSAN dealer promptly Instruments and controls 2 13 A caution Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is loose broken or missing amp Door open warning light if equipped When the ignition switch is in the ON position the door open warning light illuminates if any of the doors are open or not closed securely PS Electric power steering warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position the electric power steering warning light illuminates After starting the engine the electric power steering warning light turns off This indicates the electric power steering system is operational If the electric power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running it may indicate the electric power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the electric power steering system checked by a NISSAN d
253. he following items and push the enter dial to confirm Bass control Use this control to enhance or attenuate the bass response sound Treble control Use this control to enhance or attenuate the treble Balance control Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume between the left and right speakers Fader control Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume between the front and rear speakers if equipped AUX VOL Auxiliary volume control Use this control to adjust the volume output from the auxiliary source Clock setting Push the serur button to enter the setup menu screen and then select Clock Turn the enter dial The mode will change as follows Set Time amp ON OFF lt gt Clock Format lt gt Set Time Set Time Select Set Time and then adjust the clock as follows The hour display will start flashing Turn the enter dial to adjust the hour and push the enter dial The minute display will start flashing Turn the enter dial to adjust the minute and push the enrer dial to finish the clock adjustment ON OFF Set the clock display to on or off when the audio unit is turned off If set in the ON position the clock will be displayed when the audio unit is turned off either by pushing the l dial or when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position C
254. he lap belt it is necessary to secure the shoulder belt in place with a locking Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 21 clip Use the locking clip attached to the child restraint system or one which is equivalent in dimension and strength Be sure to follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions for belt routing Test the child restraint system before you place the child in it Tilt it from side to side Try to tug it forward and check if it is held securely in place Make sure that the child restraint system is properly secured prior to each use Installation on rear center seat 2 point type seat belt seat belts without automatic locking mode A warnine The rear center two point type seat belt on your vehicle is not equipped with an auto matic locking mode retractor The direction of the child restraint system depends on the type of the child restraint system and the size of the child Front facing If you must install a front facing child restraint system on the rear center seat follow these steps 1 Position the front facing child restraint system on the rear center seat Always follow the child restraint system manufac turer s instructions for installation and use Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint system and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Locking clip 1 22 Safety seats seat be
255. he vehicle PREPARING TOOLS Raise the back door floor cover Your vehicle is equipped with either a spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit Carefully read the instructions provided in the appropriate section e For model with spare tire See Changing flat tire for model with spare tire P 6 3 e For model with emergency tire puncture repair kit See Repairing flat tire for model with emergency tire puncture repair kit P 6 6 CHANGING FLAT TIRE for model with spare tire Remove the jack necessary tools and the spare tire from the storage area If spacers are equipped remove them before removing the spare tire Blocking wheels Q G MCE0001A A WARNING Be sure to block the appropriate wheel to prevent the vehicle from moving which may cause personal injury Place suitable blocks 4 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire qm to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up Removing wheel cover Type A Type B Type A A WARNING Never use your hands to remove the wheel cover This may cause personal injury To remove the wheel cover use the jack rod 1 as illustrated Apply cloth between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover Type B Remove the center wheel cap as illustrated Removing tire Jack up points In case of emergency 6 3 Floor
256. he vehicle Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves refrigerators heaters etc may also generate carbon monoxide The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever Your vehicle is raised while being ser viced You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compart ment You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system under body or rear of the vehicle 5 4 Starting and driving THREE WAY CATALYST gasoline engine model A warnine The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot Keep people animals and flam mable materials away from the exhaust system components Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass wastepaper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gas in the three way catalyst is burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants A caution Do not use leaded gasoline See Recom mended fuel lubricants and capacities P 9 2 Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the ability of the three way catalyst to help reduce exhaust pollutants and or damage the three way catalyst Keep your engine tuned up Malfunctions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems may cause overrich fuel to fl
257. he wiper arms In approximately 1 minute turn the switch ON again to operate the wiper The rear window wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Wiper operation The switch position INT 1 operates the wiper intermittently The switch position ON 2 operates the wiper continuously To stop the wiper operation turn the switch to the OFF position Reverse synchronization function if equipped When the windshield wiper switch is on moving the shift lever to the R Reverse position will operate the rear window wiper Washer operation To operate the washer push the lever toward the front of the vehicle 8 until the desired amount of washer fluid is spread on the rear window The wiper will automatically operate several times DEFOGGER SWITCH if equipped Type B The rear window defogger switch operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position The defogger is used to reduce the moisture fog or frost on the rear window surface and outside door mirror surface if equipped to improve the rear view When the defogger switch 4 is pushed the indicator light illuminates and the defogger operates for approximately 15 minutes After the preset time has passed the defogger will turn off automatically To turn off the defogger manually push the defogger switch again Instruments and controls 2 39 A caution e When operating the defo
258. hen the VDC or ESP system is operating When the indicator light blinks while driving the driving condition is slippery and the vehicle s traction limit is about to be exceeded If the VDC or ESP off indicator light and slip indicator Instruments and controls 2 17 light illuminate while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate that the VDC or ESP system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system if equipped except for Europe Australia and New Zealand P 5 24 or Electronic Stability Program ESP System if equipped for Europe P 5 27 iS Speed limiter indicator light if equipped This light illuminates when the speed limiter main switch is pushed The light turns off when the main switch is pushed again When the speed limiter main switch indicator light illuminates the speed limiter system is operational See Speed limiter if equipped for Europe P 5 28 SPORT SPORT mode indicator light if equipped The SPORT mode indicator light illuminates when the SPORT mode is turned ON For the use of the SPORT mode switch see Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT P 5 14 agro Stop Start System indicator light if equipped for Europe Idling Stop System indicator light for Hong Kong
259. hich can cause skidding and loss of control Worn tires will increase this risk DRIVING IN WINTER CONDITIONS e Drive cautiously Avoid accelerating or stopping suddenly Avoid sharp turning or lane changing suddenly Avoid sudden steering Avoid following too close to the vehicle in front IGNITION SWITCH model without intelligent Key system A warnine Never remove the key or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while driving The steer ing wheel will lock This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT CON TINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position until the shift lever is moved to the P Park position When moving the ignition switch to the LOCK position to remove the key from the ignition switch make sure the shift lever is in the P Park position When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position 1 Move the shift lever to the P Park position 2 Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON direction 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition switch If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the shift lever cannot be moved from the P Park positio
260. hicle with the outside rearview mirrors folded This reduces rear view visibility and may lead to an accident Objects viewed in the outside mirror are closer than they appear if equipped The picture dimensions and distance in the outside mirrors are not real Adjusting Remote control type if equipped The outside rearview mirror remote control operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position 1 Move the switch to select the right 4 or left mirror 2 Adjust each mirror until the desired position is achieved Lever control type if equipped t NOAN SPA2772 Adjust the mirror angles with the inside lever until the desired position is achieved Manual control type if equipped Push on the mirror surface directly to adjust it to the desired position Defogging if equipped The outside rearview mirrors will be heated when the rear window defogger switch is operated Folding Remote control type if equipped SPA1732A The outside rearview mirror remote control operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position The outside rearview mirrors automatically fold when the outside rearview mirror folding switch is pushed to the CLOSE position 2 To unfold push to the OPEN position A caution e Continuously performing the fold unfold operation of the outside rearview mirror may cause the switch to stop the o
261. his will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds Then turn the ignition switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary A WARNING When the fail safe operation occurs vehicle speed may be gradually reduced The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially careful when driving If necessary pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation or have it repaired if necessary DRIVING WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION MT A warnine e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of vehicle control e Do not over rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear This may cause a loss of vehicle control or engine damage A caution e Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving This may damage the clutch system e Fully depress the clutch pedal before shift ing to help prevent transmission damage e Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into the R Reverse position e When the vehicle is stopped for a period of time for example waiting at stoplights shift to the N Neutral po
262. hone system to dial an extension number the system will send the tone associated with the selected number e Oy Use this item the transfer handset command to transfer the call from the audio system to your cellular phone To transfer the call back to hands free via the audio system select q Steering wheel switch for Bluetooth JVHO528X 1 Volume control switch 2 Phone send end button The hands free mode can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel Volume control switch The volume control switch allows you to adjust the volume of the speakers by pushing the or buttons Phone send end button The amp and a buttons can be used as follows Push the kK button to accept an incoming call Push the aj button to reject an incoming call Push the l button to end an active call Push and hold the f button to redial the last outgoing call Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 73 MEMO 4 74 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 5 Starting and driving Breaksin schedule isisisi siaura aiaeei eieaa inia Before starting engine Precautions when starting and driving Exhaust gas carbon monoxide Three way catalyst gasoline engine model Care when driving Engine cold start period Loading luggage Driving in wet conditions Driving in winter conditions Ignition switch mo
263. hree times while the buzzer sounds as follows e Push the switch once to select Amateur mode e Push the switch two times to select Normal mode e Push the switch three times to select Expert mode Each mode indicates the size of space in which parking is possible as follows e The Amateur mode indicates the largest parking space e The Normal mode indicates the medium parking space e The Expert mode indicates the smallest parking space System malfunction 15 km h CRUISE SET SYSTEM ERROR Q R JVS0032X If the SYSTEM ERROR display appears and or the ON indicator light on the parking space measurement switch blinks have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle was designed to be used to carry passengers and luggage NISSAN does not recom mend trailer towing because it places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drivetrain steering braking and other systems A caution Vehicle damage resulting from towing a trailer is not covered by the warranty ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM A warnine e Ifthe engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work The steering will be harder to operate e When the electric power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running the power assist for the steering will cease operation You will still have control of
264. ht pedal force warnine The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device It is the driver s responsibility to stay alert drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS if equipped A warnine e The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or danger ous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping distances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is responsible for safety e Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the speci fied size of tires on all four wheels When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard See Tire placard P 9 10 For detailed information see Tires and wheels P 8 42 The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the br
265. iPod touch may not respond quickly to the system in some cases Make sure that the iPod firmware is updated Operating tips e iPod Shuffle and iPod mini are not supported e Some iPod operations may not be available with this system AUX AUX button To operate the iPod use one of the following methods e Push the AUX button and then turn the enter dial for the USB item Once highlighted push the enter dial e Push the aux button repeatedly until USB is highlighted and then push the enrer dial Audio main operation Interface The interface for iPod operation shown on the audio system display is similar to the iPod interface Use the enter dial to play a track on the iPod The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen Playlists Artists Albums Tracks Genres For further information about each item see the iPod owner s manual The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of the Compact Disc CD operation For details see CD player operation P 4 46 e List view e Quick search pri i44 MIX Random play RPT Repeat track Folder browsing DISP DISP button While a track with recorded music information tags ID3 tags is being played the title of the played track is displayed If the tags are not provided then a notification message
266. ible BEFORE STARTING ENGINE A warnine The driving characteristics of your vehicle will change remarkably by any additional load and its distribution as well as by adding optional equipment trailer coupling roof racks etc Your driving style and speed must be adjusted according to the circumstances Especially when carrying heavy loads your speed must be reduced adequately Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition Measure and check the tire pressure for proper inflation Check that all windows and lights are clean Adjust the seat and head restraint positions Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirror positions e Fasten your seat belt and ask all passengers to do the same Check that all doors are closed e Check the operation of the warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position e Maintenance items in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section should be checked periodi cally PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING A warnine e Never leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle Pets should not be left alone either They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and inadvertently be come involved in a serious accident and injure themselves On hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause se vere or po
267. ice practices and differences in road characteristics and climate TRACTION AA A B AND C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance A warnine The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydro planing or peak traction characteristics TEMPERATURE A B AND C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the local regulations Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law A warnine The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading either separately or in com bination can c
268. ice when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack Nissan strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used CD player operation OBuetoott JVH0004X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Loading Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing If the radio is already playing it will automatically turn off and the CD will start playing 4 26 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system caution Do not force the CD into the slot This could damage the player After loading the CD the number of tracks and the playtime will appear on the display 8 cm 3 1 in diameter CDs can be played without using an adapter CD cD button When the CD button is pushed while the audio system is off and a CD is loaded the audio system will turn on and a CD will start playing automatically If the radio is already playing it will automatically turn off and the CD will start playing gt gt lt lt button FF Fast Forward REW Rewind Push the gt or 44 button while a CD is being played to fast forward or rewind through the track When the b
269. ied torque with a torque wrench as soon as possible Wheel nut tightening torque 108 N m 11 kg m 80 ft lb The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times It is recommended that the wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval In case of emergency 6 5 A warnine Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 1 000 km 600 miles also in cases of a flat tire etc Stowing damaged tire and tools A WARNING e Be sure that the tire jack and tools used are properly stored after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop e The temporary use spare tire is designed for emergency use only 1 Securely store the damaged tire jack and tools used in the storage area 2 Replace the spare tire cover and the floor cover 3 Close the back door REPAIRING FLAT TIRE for model with emergency tire puncture repair kit The emergency tire puncture repair kit is supplied with the vehicle instead of a spare tire This repair kit must be used for temporarily fixing a minor tire puncture After using the repair kit see a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire inspection and repair replacement A caution e NISSAN recommends using only Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire Sealant provided with your vehicle Other tire sealants may damage the valve stem seal which can cause the tire to lose air pressure 6 6 In case of emergency
270. ill be made The 4 digit PIN code is provided with the audio device see the owner s manual of the audio device 3 On Bluetooth audio cellular phone devices a Check that Bluetooth is turned on on your device b Switch to the search mode for Bluetooth devices If the search mode finds a device it will be shown on the device display Select My Car 4 50 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system c Enter the number code shown on the relevant device with the device s own keypad and push the confirmation key on the device itself Refer to the relevant Bluetooth device owner s manual for further details When the device is successfully paired a notification message will be displayed and then the audio system display will return to the current audio source display During connection the following status icons will be displayed top left of the display Signal strength au Battery status Ge and Bluetooth ON 8 If the low battery message comes on the Bluetooth device must be recharged soon The pairing procedure and operation may vary according to device type and compatibility See the owner s manual of the Bluetooth device for further details Select Device The paired device list shows which Bluetooth audio or cellular phone devices have been paired or registered with the Bluetooth audio system If the list contains devices select the app
271. imes and the inside warning chime sounds for a few seconds Type B The Intelligent Key system warning light in the meter blinks in yellow the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for a When closing the door after getting out few seconds of the vehicle z Type A The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds continuously Type B The P position selecting warning light in the meter illuminates and the outside chime sounds continuously Automatic Transmission and Continu ously Variable Transmission models When pushing the request switch or the LOCK f button on the Intelligent Key to lock the door The outside chime sounds for a few seconds and all the doors unlock 3 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments The shift lever is not in the P Park position Shift the shift lever to the P Park position The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Push the ignition switch to the OFF position The ignition switch is in the ACC position Push the ignition switch to the OFF position The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Push the ignition switch to the OFF position The ignition switch is in the ACC or Move the shift lever to the P Park OFF position and the shift lever is not in position and push the ignition switch to the P Park position the
272. impact air bag P 1 25 Audio system P 4 11 or Navigation system Rear window defogger switch P 2 39 Hazard indicator flasher switch P 6 2 Heater and air conditioner control P 4 6 Center ventilator P 4 5 24 25 26 27 282 Wiper and washer switch P 2 37 or Headlight fog light and turn signal switch P 2 33 Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio control P 4 63 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol without navigation system P 4 64 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol with navigation system 11 Meters and gauges P 2 6 12 Driver s front impact air bag Horn P 1 25 P 2 40 13 Steering wheel mounted controls right side Cruise control switches P 5 30 Speed limiter switches P 5 28 14 Headlight fog light and turn signal switch P 2 33 or Wiper and washer switch P 2 37 15 Parking space measurement switch P 5 34 16 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch P 5 24 P 5 25 or Electronic Stability Program ESP OFF switch P 5 27 17 Fuse box P 8 28 18 Glove box P 2 44 19 Power outlet P 2 43 or USB AUX connector with navigation system 20 Shift lever Automatic Transmission AT model P 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model P 5 14 Manual Transmission MT model P 5 17 21 Cup holder P 2 44 22 Push button ignition switch model with Intelli gent Key syste
273. impact air bag system Fuel Fuel filler cap Fuel filler lid Fuel gauge 8 5 8 23 Fuel octane rating Fuel recommendation on Opening fuel filler lid esesseessseeesseeesaee Recommended fuel lubricants and capacities Fuel filler cap Fuel filler lid Fusible links G Gage essiciiee cated ti eet date A Fuel gauge a Odometer w 2 8 Speedometer a 2 8 Tachometer 2 10 General maintenance 8 3 Glove box 2 44 Hazard indicator flasher switch Head restraints Headlight Headlight and turn signal switch eee 2 33 Headlights Bulb replacement 8 29 Headlight aiming contro 2 34 Headlight switch 2 33 Heated seats Heater and air conditioner High temperature warning light Hood release Idling Stop OFF switch Idling Stop System Ignition switch Key P SHON Sani aa aA A iR 5 6 Ignition switch model without intelligent Key system Ignition switch positions Indicator lights Injured persons Inside rearview mirro Installing spare tire Instrument panel Intelligent Key Intelligent Key battery Intelligent Key battery discharge Intelligent Key battery discharge indicaton 2 21 Intelligent Key system weenie 3 9 5 6 Intelligent Key system warning light we 2 14 terior ligMtS si nsin iaaa 2 46 8 31 J Jump starting K Keyan n A A a since tadesetsitucesiedsn 3 2
274. in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds The dte mode includes a low range warning feature when the fuel level is low the dte mode is automatically selected and the digits blink in order to draw the driver s attention Push the trip computer mode switch to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred When the fuel level drops even lower the dte display will change to e If the amount of fuel added is small the display just before the ignition switch is turned off may continue to be displayed e When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momenta rily change the display Instruments and controls 2 9 Resetting displays When the average fuel consumption or TRIP B is displayed push the trip computer mode switch A for longer than 3 seconds The display of average fuel consumption and trip odometer TRIP B only will be reset at the same time TACHOMETER if equipped The tachometer indicates the engine speed in revolu tions per minute rpm Do not rev the engine into the red zone 2 10 Instruments and controls FUEL GAUGE JVC0024X Type C For Type A and B The fuel gauge A indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position The gauge may move slightly during braking turning accelerating or going up and down hills due
275. ine and radiator cool down e Engine coolant is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high quality year round anti freeze coolant solution The anti freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary A caution e Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine transmission and or cooling system e When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality with the proper mixture ratio Examples of the mixture ratio are shown below Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 Outside temperature c ah omposition down to Engine Deminera C F onesna lized or dis ted tilled water 15 Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant is a pre mixed mixture ratio 50 type coolant The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage the engine cooling system The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap To prevent engine damage use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap or its equivalent when replacement is required 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL HR12DDR HR12DE and HR15DE engine model SDI
276. ing in the iPod may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off flickering Always make sure that the iPod is connected properly An iPod nano 1st Generation may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation In this case please manually reset the iPod An iPod nano 2nd Generation will continue to fast forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod nano 2nd Generation Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod The vehicle center display may momentarily black out but will soon recover If an iPod automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode the vehicle center display may momentarily black out but will soon recover Bluetooth Audio player if equipped Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be used with this system For detailed information about Bluetooth audio devices that are available for use with this system contact a NISSAN dealer Before using a Bluetooth audio system the initial registration process for the audio device is necessary Operation of the Bluetooth audio system may vary depending on the audio device that is connected Confirm the operation procedure before use The playback of Bluetooth audio will be paused under the following conditions The playback will
277. ing on the mounting surface Apply the new engine oil to the gasket of the new oil filter Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt and then tighten an additional 2 3 of turn to secure the oil filter Oil filter tightening torque 15 to 20 N m 11 to 14 ft lb Refill the engine oil See Engine oil replacement HR12DDR HR12DE and HR15DE engine mod els P 8 12 Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required Turn the engine off and wait several minutes 12 Check the engine oil level according to the proper procedure See Checking engine oil level P 8 11 Engine oil and filter replacement K9K engine model 1 Oil drain plug 2 Oil filter Place a large drain pan under the drain plug Remove the drain plug with a wrench BNE Remove the oil filler cap and completely drain the oil If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time A caution Waste oil must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations 4 Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench 5 Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand 6 Wipe the entire oil filter mounting surface with a clean cloth Be sure to remove any old gasket remaining on the mounting surface N Apply new engine oil to the gasket on the new oil filter 8 Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt and then tighte
278. ion DIESEL ENGINE 1 2 Apply the parking brake Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position The starter is designed to not operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed The Intelligent Key must be carried when operating the ignition switch Push the ignition switch to the ON position and wait until the glow plug indicator light turns off Depress the clutch pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine To start the engine immediately push and release the ignition switch while depressing the clutch pedal with the ignition switch in any position Immediately release the ignition switch when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedures If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather depress the accelerator pedal and hold it Push the ignition switch for up to 15 seconds while holding Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts A caution As soon as the engine has started release the ignition switch immediately Do not operate the starter for more than 20 seconds at a time If the engine does not start push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 20 seconds before crank ing the engine again Otherwise the starter could be damaged e If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables the instructions and cautions contained in the 6 In case of emergenc
279. ion e When unfolding the outside rearview mirror with the switch being in the AUTO position the mirror will be unfolded further by turning the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position To return its original position fold the out side rearview mirror once The outside rearview mirror remote control operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position The outside rearview mirrors automatically fold when the outside rearview mirror folding switch is pushed to the CLOSE position Q To unfold push to the AUTO position A caution Continuously performing the fold unfold opera tion of the outside rearview mirror may cause the switch to stop the operation 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments Manual control type if equipped Fold the outside rearview mirror by pushing it toward the rear of the vehicle VANITY MIRRORS if equipped To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and pull up the mirror cover PARKING BRAKE A warnine e Never drive the vehicle with the parking brake applied The brake will overheat and fail to operate and will lead to an accident e Never release the parking brake from out side the vehicle If the vehicle moves it will be impossible to push the foot brake pedal and will lead to an accident e Never use the shift lever in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully applied e Never
280. ion 2 Push the ignition switch to the OFF position 3 Open the door The ignition switch will change to the LOCK position If the ignition switch is switched to the LOCK position the shift lever cannot be moved from the P Park position The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position with the foot brake depressed STEERING LOCK The ignition switch is equipped with an anti theft steering lock device To lock steering wheel 1 Push the ignition switch to the OFF position where the ignition switch position indicator will not illuminate 2 Open or close the door The ignition switch turns to the LOCK position 3 Turn the steering wheel 1 6 of a turn to the right or left from the straight up position To unlock steering wheel Push the ignition switch and the steering wheel will be automatically unlocked A caution e Ifthe battery of the vehicle is discharged the push button ignition switch cannot be switched from the LOCK position e If the ignition switch position does not change from the LOCK position push the ignition switch again while rotating the Starting and driving 5 7 steering wheel slightly to the right and left See Vehicle information display P 2 20 IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK gt Acc gt ON tL as When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal Automa
281. ion DIMENSIONS Unit mm in 3 780 148 8 3 801 149 6 1 1 665 65 6 1 675 65 9 2 3 1 489 58 6 1 4 1 525 60 0 5 1 520 59 9 2 6 7 1 515 59 6 8 1 470 57 9 9 1 460 57 5 10 1 475 68 1 11 Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread 1 475 58 1 9 1 465 57 7 10 1 485 58 5 1 1 Wheelbase 2 435 95 9 12 2 440 96 1 13 2 450 96 5 14 1 For Micra Active for Sports version 2 For Europe for model with side molding 3 For the Middle East for model with side molding 4 For Micra Active except for Sports version 5 For the Middle East for model with Manual Transmission and without side molding 6 For South Africa and Thailand 7 For the Middle East except for model with Manual Transmission and without side molding 8 For Hong Kong 9 For 165 70R14 tire model 10 For 175 60R15 tire model 11 For 155 80R13 tire model 12 For Australia and New Zealand for 175 60R15 tire model 13 For Europe the Middle East South Africa Australia except for 175 60R15 tire model and New Zealand except for 175 60R15 tire model 14 Except for Europe the Middle East South Africa Australia and New Zealand WHEN TRAVELLING OR REGISTERING IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to travel in another country or region find out whether the fuel required for your vehicle is available in that country or region Using a low octane rated fuel may cause engine
282. ion date of the sealant shown on the label attached to the bottle Never use a sealant whose expiration date has passed Repairing tire A WARNING Observe the following precautions when using the emergency tire puncture kit e Swallowing the compound is dangerous Immediately drink as much water as possi ble and seek prompt medical assistance e Rinse well with lots of water if the com pound comes into contact with skin or eyes If irritation persists seek prompt medical attention e Keep the repair compound out of the reach of children e The emergency repair compound may cause a malfunction of the air valve Have the air valve replaced as soon as possible 1 Open the lid of the air compressor and take out the speed restriction sticker then put it in a location where the driver can see it while driving A caution Do not put the speed restriction label on the steering wheel pad the speedometer or the warning light locations Take the hose 4 and the power plug out of the air compressor Remove the cap of the bottle holder from the air compressor Remove the cap of the tire sealant bottle and screw the bottle clockwise onto the bottle holder Leave the bottle seal intact Screwing the bottle onto the bottle holder will pierce the seal of the bottle Remove the cap of the tire valve on the flat tire Remove the protective cap A of the hose and screw the hose sec
283. ions change push the overdrive switch to turn the overdrive ON The overdrive off indicator light will turn off Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the overdrive OFF This reduces fuel economy Accelerator downshift in D Drive position For passing or climbing hills depress the accelerator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed Shift lock release If the battery is discharged the shift lever may not be moved from the P Park position even with the foot brake pedal depressed To move the shift lever release the shift lock The shift lever can be moved to the N Neutral position However the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position This Starting and driving 5 13 allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged SHIFT LOCK JVS0014X Right Hand Drive RHD model To release the shift lock perform the following procedure 1 Models with Intelligent KEY system Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position Models without Intelligent KEY system Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Apply the parking brake Depress the shift lock release button Push and hold the shift lever button and move the shift lever to the N Neutral position while holding down the shif
284. ious working on the engine when the air cleaner filter is off WIPER BLADES WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES Cleaning If the windshield does not become clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blades chatter when operating the windshield wipers wax or other materials may be on the windshield and or wiper blades Clean the outside of the windshield surface with a washer solution or mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with water Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Rinse the blade with water If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wipers replace the blades Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 SDI1865 Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle This may cause improper windshield washer operation If the nozzle is clogged remove any objects with a needle or small pin Be careful not to damage the nozzle 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself Replacing Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield Push and hold the release tab and then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove Remove the wiper blade Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place caution After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position Otherwise the wiper arm or the engine hood may be scratched and may cause damage Worn wi
285. ir intake lever to the ag position 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the 4 position 3 Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the maximum hot right position 5 Turn the side ventilators to the side windows to defrost or defog for a clear view to the side mirrors Air conditioner operation if equipped The air conditioner system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month This helps prevent damage to the air conditioner system due to the lack of lubrication Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air 1 Move the air intake lever to the ay position u seon 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the 74 3 Turn the fan speed control gg dial to the desired position 4 Push the A C button on The A C indicator light will illuminate position 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the cool left position e For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high move the air intake lever to the lt gt position Be sure to move the air intake lever to the e gt position for normal cooling e A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunc tion Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
286. is can discharge the battery NOTE When the ignition switch is pushed while the Stop Start Idling Stop System if equipped is activated the ignition switch will be placed in the OFF position INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE SSD0860 If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation start the engine according to the following procedure 1 Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model Move the shift lever to the P Park or N Neutral position Manual Transmission MT model Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position 2 Firmly depress the brake pedal Automatic Trans mission Continuously Variable Transmission mod el or the clutch pedal Manual Transmission model 3 Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated A chime will sound 4 Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds The engine will start After step 3 is performed when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal the ignition switch position will change to ACC NOTE When the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position or the engine is started by the above procedures the Intel ligent Key battery discharge indicator ap pears on the Vehicle information display or the Intelligent Key sys
287. is not obvious NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly 1 8 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and when necessary replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted CHILD SAFETY A WARNING Infants and children need special protection The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hipbones In an accident an improperly fitted seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use an appropriate child restraint system Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained The proper restraint depends on the child s size Infants and small children NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be seated in a child restraint system You should choose a child restraint system that fits your vehicle and the child and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Large children A WARNING e Never allow children to stand or kneel on any seats e Never allow children in the luggage area while the vehicle is moving A child could be seriously injured in an accident or sudden stop Children who
288. isplay will blink Turn the speed limiter MAIN switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 5 30 Starting and driving CRUISE CONTROL if equipped A warnine e Always observe the posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them e Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a constant speed When driving in heavy traffic When driving in traffic that varies speed When driving in windy areas When driving on winding or hilly roads When driving on slippery rain snow ice etc roads A caution On manual Transmission MT model do not shift to the N Neutral position without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is operated Should this occur depress the clutch pedal and turn the cruise control MAIN switch off immediately Failure to do so may cause engine damage PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL e If the cruise control system malfunctions it cancels automatically The SET indicator and the cruise control indicator light will blink to warn the driver e If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high the cruise control system will be canceled automatically e If the SET indicator and cruise control indicator light blink turn off the cruise control MAIN switch and have the system checked b
289. itch 2 to change the display as follows ODO gt ODO Resetting twin trip odometer Push the reset switch for more than 1 second to reset the trip odometer to zero gt TRIP A gt TRIP B For trip computer information see Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 TRIP COMPUTER for Type A and B SIC4441 The switch for the trip computer is located on the meter panel When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the trip computer mode switch A Each time the trip computer mode switch A is pushed the display will change as follows ODO gt TRIP A gt TRIP B gt Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption gt Dis tance to empty dte Current fuel consumption 1 100 km km l or mpg The current fuel consumption mode shows the current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption 1 100 km km I or mpg The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset Reset ting is done by pushing the trip computer mode switch for longer than 1 second The display is updated every 30 seconds At about the first 500 m after a reset the display shows Distance to empty dte km or mls The distance to empty dte mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The dte is constantly being calculated based on the amount of fuel
290. ith soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations ENGINE OIL CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL HR12DDR HR12DE and HR15DE engine K9K engine Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and warm it up until the engine temperature reaches the normal operating tem perature approximately 5 minutes Stop the engine Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain back to the oil pan Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Reinsert the dipstick all the way Remove the dipstick and check the oil level It should be within the range If the oil level is below A remove the oil filler cap and pour the recommended oil into the opening Do not overfill For K9K engine model When filling the engine oil do not remove the dipstick Recheck the oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operat ing conditions A caution The oil level should be checked regularly Operating your vehicle with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER A WARNING Used oil must be disposed of properly Never pour or dump oil into the groun
291. ive pressure booster decreases when the engine hood is opened with the engine running e when the engine is turned on with the engine hood open when the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the driver s door is open when the steering wheel is operated when the Idling Stop System indicator blinks at a low speed Starting and driving 5 19 when the accelerator pedal is depressed when the shift lever is in the R Reverse position e when the fan speed control dial is in any position other than OFF 0 while the air flow control dial is in the front defogger position manual air conditioner e when the front defogger switch is on automatic air conditioner when the rear defogger switch is on when the Idling Stop OFF switch is turned on when the electric power steering warning light the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light or the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC warning light if equipped illuminates when the brake pedal is not fully depressed when stopping the vehicle on steep sloping roads when the power consumption is large when the vehicle is traveling at altitudes higher than 2000 m 6562 ft NOTE It may take some time until the Idling Stop System activates under the following conditions e when the battery is discharged e when the outside temperature is low e when the battery is replaced or the battery terminal is disconnected for extended periods and then reconnected
292. jack up point rear For the rear never jack up the vehicle at a location other than the floor jack up point that is specified A WARNING Be sure to read and follow the instructions in this section DO NOT GET UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS SUPPORTED BY A JACK Never use a jack which was not provided with your vehicle The jack which is provided with your vehicle is designed only to lift your vehicle during a tire change Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles Never jack up the vehicle at a location other than the jack up point that is specified Never lift the vehicle more than necessary Never use blocks on or under the jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack The vehicle may move suddenly and this may cause an accident 6 4 In case of emergency Never allow passengers to remain in the vehicle while the tire is off the ground Be sure to read the caution label attached to the jack body before using Jacking up vehicle Place the jack directly under the jack up point as illustrated so that the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point The jack should be placed on firm level ground Align the jack head between the two notches located at the jack up point of either the front or the rear section Fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown Loosen each wheel nut counterclockwise one or two turns with the wheel nut wrench
293. k for 2 minutes 2 Send the name via the registered cellular phone within the 2 minutes 3 Phone number is displayed Transferring all phone book entries at the same time If your cellular phone is equipped with the function you can download all the phone book entries in the cellular phone to the hands free system at the same time Action Briefly push A button Screen display Turn MENU VOL dial DOWNLOAD Push ENTER APPEND Turn MENU VOL dial OVERWRITE DOWNLOAD ING DOWNLOAD OK DOWNLOAD Push ENTER FQ sack for the menu screen NOTE e If you select APPEND downloaded entries will be saved in the available space without deleting previously saved information in the hands free system If there is not enough space the downloaded entries that exceed the space available will not be saved and MEMORY FULL appears on the display e If you select OVERWRITE the downloaded entries will be saved on top of the previously saved information The previously saved information will not be saved You can save up to 250 entries If you attempt to download more than 250 entries the remaining entries will not be saved and MEMORY FULL appears on the display Edit You can edit a name or phone number stored in the phone book Screen display a oy eer Tun weNUIVOL dat OO Pusher a eS el a a PusheNTER i Tum MENU VOL dia Push ENTER P
294. l doors by pushing the door handle request switch driver s or front passenger s A or back door request switch within the range of operation When you lock or unlock the doors the hazard indicator will flash as a confirmation 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments Locking doors 1 Push the ignition switch to the OFF position 2 Carry the Intelligent Key with you 3 Close all doors 4 Push the door handle request switch A driver s or front passenger s or the back door request switch 7 All doors and the back door will be locked a The hazard indicator flashes once 7 Operate door handles to confirm that the doors have been securely locked Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system e When the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle and you try to lock the door using the driver s inside lock knob after getting out of the vehicle all the doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed e When the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle while the driver s door is opened and you try to lock the door using the power door lock switch after getting out of the vehicle an inside warning chime will sound after the power door lock switch or the driver s inside lock knob is operated A caution The lockout protection may not function under the following
295. l the last number that was dialled 1 Briefly push the button 2 Select REDIAL 3 Push the ENTER or the E button to redial the last number Make a call from the phone book In order to dial a contact from the phone book proceed as follows 1 Push the button 2 Turn the MENU VOL dial and select the corre spondent name 3 Push the ENTER or the E button in order to dial the number Alternatively you can use the search mode as follows 1 Briefly push the J button 2 SEARCH appears on the display then push the ENTER button 3 Select the first character of the name then the ENTER button 4 The name should be displayed If necessary turn the MENU VOL dial to select the correct name 5 Push the ENTER or button in order to dial the number Calling via voice tag If your cellular phone supports voice recognition it is possible to make a call via the voice tag instead of manual selection provided the name and number of your contact has been previously marked and stored in the phone book of your cellular phone For details see the cellular phone manufacturer s owner s manual In order to dial via a voice tag proceed as follows 1 Push the amp button for more than 2 seconds 2 The display shows SPEAK NOW 3 Give your voice tag Say the voice tag clearly and normally in the direction of the microphone located in the ceiling in front of the rearview mirror 4 Ifthe voice tag is
296. l which is based on the list of missed calls 1 Push the button and select Call Lists 2 Turn the enteR dial to scroll to an item and push the enrer dial to select it 3 Scroll to the preferred phone number and then push the enter dial or push the button to dial the number Receiving a call Incoming call 12345678912 Y 12345678912 00 23 45 123 When receiving an incoming call the display will show the caller s phone number or a notification message that the caller s phone number cannot be shown Zam i e Answer the call by pushing the button briefly or push the enrer dial e End the call after the conversation by Pushing the button briefly again Pushing the enter dial when the e a symbol is highlighted If ea is not highlighted turn the enter dial to mal and push the enrer dial e Reject the call by selecting the a symbol on the screen using the enrer dial and pushing the enter dial to select it During a call During a call by scrolling and pushing the enrer dial you can select the following options e 123 Use this item to enter numbers during a call For example if directed by an automated p
297. lay BASS gt TREBLE gt FADE gt BALANCE gt BEEP ON gt CLOCK Audio setting Push the SEEK TRACK button or ia or TUNE FF REW FOLDER button gt gt or lt lt to adjust while the following audio setting is displayed Bass to decrease to increase TREBLE to decrease to increase FADE F to front fade R to rear fade BALANCE R to right balance L to left balance Once the audio settings are set to the desired level push the menu button until the radio or CD display appears If no action is performed for approximately 5 seconds the audio settings mode will automatically return to the normal mode Beep setting To turn the beep sound off or on push the SEEK TRACK button i or lt or TUNE FF REW FOLDER button gt or 44 until the desired mode is displayed This turns on or off the beep sound when audio buttons are pushed Clock setting To display the clock on the screen push the SEEK TRACK button i or a or TUNE FF REW FOLDER button gt gt or lt to select CLOCK ON 1 Turn the clock display on 2 Push the mew button while CLOCK ON is on the display The hour and minute digits blink 3 To adjust the hours push the SEEK TRACK button gt gt I or 144 4 To adjust the minutes push the TUNE FF REW FOLDER button gt gt or lt lt
298. ld lock and restrict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check contact a NISSAN dealer immedi ately Rear center seat belt if equipped SSS0391 The rear center seat belt has a connector tongue 4 and a seat belt tongue 2 Both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely latched for proper seat belt operation SSS0241 e Always fasten the connector tongue and the seat belt in the order shown e Always make sure both the connector ton gue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt Do not use it with only the seat belt tongue attached This 2 Retract the seat belt and store the seat belt could result in serious personal injury in tongue and connector tongue on the stowed case of an accident or a sudden stop position A warnine e Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat e When returning the seatback be sure to attach the rear center seat belt connector JVROO03X Stowing rear center seat belt When folding down the rear seat the rear center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position 1 Hold the connector tongue 4 so that the seat belt does not retract suddenly when the tongue is released from the connector buckle Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool such as key 2 into the connector buckle JVROOO04X Safety seats seat belts and suppl
299. le Dynamic Control VDC system sensors detect these move ments and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability e When the VDC system is operating the SLIP indicator in the instrument panel blinks e f the SLIP indicator blinks the road conditions are slippery Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions Be sure to drive carefully See Slip indicator light if equipped except for Australia and New Zealand P 2 17 and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light P 2 18 e Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the system the SLIP and VDC OFF indicator lights illuminate in the instrument panel As long as these indicators are illuminated the VDC system function is canceled The VDC system uses a Brake Limited Slip Differential BLSD function to improve vehicle traction The BLSD system works when one of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery surface The BLSD system brakes the spinning wheel which distributes the driving power to the other drive wheel If the vehicle is operated with the VDC OFF switch pushed and the VDC system turned off all VDC systems will be turned off The BLSD system will still operate with the VDC system off If the BLSD system is activated the SLIP indicator light will blink and you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the foot brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication
300. le for forward facing FWF universal category child restraint system approved for this group IL Suitable for the particular ISOFIX category child restraint systems CRS provided in the following table These ISOFIX CRS are those of the specific vehicle restricted or semi universal categories 1 16 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system List of approved child restraints A WARNING Weight group Name of CRS _ Fixture of CRS Category In vehicles equipped with a side air bag system 0 to 18 kg ISO R3 support e do not let any infants or small children sit in the c Fair GO 1S frame type A Rear facing Semi Universal front passenger s seat as the air bag may cause 3 serious injury in case of deployment during a aa kg Oo cies pera Front facing Universal collision Front facing from 2 years only with headrest NOTE Child restraints approved to ECE Regulation NO 44 04 are clearly marked with the categories such as Universal Semi universal or ISOFIX ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with ISOFIX child restraint systems ISOFIX lower anchor point locations The ISOFIX anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the ISOFIX anchors ISOFIX label location Safety seats seat belts
301. le the audio system is on PHONE SETUP is displayed 4 58 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 2 Turn the VOLUME control knob until CLOCK appears on the display 3 Push the ENTER button CLOCK OFF or CLOCK ON is displayed 4 To turn on the clock display turn the VOLUME control knob till CLOCK ON is displayed To turn off the clock display turn the VOLUME control knob till CLOCK OFF is displayed and push ENTER Clock adjustment To adjust the time of the clock perform the following operations 1 Push the ENTER button while CLOCK ON is displayed The hour display will flash Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust the hour 4 Push the ENTER button The minute display will flash 5 Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust the minute 6 Push the ENTER button to complete the clock adjustment AUX AUX button The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape player CD player MP3 player or laptop computer Push the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used CD changer operation
302. leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle They could unknowingly release the parking brake and inadvertently become involved in a serious accident LEVER TYPE To apply the parking brake pull the parking brake lever up 4 To release the parking brake firmly depress and hold the foot brake pedal Pull up the parking brake lever slightly push the button 2 and lower the lever completely Before driving be sure that the brake warning light has turned off Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 MEMO 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments 4 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Safety precautions 4 2 Rearview monitor if equipped 4 2 How to read displayed lines 4 2 na 4 3 wee 4 4 wee 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 6 4 6 4 7 we 4 9 4 10 Difference between predictive and actual distances Mirror display operation Operating tips Ventilators Side ventilators Center ventilators Heater and air conditioner if equipped Operating tips for automatic air conditioner Manual air conditioner Automatic air conditioner Servicing air conditioner Audio system if equipped Audio operation precautions Antenna if equipped FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player Type A 4 20 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player Type B 4 24 FM AM radio with Compact
303. led wash it off with plenty of water immediately Check the fluid level in the reservoir If the brake fluid is below the MIN line the brake warning light will illuminate Add brake fluid up to the MAX line For recommended types of brake fluid see Recom mended fuel lubricants and capacities P 9 2 If the brake fluid must be added frequently the brake Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 system should be thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself CLUTCH FLUID if equipped A warnine e Use only new fluid from a sealed container Old inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the clutch system e Clean the filler cap before removing e Clutch fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children A caution Do not spill the clutch fluid on painted surfaces This will damage the paint If clutch fluid is spilled wash it off with plenty of water immedi ately Check the fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid is below the MIN line add fluid up to the MAX line For recommended types of fluid see Recommended fuel lubricants and capacities P 9 2 If the fluid must be added frequently the clutch system should be thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID ATF if equipped Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or replacement is required A caution
304. lement weather may affect the function of the sonar parking sensor system this may include reduced perfor mance or a false activation e This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects e The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground e If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing 5 34 Starting and driving inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms A caution Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the tone clearly When the ignition switch is in the ON position the sonar parking sensor system is operational The sonar parking sensor system sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the bumper The parking sensor indicator will also appear in the vehicle information display See Parking Sensor Indicator P 5 34 The system detects rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R Reverse position The system may not detect objects at speeds above 10 km h 6 MPH and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The sonar parking sensor system detects obstacles up to 1 m 3 3 ft from the bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of
305. lia New Zealand Singapore AT model and Indonesia AT model 5 For Hong Kong 6 For Pakistan and Ukraine 7 For South Africa 8 For India CVT model 9 6 Technical information 9 Except for Thailand Singapore MT model Indonesia MT model Brunei India Australia New Zealand Europe Hong Kong Pakistan Ukraine and South Africa 10 Gulf Standard regulation requires automobile manufacturers to indicate the maximum vehicle speed for applicable models The maximum vehicle speed listed above is the measured speed under certain testing conditions The actual value may differ according to the vehicle usage and road and environmental conditions NISSAN recommends you to ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions Technical information 9 7 TIRES AND WHEELS Standard Spare 1 Tire size 155 80 R13 79S 155 80 R13 79S 165 70 R14 81S 165 70 R14 81S T115 70 D14 88M T105 70 D14 83M 175 60 R15 81H 165 70 R14 81S 175 60 R15 81H T115 70 D14 88M Size Offset mm in Road wheel Steel 13 X 4 1 2B 40 1 57 14X 4T 40 1 57 14 X 5 1 2 45 1 77 15X 5 1 2J 50 1 97 Aluminum alloy wheel 15X 5 1 2 50 1 97 1 The tire puncture repair kit is supplied for Europe if equipped For India Tires amp tubes fitted in the vehicle as per clause 3 c amp 3 e meet the requirement of BIS and comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicle Rules CMVR 1989 9 8 Technical informat
306. ll be displayed e An error notification message will be dis played when an incompatible disc is in serted e g DVD or if the player cannot read the CD Eject the disc and insert another disc List view While the track is being played push either the enter dial or the button to display the available tracks in a listed view mode Turn the enter dial to select a track from the list or a track to start listening to and then push the enter dial Quick search In the list view mode a quick search can be performed to find a track from the list Push the A Z button turn the enter dial to the first alphabetic letter of the song title and then push the enter dial When found a list of the available songs will be displayed Select a song and then push the enter dial to start playback CD cD button When the CD button is pushed while the audio system is turned off and a CD is loaded the audio system will turn on and a CD will start playing automatically If the radio or AUX source mode is already playing it will automatically turn off and the CD will start playing However if a CD is not loaded then a notification message will be displayed and the audio unit will remain in the radio or AUX source mode Pri lt lt Fast Forward Rewind buttons Push an
307. located at the instrument panel above the glove box The supplemental front impact air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact It may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper supplemental front impact air bag system operation Front passenger air bag status light if equipped The front passenger air bag status light is located on the meter When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the front passenger air bag status light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or 1 30 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system remains on depending on the front passenger air bag status e When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the front passenger air bag is active the front passenger air bag status light will turn off after approximately 7 seconds e When the front passenger air bag is turned off with the front passenger air bag switch the front passenger air bag status light will illuminate and remain on as long as the front passenger air bag switch is in the OFF position If the front passenger air bag status light operates in a way other than described above the front passenger air bag may not function properly Have the syste
308. lock Format Switch the clock display between 24 hour and 12 hour clock mode Language setting Push the serup button to enter the setup menu screen then select Language Select the appropriate language and push the enter dial Upon completion the screen will automatically adopt the language setting Scroll direction Set the scrolling behavior of the dial to scroll UP or DOWN 58 Day Night button Push the 3 button to switch the display brightness between the daytime and nighttime modes Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 39 AUX AUX button Push the Aux button to play a compatible device when it is connected CD player operation TUNE MENU 500006 coer JVHO507X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Loading Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing After loading the CD the number of tracks and the playtime will appear on the display A caution Do not force the CD into the slot This could damage the player NOTE e The CD player accepts normal audio CDs or CDs containing MP3 WMA files e The audio unit will automatically detect if a CD containing MP3 WMA files is inserted and MP3CD wi
309. lock mode from one to another see Using remote keyless entry system P 3 8 Automatic relock All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the request switch while the doors are locked e Opening any doors e Pushing the ignition switch If during the preset time period the UNLOCK gQ button on the Intelligent Key is pushed all doors will be locked automatically after the next preset time BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM When all the following conditions are met for a period of time the battery saver system will cut off the power supply to prevent battery discharge e The ignition switch is in the ACC position and e All doors are closed and e The shift lever is in the P Park position Automatic transmission Continuously Variable Transmission model WARNING AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS The Intelligent Key system is equipped with a function that is designed to minimize improper operations of the Intelligent Key and to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen Type A model with vehicle information dis play The warning buzzer sounds and the warning display appears on the dot matrix display in the vehicle information display when improper operations are detected See the troubleshooting guide on the next page For warning and indicators on the vehicle information display see Vehicle information display P 2 20 A cau
310. lts and supplemental restraint system To prevent slack in the lap belt it is necessary to secure the lap belt in place with a locking clip Use the locking clip attached to the child restraint system or one which is equivalent in dimensions and strength Be sure to follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions for belt routing Test the child restraint system before you place the child in it Tilt it from side to side Try to tug it forward and check if it is held securely in place Make sure that the child restraint system is properly secured prior to each use Rear facing If you must install a rear facing child restraint system on the rear center seat follow these steps 1 Position the rear facing child restraint system on the rear center seat Always follow the child restraint system manufac turer s instructions for installation and use Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint system and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Locking clip To prevent slack in the lap belt it is necessary to secure the lap belt in place with a locking clip Use the locking clip attached to the child restraint system or one which is equivalent in dimensions and strength Be sure to follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions for belt routing Test the child restraint system before you place the child in it Tilt it from side to sid
311. luid MTF HQ Multi 75W 85 or Manual Transmission MT gear oil 7 equivalent 8 Brake and clutch fluid 9 Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 or DOT4 10 9 2 Technical information Multi purpose grease NLGI No 2 Lithium soap base Air conditioner system refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a Air conditioner system lubricants NISSAN A C System Oil Type R or equivalent be The approximate capacities listed are for refilling during an engine oil change For additional information see Changing engine oil and oil filter P 8 1 1 2 For additional information see Recommended SAE viscosity number P 9 4 3 NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester oil available at a NISSAN dealer Genuine NISSAN Ester oil is the best choice for optimum fuel economy 4 Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality in order to avoid possible aluminum corrosion within the engine cooling system caused by the use of non genuine engine coolant Note that any repairs for the incidents within the engine cooling system while using non genuine engine coolant may not be covered by the warranty even if such incidents occurred during the warranty period B Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the warranty 6 Use
312. ly Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check the aim of the headlights Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips Adjust the pressure in all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire rotation In the case that Two Wheel Drive 2WD and front amp rear tires are same size Tires should be rotated every 10 000 km 6 000 miles Tires marked with directional indicators can only be rotated between front and rear Make sure that the directional indicators point in the direction of wheel rotation after the tire rotation is completed In the case that Four Wheel Drive 4WD and front amp rear tires are same size Tires should be rotated every 5 000 km 3 000 miles Tires marked with directional indicators can only be rotated between front and rear Make sure that the directional indicators point in the direction of wheel rotation after the tire rotation is completed In the case that front tires are different size from rear tires Tires cannot be rotated However the timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and the road surface conditions Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS trans mitte
313. m P 5 6 23 Tilting steering wheel lock lever P 3 21 24 Ignition switch model without Intelligent Key system steering lock P 5 5 25 Stop Start System OFF switch P 5 23 26 Hood lock release handle P 3 19 27 Fuel filler lid release handle P 3 20 28 Outside rearview mirror control switch P 3 22 29 Headlight aiming control switch P 2 34 if equipped Refer to the separate NISSAN Connect Owner s Manual if equipped Illustrated table of contents 0 9 RIGHT HAND DRIVE RHD MODEL Type B ON OOP ON 0 10 Example Side ventilator P 4 5 Upper instrument box P 2 44 Passenger s front impact air bag P 1 25 Audio system P 4 11 or Navigation system Rear window defogger switch P 2 39 Hazard indicator flasher switch P 6 2 Heater and air conditioner control P 4 6 Center ventilator P 4 5 Illustrated table of contents 11 12 1314 15 23 24 25 26 27 28 JVI0170X Wiper and washer switch P 2 37 Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio control P 4 63 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol without navigation system P 4 64 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol with navigation system Meters and gauges P 2 6 12 Driver s front impact air bag Horn P 1 25 P 2 40 13 Steering wheel mounted controls right side Cruise control switches P 5 30 Speed limiter switches P 5 28 1
314. m checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly Front passenger air bag switch if equipped SSS1031 The front passenger air bag can be turned off with the front passenger air bag switch A located inside of the glove box To turn off the front passenger air bag 1 Place the ignition switch in the OFF position 2 Open the glove box and insert the key into the front passenger air bag switch For Intelligent Key equipped models see Keys P 3 2 3 Push and turn the key to the OFF position Place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light will illuminate and remain on To turn on the front passenger air bag 1 Place the ignition switch in the OFF position 2 Open the glove box and insert the key into the front passenger air bag switch 3 Push and turn the key to the ON position 4 Place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light will illuminate then turn off Supplemental side impact air bag system if equipped Z F 7 z FP a The supplemental side impact air bag is located at the outside of the front seats seatbacks The supplemental side impact air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact It may not infla
315. me comes You can adjust the date of the message See Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 3 Wedding anniversary message This indicator appears when the set time comes You can adjust the date of the message See Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE JVIO131X Type A 1 Engine oil replacement indicator This indicator appears when the set time comes for changing the engine oil You can set or reset the distance for changing the engine oil See Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 2 Oil filter replacement indicator This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing the oil filter You can set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter See Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 3 Tire replacement indicator This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing tires You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires See Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 4 OTHER 494th indicator This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing items other than the engine oil oil filter and tires You can set or reset the distance for replacing the items See Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 Instruments and controls 2 25 INDICATORS FOR STOP START SYSTEM if equipped for Europe STOP START STOP START SYSTEM FAULT STOP START NOT AVAILABLE STOP START OFF JVIO267X
316. meter illuminates if equipped Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 23 Move the seat to the rearmost position Adjust the head restraint to its highest position Position the front facing child restraint system on the front passenger s seat It should be placed in the front facing direction only Always follow the child restraint system manufac turer s instructions for installation and use Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint system and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Locking clip To prevent slack in the lap belt it is necessary to secure the shoulder belt in place with a locking clip A Use the locking clip attached to the child restraint system or one which is equivalent in dimensions and strength Be sure to follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions for belt routing Slide the seat forward so that the seat belt fully tightens the child restraint system Test the child restraint system before you place the child in it Tilt it from side to side Try to tug it forward and check if it is held securely in place Make sure that the child restraint system is properly secured prior to each use 1 24 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS if equipped PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RE STRAINT SYSTEM SRS This Supplemental Restraint System S
317. minate e The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion Under certain driving conditions the VDC system helps to perform the following functions e Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle e Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed traction control function e Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions understeer vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input oversteer vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations When the VDC system operates the VDC warning light inthe instrument panel flashes so note the following e The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help the vehicle on the steered path 5 26 Starting and driving e You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working p
318. ming any parts replacement or repairs Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Always turn off the engine and wait until it cools down If you must work with the engine running keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehi cle If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported by a jack Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition switch is in the ON position On gasoline engine models with the Multi port Fuel Injection MFI system the fuel filter and fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is turned off Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan It may come on at any time without warning even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan e Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle e Never leave the engine
319. mission CVT model Move the shift lever to the P Park position Manual Transmission MT model Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position DO NOT STOP THE ENGINE Open all windows Turn off the air conditioner Set the temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to maximum speed Get out from the vehicle 8 Visually inspect and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding 9 Open the engine hood 10 Visually inspect if the cooling fan is running 11 Visually inspect the radiator and radiator hoses for leakage If the cooling fan is not running or the coolant is leaking stop the engine 12 After the engine cools down check the coolant level in the reservoir with the engine running Do not open the radiator cap 13 Add coolant to the reservoir if necessary Have your vehicle inspected repaired at a NISSAN dealer TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends that you have professional road assis tance personnel tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the professional road assistant carefully read the following precautions TOWING PRECAUTIONS e Be sure that the transmission steering system an
320. mmediately returns to the previous source REG Regional mode Some local radio stations are linked together according to their region because they only offer limited coverage due to their limited number of transmitters If the signal from one station be comes weak while you are driving around RDS mode will switch to another local station in the region with a stronger signal When the REG mode is activated in the FM band and the radio receiver is tuned to a local radio station it will keep receiving this radio station without switching to another local station For activation or deactivation details see Audio main operation P 4 25 4 28 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Traffic Announcement TA The on The TA function operates in the FM and CD modes The TA mode is turned on or off when the TA NEWS button is pushed for less than 2 seconds The TA mode operates regardless of whether the AF mode is on or off TA ON is displayed when the TA mode is turned on and the TA indicator turns on TA OFF is displayed when the TA mode is turned off and the TA indicator turns off following function operates when the TA mode is Traffic announcement interrupt function When a traffic announcement is received the announcement is tuned in and the volume increases to the set level Once the traffic announcement is finished the unit returns to the source which was set before the traffic annou
321. mpact air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel Always use the seat belts 1 26 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING e Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of danger ous riding positions are shown in the illustrations e Children may be severely injured or killed when the air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained e Never install a rear facing child restraint system in the front seat An inflating supple mental front impact air bag could seriously injure or kill your child See Child re straints P 1 13 SSSO059A Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 27 A warnine e The supplemental side impact air bags and supplemental curtain side impact air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact rear impact rollover or lower severity side collision Always wear the seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in accidents e The seat belts and the supplemental side impact air bags and supplemental curtain side impact air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The supplemental side impact air bags and supplemental curtain side impact air ba
322. n Allow more stopping distance in cold weath er driving Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement Keep at a greater distance from the vehicle in front of you on slippery roads Wet ice 0 C 32 F and freezing rain very cold snow and ice can be slick and very difficult to drive on The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these condi tions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded Watch for slippery spots glaring ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reaching it Try not to brake while actually on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers Do not use cruise control on slippery roads Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gas under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maximum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery P 8 24 ENGINE COOLANT If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle For details see Changing engine coolant P 8 10 TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 If you have snow tires installed on the front rear wheels of your vehicle they should be o
323. n The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position with the foot brake pedal depressed The OFF position is between the LOCK and ACC positions although it is not marked on the ignition switch MANUAL TRANSMISSION MT Starting and driving 5 5 Type B The ignition switch includes a device that helps prevent accidental removal of the key while driving The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position Type B To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position from the ACC or ON position turn the key to the OFF position push the key in then turn the key to the LOCK position The OFF position is between the LOCK and ACC positions although it is not labeled on the ignition switch STEERING LOCK To lock steering wheel 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 2 Remove the key 3 Turn the steering wheel 1 6 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position 5 6 Starting and driving To unlock steering wheel 1 Insert the key into the ignition switch 2 Gently turn the ignition switch while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left KEY POSITIONS LOCK 0 The ignition key can only be removed at this position The steering lock can only be locked at this position OFF 1 The engine is turned off with the steering wheel unlocked ACC 2 The
324. n to select CLOCK ON Clock adjustment To adjust the clock turn the clock display on and perform the following operations 1 Push the menu button while CLOCK ON is on the display The hour and minute digits blink 2 To adjust the hours push the SEEK TRACK button A or W 3 To adjust the minutes push the TUNE FF REW FOLDER button A or W A oryg or Ac V 4 30 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system If no user input is detected for 10 seconds or when the MENU button is pushed the clock setting mode will automatically return to the normal mode MUTE button Press the button to mute the sound Press again to restore the sound AUX AUX button The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape CD player MP3 player or laptop computers Push the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used CD player operation JVHO201X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position
325. n an additional 3 4 of a turn to secure the filter Oil filter tightening torque 16 to 20 N m 1 6 to 2 0 kg m 12 to 15 ft Ib 9 Clean and reinstall the drain plug and new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 16 to 24 N m 1 6 to 2 4 kg m 12 to 18 ft Ib 10 Refill the recommended engine oil and quantity See Recommended fuel lubricants and capaci ties P 9 2 11 Securely install the oil filler cap 12 Start the engine 13 Check the drain plug and the oil filter for any sign of leakage 14 Dispose of the used oil in the proper manner Check your local regulations 15 Check the engine oil level according to the proper procedure See Checking engine oil level P 8 11 After operation 1 Install the engine undercover if removed into position as the following steps a Pull the center of each plastic clip out b Hold the engine undercover into position c Insert the clips through the undercover into the hole in the frame then push the center of the clips in to lock the clips in place d Screw in the bolts then tighten them 2 Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground PROTECT ENVIRONMENT It is illegal to pollute drains watercourses and soil Use authorized waste collection facilities including civil amenity sites and garages providing facilities for disposal of used oil and used oil filters If in doubt
326. n or ENTER button to select the mode BASS TREBLE gt BALANCE gt FADER gt EQ gt BASS To adjust each audio setting turn the VOL control dial clockwise or counterclockwise BASS to decrease to increase TREB LE to decrease to increase BAL ANCE R to right balance L to left balance FADE R F to front fade R to rear fade EQ Equalizer Use this control to change the preset sound mode for CD play Turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counterclock wise The mode will change as follows OFF lt gt ENHANCE If the audio settings mode is unchanged for approxi mately 8 seconds the audio settings mode will automatically return to the normal mode MENU MENU button To configure the SPEED volume and BEEP settings perform the following procedure 1 Push the MENU button 2 Turn the VOLUME dial clockwise or counter clockwise The display message will change as follows PHONE SETUP lt SPEED VOL amp CLOCK BEEP lt PHONE SETUP e When SPEED VOL appears on the display briefly push on the ENTER button then turn the VOLUME dial clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the level of the volume Adjusting the setting to O zero turns off the speed volume feature Increasing the speed volume setting results in the audio volume increasing more rapidly with vehicle speed Push the ENTER button again to save the setting e When BEEP appears o
327. n or similar object This may result in damage to the seat heater e Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth e When cleaning the seat never use gasoline thinner or any similar materials e If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 REAR SEATS Adjustment A warnine Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold down position Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats Properly secure all luggage to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place lug gage higher than the seatbacks When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop Folding Type A Store the seat belts in the proper position See Three point type seat belts P 1 9 Pull the knob to fold the seatback down Passing the seat belt through the path if equipped aN JVROOO6X A caution Fold down the rear seatback with the rear
328. n push the dial Audio main operation Interface The interface for iPod operation shown on the audio system display is similar to the iPod interface Use the ENTER dial to play a track on the iPod The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen Playlists Artists Albums Tracks Genres For further information about each item see the iPod owner s manual The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of Compact Disc CD operation For details see CD player operation P 4 40 List view Quick search pri 144 MIX Random play RPT Repeat track Folder browsing DISP DISP button While a track with recorded music information tags ID3 tags is being played the title of the played track is displayed If the tags are not provided then a notification message is displayed When the se button is pushed repeatedly further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows Track time Artist gt Album Folder name Track time Track details By pushing and holding the se button the display will show a detailed overview and after a few seconds it will return to the main display Push the pise button briefly to return to the main display immediately Radio Broadcast data system RBDS The RBDS is a system through which encoded digital i
329. n switch model without Intelligent Key system steering lock 24 Push button ignition switch model with Intelli gent Key system 25 Cup holder 26 Shift lever Automatic Transmission AT model Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model Manual Transmission MT model 27 Power outlet or USB AUX connector with navigation system 28 Glove box if equipped Refer to the separate NISSAN Connect Owner s Manual if equipped RIGHT HAND DRIVE RHD MODEL Type A Example Side ventilator Upper instrument box Passenger s front impact air bag Audio system or Navigation system Rear window defogger switch Hazard indicator flasher switch Heater and air conditioner control Center ventilator ONO OB ON es 24 25 26 27 282 Wiper and washer switch or Headlight fog light and turn signal switch Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio control Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol without navigation system Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol with navigation system 11 Meters and gauges 12 Driver s front impact air bag Horn 13 Steering wheel mounted controls right side Cruise control switches Speed limiter switches 14 Headlight fog light and turn signal switch or Wiper and washer switch 15 Parking space measurement switch 16 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch or Electronic Sta
330. n switch is in the ON position the seat belt warning light illuminates The light will continue to illuminate until the front seat belt is fastened See Seat belts P 1 7 When the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km h 10 MPH the light will blink and the chime will sound unless the front seat belt is securely fastened The chime will continue to sound for about 90 seconds until the seat belt is fastened 7 Small light indicator warning The small light indicator warning illuminates when the front clearance lights instrument panel lights rear combination lights and license plate lights are on The indicator warning turns off when the FOOZ is turned off Instruments and controls 2 23 8 Setting menu operation warning The warning appears when you try to operate the setting menu while driving The setting menu can only be entered if the vehicle is stationary 2 24 Instruments and controls INDICATORS FOR BIRTHDAY AND ANNIVERSARY Ww Ww HEABHOTES KA v Ees 00004 00H00 0000005008 JVIO192X WEDDING HAPPY BIRTHDAY ANNIVERSARY ANNIVERSARY 00 00 0000 00 00 0000 00 00 0000 2 JVIO191X Type B 1 Birthday message This indicator appears when the set time comes You can adjust the date of the message See Trip computer for Type C P 2 26 2 Anniversary message This indicator appears when the set ti
331. n the display briefly push the ENTER button and then turn the VOLUME dial clockwise or counterclockwise to switch the beep sound on or off Push the ENTER button again to save the setting To configure Alternative Frequency Regional and Language settings perform the following procedure 1 Push and hold the MENU button for at least 1 5 seconds 2 Turn the VOLUME dial clockwise or counter clockwise The display message will change as follows AF amp REG amp LANGUAGE amp AF e To activate or deactivate the AF and REG mode briefly push on the ENTER button when AF or REG appears on the display and turn the VOLUME dial clockwise or counterclockwise to switch between the off or on position After selection push the ENTER button to confirm the settings When the AF mode is enabled the audio unit will automatically re tune to a stronger fre quency if the radio signal becomes weak When the REG mode is enabled the audio unit will maintain and hold the station which is broadcasting local regional programmes e To change the display language briefly push the ENTER button when LANGUAGE appears on the display then turn the VOLUME dial clockwise or counterclockwise to select the appropriate lan guage setting ENGLISH lt DUTCH lt FRENCH amp SPANISH lt gt GERMAN amp ITALIAN lt PORTUGUESE lt ENGLISH After selecting the desired language push the Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio syst
332. ncement started and the volume returns to the previous level For EON stations the radio is interrupted by another EON station with traffic announcements The traffic announcement interrupt mode is cancelled if the TA NEWS button is pushed during a traffic announcement The TA mode returns to the standby mode and the audio unit returns to the previous source News mode When the NEWS button or the TA NEWS button is pushed for longer than 2 seconds in the FM mode the news function is activated NEWS is displayed for 3 seconds and the NEWS indicator appears on the display When the news function is activated the radio receives a news code from the FM broadcasting news station and the play mode will be interrupted Once the news broadcast is finished the unit returns to the previous mode In some countries or regions this service is not available or the signal is too weak to be received 1 News standby mode e The news standby mode can be activated in the FM or CD mode e A news interruption will be announced and NEWS will be displayed when the radio detects the news code from the tuned station or EON stations The display will then change to the PS name of the interrupting station e When pushing the NEWS button or pushing the TA NEWS button for longer than 2 seconds the news standby mode is turned off and the indicator disappears from the display 2 News interruption mode e When the NEWS button or the TA
333. nction when using a USB device note the following precautions Do not bend the cable excessively 40 mm 1 6 in radius minimum Do not twist the cable excessively more than 180 degrees Do not pull or drop the cable Do not hit or press the USB port or USB device with hands feet or objects Do not store objects with sharp edges in the storage area where the cable is stored Do not leave the USB device and attached devices in the vehicle compart ment When not in use for extended periods of time store the cable and USB device in a clean dust free environment at room temperature and without direct sun exposure Do not use the cable for any other purposes than its intended use in the vehicle The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary This system cannot be used to format USB devices To 4 12 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system format a USB device use a personal computer In some states area the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons even when the vehicle is parked This system supports various USB memory devices USB hard drives and iPod players if equipped Some USB devices may not be supported by this system e Partitioned USB devices may not be played correctly e Some characters used in other languages Chi nese Japanese etc are not displa
334. nd ESP OFF indicator lights illuminate in the instrument panel As long as these indicators are illuminated the ESP system function is canceled The ESP system uses a Brake Limited Slip Differential BLSD function to improve vehicle traction The BLSD system works when one of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery surface The BLSD system brakes the spinning wheel which distributes the driving power to the other drive wheel If the vehicle is operated with the ESP system turned off all ESP system functions will be turned off The BLSD system and ABS will still operate with the ESP system off If the BLSD system is activated the SLIP indicator light will blink and you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction While the ESP system is operating you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or feel a vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the ESP system is working properly The ESP system computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed forward or backward When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the foot brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM ESP OFF SWITCH JVS0022X The vehicle should be driven wi
335. nd in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and or wash away road salt REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps maintain a new vehicle appearance After waxing polishing is recommended to remove built up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the appropriate waxing products A caution e Wash your vehicle thoroughly and comple tely before applying wax to the paint surface e Always follow the manufacturer s instruc tions supplied with the wax e Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in the winter it is necessary to clean the vehicle s underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the
336. nds before cranking the engine again Otherwise the starter could be damaged Starting and driving 5 9 If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables the instructions and cautions contained in the 6 In case of emergency section should be carefully followed Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting the engine to warm up Drive at moderate speeds for a short distance first especially in cold weather A caution Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is warming up 5 10 Starting and driving STARTING ENGINE model with Intelligent Key system GASOLINE ENGINE 1 2 Apply the parking brake Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model Move the shift lever to the P Park or the N Neutral position The starter is designed to operate only when the shift lever is in the proper position Manual Transmission MT model Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position The starter is designed to not operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed The Intelligent Key must be carried when operating the ignition switch Push the ignition switch to the ON position Depress the brake pedal AT CVT model or the clutch pedal MT model and push the ignition switch to start the engine To start the engine immediately push and release the ignition switch while depressing the b
337. ndshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE if equipped Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or replacement is required WINDOW WASHER FLUID JVM0023X Type B A WARNING Anti freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children Type A Check the fluid level in the window washer reservoir If the fluid level is low add window washer fluid up to the MAX level Type B To check the fluid level use your finger to plug the center hole Q of the cap tube assembly then remove it from the reservoir If there is no fluid in the tube add fluid Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer anti freeze Follow the manufacturer s instructions for the Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 BATT ERY VEHICLE BATTERY Caution symbols for battery No smoking No exposed flames No sparks A WARNING Never smoke around battery Never expose battery to open flames or electrical sparks Shield eyes Keep away from children Handle the battery cautiously Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid Never allow children to handle battery Keep the battery out of the reach of children Battery acid A Note operating instructions Explosive gas Do not allow battery fluid to contact your
338. nformation is transmitted by FM radio stations in addition to the normal FM radio broadcasting The RBDS provides information services such as station name traffic information and news NOTE In some countries or regions some of these services may not be available RBDS functions Programme Service PS function station name display function When an RBDS station is tuned in with seek or manual tuning the RBDS data is received and the PS name is displayed Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 43 FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER Type F 1 Day Night button 9 2 FM AM band select button 10 3 RPT button 11 4 MIX button 12 5 Radio memory buttons 13 6 A Z button 14 7 AUX button 15 8 CD eject button 16 JVHO508X CD button Power VOL dial Rewind button Fast Forward button DISP button SETUP button Back button TUNE MENU ENTER dial 4 44 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 17 Phone button Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position l Power vOL dial Power ON OFF To turn on the audio system push the t dial e The system will turn on in the mode which was used immediately before the system was turned off e Ifa CD is inserted or a USB and or an AUX device is connected when the system is turned off and if
339. ng auto wiper system 2 38 Rear window wiper and washer switch 2 38 Rear window wiper blade 8 22 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 37 Wiper and washer switch Wiper blades 10 6 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL Gasoline engine model with three way catalyst A caution Do not use leaded gasoline Using leaded gaso line will damage the three way catalyst Except for Europe Ukraine Sri Lanka and Thailand Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 RON For Europe Ukraine and Sri Lanka Use UNLEADED PREMIUM gasoline with an octane rating of at least 95 RON If unleaded premium gasoline is not used UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 RON may be used at slightly reduced performance However for maximum vehicle performance and the best driveability the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended For Thailand Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline or gasohol up to E20 of at least 91 octane RON Gasohol is alcohol blended gasoline For example E20 is a mixture of approximately 20 fuel ethanol and 80 unleaded gasoline Diesel engine Use diesel fuel of at least 50 cetane If two types of diesel fuel are available use summer or winter fuel properly according to the following temperature conditions e Above 7 C 20 F Summer type diesel fuel e Below 7 C 20 F Winter type diesel fuel A caution e Do not us
340. ng is necessary or for powerful acceleration use the ON position The transmission will automatically select a different gear ratio allowing the engine to provide high output When driving conditions change push the switch to turn the SPORT mode off Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the SPORT mode in the ON position This reduces fuel economy Accelerator downshift in the D position For passing or climbing hills depress the accelerator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed Shift lock release 4 SHIFT LOCK JVC0028X Right Hand Drive RHD model If the battery charge is low or discharged the shift lever may not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pushed To move the shift lever perform the following procedure 1 Model with Intelligent Key system Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position Model without Intelligent Key system Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key if it is inserted Apply the parking brake Depress the shift lock release button Push the shift lever button and move the shift lever to the N Neutral position while holding down the shift lock release 5 Place the ignition switch in the ON position to unlock the steerin
341. ng methods to reset to a faster speed e Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle teaches the desired speed push and release the SET switch Starting and driving 5 31 Push and hold the RES switch When the vehicle reaches the desired speed release the RES switch Quickly push and release the RES switch This will increase the vehicle speed by about 1 km h or 1 MPH Resuming at preset speed Push and release the RES switch The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 40 km h 25 MPH Canceling cruising speed Use any one of the following methods to cancel the set speed Push the CANCEL switch The SET indicator light will turn off Tap the foot brake pedal The SET indicator light will turn off Push the cruise control MAIN switch Both the SET and cruise indicator lights turn off 5 32 Starting and driving PARKING A warnine Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be applied and the shift lever placed in the P Park position Automatic Transmission model Continu ously Variable Transmission model or the shift lever placed in an appropriate gear Manual Transmission model Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unex pectedly or roll away and result in an accident When parking the vehi
342. ng station e When pushing the TA NEWS button for longer than 2 seconds the news standby mode is turned off and the indicator disappears from the display 2 News interruption mode e When the TA NEWS button is pushed during the news interruption mode the radio returns to the previous source However the news standby mode is maintained e When the CD button is pushed during the news interruption mode the radio changes to the CD mode However the news standby mode is maintained If the radio band is changed to the MW or LW the news standby mode will be turned off MENU MENU button To configure Alternative Frequency Regional and Language settings perform the following procedure 1 Push and hold the MENU button for at least 1 5 seconds 2 Turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counter clockwise The display message will change as follows AF REG amp LANGUAGE amp AF e To activate or deactivate the AF and REG mode briefly push the ENTER button when AF or REG appears on the display and turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counterclockwise to switch between the off or on position After selection push the ENTER button to confirm the settings When the AF mode is enabled the audio unit will automatically re tune to a stronger fre quency if the radio signal becomes weak When the REG mode is enabled the audio unit will maintain and maintain the station which is broadcasting l
343. nical skill and a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by yourself a qualified technician or if you prefer your NISSAN dealer WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and tuned by an authorised NISSAN dealer GENERAL MAINTENANCE During normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe Maintenance precautions P 8 5 EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTE NANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be per formed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the back door trunk lid and hatch Also make sure that all latches lock securely Lubricate if necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequent
344. ning light remains on Be sure that the brake warning light has turned off before driving See Parking brake P 3 24 Low brake fluid warning indicator If the brake warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving and the parking brake is released it may indicate the brake fluid level is low When the brake warning light illuminates while driving stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible Stop the engine and check the brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is below the minimum mark on the reservoir add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid P 8 19 If the brake fluid level is sufficient have the brake system checked by a NISSAN dealer promptly Anti lock Braking System ABS warning indi cator if equipped When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient if both the brake warning light and the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illumi nate it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the brake system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly See Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light P 2 13 E Charge warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position the charge warning light illuminates After starting the engine the charge warning light turns off This indicates the charging system is operational If the charge warning light illuminates while t
345. not use the system when the engine is not running for extended periods of time to prevent battery discharge REARVIEW MONITOR if equipped When the shift lever is shifted into the R Reverse position the monitor display shows a rearward view from the vehicle The system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking Designs and items displayed on the screen may vary depending on the models A warnine e The rearview monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute to check behind the vehicle when backing up The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other manoeuvres e Objects viewed in the rearview monitor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used Objects in the rearview monitor will appear visually opposite than when viewed in the inside and outside rearview mirrors e Make sure that the back door is securely closed when backing up e Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the rearview monitor because of its mon itoring range limitation e Do not put anything on the rearview camera The rearview camera is installed above the license plate e When washing the vehicle with high pres sure water be sure not to spray it around the camera Otherwise water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens a malfunction fire or an electric shock 4 2 Monitor Heater
346. nterior surface e Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the vents These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s instruc tions before using air fresheners FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats if equipped can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior Regardless of what mats are used be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the foot well to prevent interference with pedal operation Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn 7 4 Appearance and care Floor mat positioning aid driver s side This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket A to act as a floor mat positioning aid NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model The driver s floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the foot area Periodically check that the mats are properly posi tioned GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film A caution When cleaning the inside of the windows
347. o dial the number Manually dialling a phone number Call Lists Phone Book Call Number Number 01236789 0123456789 i A warnine Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake before making a call To dial a phone number manually use the audio system display virtual keyboard pad as follows 1 Push the button and turn the enter dial to highlight Call Number 2 Push the enter dial to select Call Number 3 Turn the jener dial to scroll along and select each number of the phone number Once highlighted push the enter dial after each number selection To delete the last number entered scroll to the Backspace symbol and once highlighted push the enter dial The last number will be deleted Pushing the enter dial repeatedly will delete each subsequent number 4 After entering the last number scroll to the symbol and push the dial or push the button to dial the number Call lists A number from the dialled received or missed call lists can also be used to make a call e Dialled call Use the dialled call mode to make a call which is based on the list of outgoing dialled calls e Received call Use the received call mode to make a call which is based on the list of received calls e Missed call Use the missed call mode to make a cal
348. o so may cause damage to the transmission Three way catalyst equipped model should not be started by pushing Attempting to do so may cause damage to the catalyst Never try to start the engine by towing When the engine starts the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the towing vehicle Stop Start Idling Stop System equipped model cannot be started by pushing the vehicle IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS A warnine e Never continue driving if your vehicle over heats Doing so could cause a vehicle fire e Never open the hood if steam is coming out e Never remove the radiator cap while the engine is hot If the radiator cap is removed when the engine is hot pressurized hot water will spurt out and possibly cause burning scalding or serious injury e If steam or coolant is coming from the engine stand clear of the vehicle to prevent getting burned e Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or to get caught in the cooling fan or drive belts The engine cooling fan will start at any time If your vehicle is overheating indicated by the high temperature indicator or if you feel a lack of engine power detect unusual noise etc take the following steps 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic 2 Turn on the hazard indicator flasher lights 3 Apply the parking brake Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Trans
349. o system push the POWER ON OFF button Volume control To control the volume turn the VOLUME control dial Turn the VOLUME control dial clockwise to increase the audio volume Turn the VOLUME control dial counterclockwise to decrease the audio volume D Sound preference button To enter the audio mode radio or CD push the button When no CD is loaded the audio system will automatically switch to the radio mode To change the audio settings BASS TREBLE FADER BALANCE EQ push the button or ENTER button to select the mode BASS gt TREBLE gt BALANCE gt FADER gt EQ gt BASS To adjust each audio setting turn the MENU VOL control dial clockwise or counterclockwise BASS to decrease to increase TREB LE to decrease to increase BAL ANCE R to adjust to the right L to adjust to the left FADE R F to adjust to the front R to adjust to the rear EQ Equalizer Use this control to change the preset sound mode for CD play Turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counterclock wise The mode will change as follows OFF lt gt ENHANCE amp OFF If the audio settings mode is unchanged for approxi mately 8 seconds the audio settings mode will automatically return to the normal mode Clock display Turning on off the clock display To turn on or off the clock display perform the following operations 1 Push the MENU button whi
350. oaded into the slot to protect the CD If an error message appears on the display push the button When the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position it is possible to eject all the CDs However the audio unit will not be activated LW MW FM radio operation JVHO045X The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position FM AM FM AM button When the m button is pushed while the audio system is off the audio system and the radio will turn on When the button is pushed while the CD player is already operating it will automatically turn off and the radio will turn on To change the radio band push the rw aw button until the preferred band appears FM 1 gt FM 2 gt FMT gt MW gt LW During FM reception when the m button is pushed for longer than 1 5 seconds stations are searched for and the 6 stations of the FM T band The sound is muted until the auto store operation is completed upon which preset channel 1 is automatically tuned in 4 60 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system gt gt lt lt When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually push the gt 4 button until the pref
351. ocal regional programmes e To change the display language briefly push the ENTER button when LANGUAGE appears on the display then turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counterclockwise to select the appropriate lan guage setting ENGLISH lt gt DUTCH lt FRENCH amp SPANISH lt gt GERMAN amp ITALIAN lt PORTUGUESE ENGLISH After selecting the preferred language push the ENTER button to exit the menu To configure the SPEED volume and BEEP settings perform the following procedure 1 Push the MENU button 2 Turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counter clockwise The display message will change as follows PHONE SETUP lt SPEED VOL amp CLOCK 4 62 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system BEEP lt PHONE SETUP For phone operation see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System if equipped for model without navigation system P 4 64 e When SPEED VOL appears on the display briefly push on the ENTER button then turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the level of the volume Adjusting the setting to O zero turns off the speed volume feature Increasing the speed volume setting results in the audio volume increasing more rapidly with vehicle speed Push the ENTER button again to save the setting e When BEEP appears on the display briefly push the ENTER button and then turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counterclockwise to switch the beep sound on or o
352. od practice to turn the wheels as illustrated HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 4 Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb Then apply the parking brake HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 2 Turn the wheels away from the curb and allow the vehicle to move back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb Then apply the parking brake HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL WITHOUT CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if the vehicle moves Then apply the parking brake 4 Model with Intelligent Key system Place the ignition switch in the OFF position Model without Intelligent Key system Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key NOTE For Model with Stop Start Idling Stop System Use this system when the vehicle is stopped for a period of time for example waiting at stop lights Stop the engine with the ignition switch when parking etc for an extended period of time Starting and driving 5 33 SONAR parking sensor SYSTEM if equipped A WARNING e The sonar parking sensor system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking Always move slowly e Read and understand the limitations of the sonar parking sensor system as contained in this section Inc
353. odometer Trouble shooting guide Turn signal switch Turning on cruise control Turning on speed limiter Types of tires Underbody cleaning Uniform tire quality grading Upper instrument box Using intelligent Key system Using remote keyless entry function Using remote keyless entry system Vv Vanity mirrors 3 24 Vehicle Dimensions ni Identification number VIN a 9 9 Information display 2 20 Speed sensing door lock mechanism a 3 6 Vehicle battery ssssssssssesssssrrrrssssssrsereerensnnrrreeeess 8 24 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch 5 25 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 5 24 5 25 a 5 40 Vehicle security Ventilators 10 5 13 Warning and audible reminders 3 13 Warning lights 13 Warning indicator lights and audible reminderS sssssssssssssssssssrsrssssrsrsssssesss 2 12 Warnings and alerts vehicle information isplay sssssscsssecsssecessecesneceeseees 2 22 Washer switch Rear window wiper and washer switch 2 38 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 37 Washing 7 2 Waxing nay Ga Wheels and tires Care of wheelS ccssceeees 7 3 When travelling or registering in another country Where to go for service Window washer fluid s s Window s Cleaning Manual windows Power windows WINdOWS esseessesseeee Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 37 Wiper Rain sensi
354. of a malfunction While the VDC system is operating you may feel a pulsation in the foot brake pedal and hear a noise or feel a vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly The VDC system computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed forward or backward When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the foot brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH SIC1881 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system ON for most driving conditions When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The WE indicator light will illuminate Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM for Australia and New Zealand A warnine e The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not pre vent accidents due to abrupt steering opera tion at high speeds or by careless or dange
355. om order RPT ALL All the tracks on the CD will be played in sequential order S CD EJECT button When the button is pushed while a CD is loaded the CD will be ejected When the button is pushed twice the CD will be ejected further and the CD can be removed easily If a CD is ejected by pushing the button and it is not taken out from the loading slot the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD LW MW FM radio operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position FM AM FM AM button When the FM AM button is pushed while the audio system is off the audio system and the radio will turn on When the FM AM button is pushed while the CD player is already operating it will automatically turn off and the radio will turn on To change the radio band push the FM AM button until the preferred band appears e For FM FM 1 gt FM 2 gt FMT e For AM MW gt LW gt MW During FM reception when the FM button is pushed for longer than 1 5 seconds stations are searched for and the 6 stations of the FM T band The sound is muted until the auto store operation is completed upon which preset channel 1 is automatically tuned in gt
356. ommunicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions e When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station e When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 9 e When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials e When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby e When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer e When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is discharged replace it with a new one For information regarding replacement of a battery see Intelligent Key battery P 8 26 Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as signals from a TV and personal computer the battery life may become shorter To start the engine when
357. oolant level 8 10 Checking engine oil level 8 11 Checking foot brake pedal Checking parking brake Child restraints Child safety Child safety rear door lock Chimes Audible reminders Chrome parts Circuit breaker Fusible link Cold weather Continuously Variable Transmission GVM fluidic i e tied cicada i 8 21 Controls Steering wheel audio controls ssssss 1111 4 63 Coolant Changing engine Coolant Checking engine coolant level High temperature warning light Corrosion protection Cruise control Cruise control display and indicators Cruise control indicator for Europe Cup holdersissiiccciscccesathecciectiancteadiess Curtain side impact air bag system CVT Driving with CVT Continuously Variable Transmission 5 5 Daytime light system Defogger switch Difference between predictive and actual distances 4 3 Dimensions 9 8 Door locks 3 5 Door open warning light 2 14 Draining water Drive belts Driving Care when driving 5 5 Cold weather driving 5 40 Driving in wet conditions 5 5 Driving in winter conditions 5 5 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT sssscsssssssssscssesssssecsssecssessssees 5 14 Driving with CVT Continuously Variable Transmission Driving with Manual Transmission MT Precautions when starting and driving es Driving VehICIe eesesesesssesssesssesessssses
358. oors are unlocked with the UNLOCK button on the keyfob or Intelligent Key or the request switch model with Intelligent Key system with the ignition switch in the LOCK position e The driver s door is opened and then closed with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and without the key in the ignition switch The interior light timer will be cancelled when e The driver s door is locked e The ignition switch is turned to the ON position When the switch is in the off position Q the room light does not illuminate regardless of any condition FRONT MAP LIGHTS if equipped To turn on the front map light if equipped push the on switch and the light illuminates To turn off push the off switch 4 Battery saver system If any door is left open for a period of time with the room light switch placed horizontally or the room control switch in the center position the room light will automatically turn off MEMO Instruments and controls 2 47 MEMO 2 48 Instruments and controls 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments Key NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS key if equipped Intelligent Key if equipped DOOrOCKSo ossei Super lock system if equipped Locking with key wees Locking with inside lock knob Locking with power door lock switch if equipped Vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism if equipped 3 6 Auto door lock releasing mechanism if equipped Child safety r
359. operly after performing the above procedure repeat the steps See a NISSAN dealer if necessary for checking the power window system 2 42 Instruments and controls SUNSHADE if equipped A warnine Never allow hands fingers or any part of your body within operating range of the sunshade You could be injured A caution e Do not place any heavy objects on the roof glass or surrounding area e Do not hang from the sunshade and or the sunshade opening or hang any objects from it It may cause damage or deformation to the sunshade e Close the sunshade when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time to prevent the inside of the vehicle from reach ing high temperatures JVIO020X To open or close the sunshade operate the knob A To open the sunshade slide it toward the rear of the vehicle 4 To close slide the sunshade toward the front of the vehicle CLOCK If the battery cable is disconnected the clock will reset its time and the correct time will not be indicated Readjust the time For model with the vehicle information display see Vehicle information display P 2 20 For the clock adjustment in the audio unit if equipped See Audio system P 4 11 ADJUSTING TIME Meter display model if equipped Example The digital clock 2 in the meter displays the time when the ignition switch is in the ON position To display the clock push the adjustin
360. or LOCK position it is possible to eject the CD currently being played However the audio unit will not be activated If a CD is ejected by pushing the button and it is not removed from the loading slot for some time the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD FM AM radio operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position FM AM FM AM button When the ma button is pushed while the audio system is turned off the audio system will turn on and the radio will turn on When the m a button is pushed while another audio source is playing the other audio source will turn off and the radio will turn on To change the radio band push the Fw button until the desired band appears FM 1 gt FM 2 gt FMT gt AM gt FM 1 During FM reception when the m button is pushed for longer than 1 5 seconds stations are searched for and the 6 stations of the FM T band are tuned in During the search the notification message AUTO STORE appears in the display and the sound is muted until the autostore operation is completed upon which preset channel 1 is automatically tuned in ENTER ENTER dial When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually turn the enter dial until the preferred frequency is achieved
361. or Indonesia 9 9 For Thailand 9 9 For Morocco Vehicle identification number chassis number 9 9 For Jordan Vehicle identification number VIN plate if equipped 9 10 For South Africa Engine serial number n s 9 10 For the United Arab Emirates Certification label if equipped Tire placard w essesscsesesseseeseesensees 9 10 Air conditioner specification label if equipped When travelling or registering in another country Vehicle identification Vehicle identification plate RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES The following are approximate capacities The actual refill quantities may be slightly different When refilling follow the procedures instructed in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Approximate Capacity Engine Ty ngine lype Metric Measure Fuel 44L Engine oil 1 3 0 L except for Europe including oil filter and CVT model for India Recommended Fuel Lubricants Imperial Measure 9 See Fuel recommendation P 9 4 gal 2 5 8 qt except for Europe Gasoline engine and CVT model for India For Europe Ukraine and South Africa 3 4 L for Europe and CVT 3 qt for Europe and CVT Genuine NISSAN engine oil 2 3 HR12DE model for India model for India API grade SL SM or SN 2 HR15DE 2 8 L except for Europe 2 1 2 qt except for Europe ILSAC grade GF 3 GF 4 or GF 5 2 excl
362. or light is displayed the engine starts running automa tically under at least one of the following conditions e The clutch pedal is depressed for MT model e The brake pedal is released with the shift lever in the D Drive or N Neutral position for CVT model e The shift lever is placed in the L Low D Drive or R Reverse position from the N or P position for CVT model e The driver s seat belt is unfastened or the driver s door is open for CVT model e The brake pedal is repeatedly pressed to maintain vehicle braking performance e The brake pedal is strongly depressed and then released with the shift lever in the P Park position resulting in decreased vacuum pressure of the brake booster for CVT model e The battery voltage becomes low due to electrical load from other vehicle systems like headlights heaters etc or auxiliary devices connected to the 12 volt socket inside the vehicle e The vehicle speed is above about 2 km h 1 MPH e The system is in front defogger mode automatic air conditioner e The mode dial is in front defogger mode manual air conditioner e The rear window defogger is operated NOTE The following conditions will prevent the Stop Start System from automatically restarting the engine Starting the engine by the ignition switch is then necessary 5 22 Starting and driving e The driver s seat belt is unfastened or driver s door is open for MT model
363. or the transmission related component harness connector dis connected while the ignition switch is in the ON position e Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluids This 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section provides instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or ex cessive emissions and could affect your warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS HR12DDR ENGINE MODEL J gee re ee d ee ee ay er PeyQ ia JS Ot AT Ae a pots ra i JVO0032X 1 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir Fuse fusible link box Right Hand Drive RHD model oP ON 8 6 Maintenance and do it yourself Engine drive belts Engine oil filler cap Air cleaner Brake and clutch fluid reservoir Left Hand Drive LHD model 6 7 Window washer fluid reservoir 8 Engine oil dipstick 9 Radiator cap 10 Battery 11 Engine coolant reservoir For Manual Transmission MT Model HR12DE ENGINE MODEL 1 Engine drive belts 2 Brake and clu
364. osition which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the windows The auto reverse function enables a window to automatically reverse when something is caught in the window as it is closing by the automatic function When the control unit detects an obstacle the window will be lowered immediately Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may activate if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs When power window switch does not oper ate Some power window functions automatic close function auto reverse function will not operate as described after the battery cable is disconnected and the electrical supply is interrupted Perform the following procedure to initialize the power window functions 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 If the driver s window is closed open it completely by operating the driver s window switch Instruments and controls 2 41 3 Pull up and hold the driver s window switch to close the driver s window Hold the switch for approximately 3 seconds after the window has been fully closed and then release it 4 Check if the power window functions operate properly If you open or close the power window continuously it may cause the power window not to operate properly Perform the above procedure If the power window functions do not operate pr
365. ot match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc Music cuts off or skips ee r E not match the specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data iY may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like MP3 or when play is prohibited by Move immediately to the nest song whem playing copyright protection the player will skip to the next song The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software so the files might not play in the The songs do not play back in the desired order desired _order Random Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB memory device 4 18 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system ANTENNA if equipped A CAUTION e Be sure to fold down the antenna before the vehicle enters a garage with a low ceiling e Be sure that antenna is removed before the vehicle enters an automatic car wash JVHO390X Adjust the antenna angle for the best reception Removing antenna You can remove the antenna if necessary Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by turning counterclockwise To install the antenna turn the antenna clockwise and tighten Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 19 FM AM R
366. others alone in the vehicle They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and inadver tently become involved in a serious accident SUPER LOCK SYSTEM if equipped A warnine For Super Lock System equipped models failure to follow the precautions below may lead to hazardous situations Make sure the Super Lock System activation is always safely conducted e When the vehicle is occupied never lock the doors with the remote keyless entry system or the Intelligent Key system Doing so will trap the occupants since the Super Lock System prevents the doors from being opened from the inside of the vehicle e Only operate the remote controller or the Intelligent Key lock button when there is a clear view of the vehicle This is to prevent anybody from being trapped inside the vehicle through the Supper Lock System activation Locking the doors with the remote controller or the Intelligent Key LOCK button f or the request switch will lock all doors and activate the Super Lock System This means that none of the doors can be opened from the inside in order to prevent theft The system will be released when the door is unlocked with the remote controller or the Intelligent Key UNLOCK button p or the request switch The Super Lock System will not activate when the doors are locked with the power door lock switch or mechanical key Emergency situations If the Super Lock System is activated due to a traffic
367. outlets amp j Air flows from the defogger and foot outlets Gy Aijr flows mainly from the defogger outlets Fan speed control Turn the fan speed control gg dial clockwise to increase the fan speed Turn the fan speed control gg dial counterclock wise to decrease the fan speed Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 7 Temperature control Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature Turn the dial between the middle and the right position to select the hot temperature Turn the dial between the middle and the left position to select the cool temperature Heater operation Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets 1 Move the air intake lever to the a gt position for normal heating Turn the air flow control dial to the sp 3 Turn the fan speed control gg dial to the desired position position 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot right position Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center ventilators 1 Move the air intake lever to the a amp gt position u seon 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the 74 3 Turn the fan speed control gg dial to the desired position position 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position Defrosting or defogging This mode directs th
368. ow into the three way catalyst causing it to over heat Do not keep driving if the engine misfires or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three way catalyst Do not race the engine while warming it up Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine CARE WHEN DRIVING Driving your vehicle to fit the circumstances is essential for your safety and comfort As a driver you should be the one who knows best how to drive in the given circumstances ENGINE COLD START PERIOD Due to the higher engine speeds when the engine is cold extra caution must be exercised when selecting a gear during the engine warm up period after starting the engine LOADING LUGGAGE Loads and their distribution and the attachment of equipment coupling devices roof baggage carriers etc will considerably change the driving character istics of the vehicle Your driving style and speed must be adjusted according to the circumstances DRIVING IN WET CONDITIONS e Avoid accelerating or stopping suddenly e Avoid sharp turning or lane changing suddenly e Avoid following too close to the vehicle in front When water covers the road surface with water puddles small water streams etc reduce speed to prevent hydroplaning w
369. partment the Intelligent Key may not function e If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle the Intelligent Key may function Automatic transmission AT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position until the shift lever is moved to the P Park position When pushing the ignition switch to the OFF position make sure the shift lever is in the P Park position Type A model with dot matrix display When the ignition switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position 1 SHIFT P warning appears on the dot matrix display in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds Move the shift lever to the P Park position If the ignition switch is in the ACC position the PUSH warning appears on the dot matrix display 4 Push the ignition switch The ignition switch is switched to the ON position 5 The PUSH warning appears again on the dot matrix display 6 Push the ignition switch The ignition switch is switched to the OFF position 7 Open the door The ignition switch will change to the LOCK position For warnings and indicators on the Vehicle information display see Vehicle information display P 2 20 Type B model without dot matrix display 1 Move the shift lever to the P Park posit
370. peration e Do not touch the mirrors while they are moving Your hand may be pinched and the mirror may malfunction e Do not drive with the mirrors stored You will be unable to see behind the vehicle e If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by hand there is a chance that the mirror will move forward or backward during driving If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by hand be sure to adjust them again electrically before driving Automatic folding function with interlocking door lock if equipped JVC0025X The outside rearview mirrors fold automatically by interlocking door lock The function can be used while the switch is in the AUTO position e The outside rearview mirrors fold automatically when the door is locked by the door handle request switch or the remote keyless entry system e The outside rearview mirrors unfold when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position A caution When the outside rearview mirror is folded unfolded manually the mirror may fold unfold accidentally while driving Be sure to fold unfold the outside rearview mirror by an electrical operation after folding unfolding manually Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 A WARNING e When the outside rearview mirror is folded unfolded manually depending on the switch position the outside rearview mirror may start operation by turning the ignition switch to the ACC or ON posit
371. possibly causing personal injury Then remove the cap e Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control sys tem An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury OPENING FUEL FILLER LID To open the fuel filler lid pull the fuel filler lid release handle FUEL FILLER CAP The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type Turn the cap counterclockwise T to remove Tighten the cap clockwise until ratchet clicks more than twice after refueling A caution If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage STEERING WHEEL A warnine Never adjust the steering wheel while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation SPA2771 While pushing the lock lever down Q adjust the steering wheel up or down 2 until the desired position is achieved Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place MIRRORS A warnine Adjust the position of all mirrors before driving Do not adjust the mirror positions while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR While holding the inside rearview mirror adjust the mirror angles until the desired position is achieved Manual anti glare type Pull the adjusting lever 4 if
372. pright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against whiplash injury Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason HEAD RESTRAINTS if equipped A WARNING Do not drive and or ride in the vehicle with the head restraint removed This can be dangerous Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident Check the height after someone else uses the seat The proper adjustment of the head restraint is as illustrated Adjust the head restraint so that the head restraint s center is level with the center of the ears Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 Adjustment ARMREST if equipped Front a 1 Pull up the head restraint to raise to the proper SSS0970 position 2 Push in the lock knob 4 and push down the head restraint to lower to the proper position Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal The rear head restraint if equipped should only be used in the notched stem positions The lowest head restraint position is the stowed position 1 6 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If yo
373. r components if equipped Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself needed Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Repair as necessary Wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if not functioning correctly Inside vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when performing periodic maintenance cleaning the vehicle etc Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure that the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort Keep the floor mats away from the pedal Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure that it attains the proper distance from the floor mat when depressed fully Check the brake booster function Be sure to keep the floor mats away from the pedal Parking brake Check the parking brake operation regularly Check that the lever if equipped or the pedal if equipped has the proper travel Also make sure that the vehicle is held secur
374. r object If the outside temperature is below 10 C 14 F the battery of the Intelli gent Key may not function properly Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where tem peratures exceed 60 C 140 F Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key Do not use a magnet key holder Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers or cellular phones Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come into contact with water or salt water and do not wash it in a washing machine This could affect the system function If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key This will prevent the Intelli gent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure please contact a NISSAN dealer Mechanical key gt SPA2033 To remove the mechanical key release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key To install the mechanical key firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors See Door locks P 3 5 DOOR LOCKS A warnine e Always look before opening any doors to avoid an accident with oncoming traffic e Never leave children or adults who would normally require the support of
375. rake pedal or clutch pedal with the ignition switch in any position Immediately release the ignition switch when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedures If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather depress the accelerator pedal and hold it Push the ignition switch for up to 15 seconds while holding Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts A caution As soon as the engine has started release the ignition switch immediately Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before crank ing the engine again Otherwise the starter could be damaged If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables the instructions and cautions contained in the 6 In case of emergency section should be carefully followed Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting the engine to warm up Drive at moderate speeds for a short distance first especially in cold weather A caution Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is warming up 6 To stop the engine move the shift lever to the P Park position AT CVT model or move the shift lever to the N Neutral position MT model apply the parking brake and push the ignition switch to the OFF posit
376. rce mode Pri 144 Fast Forward Rewind buttons Push and hold the 44 buttons to fast forward or rewind through the track When the button is released the track will play at normal playing speed Track up down By pushing the 44 buttons once the track will skip forward to the next track or backward to the beginning of the current track Push the i iea buttons more than once to skip through the tracks Folder browsing If the recorded media contains folders with music files pushing the gt 144 button will play the tracks of each folder in sequence To select a preferred folder 1 Push the enter dial or the button and a list of tracks in the current folder is displayed Push the button 3 Turn the enter dial to highlight the preferred folder 4 Push the enter dial to access the folder Push the enter dial again to start playing the first track or turn the enrer dial and push the enteR dial to select another track If the current selected folder contains sub folders push the Jenter dial and a new screen with a list of sub folders will be displayed Turn the enter dial to highlight the sub folder then push the ester dial to access the sub folder Select the root folder item
377. reas where the temperatures stay above freezing Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION e Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean e Always check for minor damage to the paint surface and if any exists repair it as soon as possible e Keep the drain holes in the lower edge of the doors open to avoid water accumulation e Check the vehicle underbody for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible A caution e Never remove dirt sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom e Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In the winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corrosion which may be required in some areas consult a NISSAN dealer Appearance and care 7 5 MEMO 7 6 Appearance and care 8 Maintenance and do it your
378. remote controller battery is discharged When the key is in the ignition switch A caution e When locking the doors using the remote controller be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle e Do not allow the remote controller which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the remote controller e Do not strike the remote controller sharply against another object e Do not place the remote controller for an extended period in an area where tempera tures exceed 60 C 140 F e When the outside temperature is extremely low the remote keyless entry system may Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 not function properly If a remote controller is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that remote controller from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the remote controller to unlock the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer For information regarding the replacement of a battery see Remote controller battery P 8 25 USING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM if equipped JVP0213X Type A with panic alarm LOCK button UNLOCK button g PANIC button p Battery indicator light OOOO 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments JVP0222X Type B without panic alarm LOCK button UNLOCK button g Battery indicator light Locking door
379. replace the battery 1 Remove the screw A 2 Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing 3 Replace the battery with a new one Recommended battery CR1620 or equivalent e Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunc tion 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself e Make sure that the side faces the bottom of the case 4 Close the lid and install the screw securely 5 Operate the buttons to check its operation See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harm ful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY Battery replacement A caution e Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts e An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment Always confirm local reg ulations for battery disposal e When changing batteries do not let dust or oil get on the components e There is dang
380. reservoir P 8 19 P 8 20 Right Hand Drive RHD model 3 Engine oil filler cap P 8 11 4 Air cleaner P 8 21 5 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir P 8 19 P 8 20 Left Hand Drive LHD model 0 16 Illustrated table of contents ZA FOV HU any N EA C 4 OR N K Gr 7 o S O Zo JVC0452X 6 Fuse fusible link box P 8 27 7 Window washer fluid reservoir P 8 23 8 Engine oil dipstick P 8 11 9 Radiator cap P 8 9 10 Battery P 8 24 11 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 10 For Manual Transmission MT Model HR15DE ENGINE MODEL 2 Pa JVC0118X 1 Engine drive belts P 8 16 6 Fuse fusible link box P 8 27 2 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir P 8 19 7 Window washer fluid reservoir P 8 23 P 8 20 8 Engine oil dipstick P 8 11 Right Hand Drive RHD model 9 Radiator cap P 8 9 3 Engine oil filler cap P 8 11 10 Battery P 8 24 4 Air cleaner P 8 21 11 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 10 5 T clutch fluid reservoir P 8 19 For Manual Transmission MT Model Left Hand Drive LHD model Illustrated table of contents O 17 K9K ENGINE MODEL ON Oa PON Brake and clutch fluid reservoir P 8 19 P 8 20 9 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 10 Air cleaner P 8 21 Vehicle overheat P 6 11 Fuse Fusible link holders P 8 27 10 Battery P 8 24 Priming pump P 8 16 Window washer fluid re
381. restart the engine with the ignition switch e When the Idling Stop System indicator light blinks at a low speed once approximately every 2 seconds have the system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly e Even if the Idling Stop System indicator light illuminates before stopping your vehicle the Idling Stop System may not activate when you are driving on an uphill or downhill grade or when the steering wheel is oper ated etc lt A gt Turn signals hazard indicator lights The turn signals hazard indicator lights blink when the turn signal switch lever or hazard indicator flasher switch is ON See Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 33 or Hazard indicator flasher switch P 6 2 One 8 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light if equipped The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light illuminates when the VDC off switch is pushed to the OFF position When the VDC off switch is pushed to the OFF position the VDC system is turned off See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system if equipped except for Europe Australia and New Zealand P 5 24 or Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system for Australia and New Zealand P 5 25 AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a brake pad requires replacement it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in
382. revent the objects from leaning on the iPod cable and the port Pressure from the objects may damage the iPod cable and the port Compatibility The following models are supported e Third generation iPhone Firmware version 10S4 4 0 e Fourth generation iPhone Firmware version 10S4 4 0 Fifth generation iPod Firmware version 1 3 First generation iPod Classic Firmware version 1 1 1 or 1 1 2PC e Second generation iPod Classic Firmware ver sion 2 0 1 e First generation iPod touch Firmware version 1 1 5 or 2 2 1 e Second and third generation iPod touch Firm ware version 2 2 1 or OS4 4 0 0 e First generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 3 1 e Second generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 1 3 e Third generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 1 2PC or 1 1 3PC e Fourth generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 0 2 or 1 0 4 e Fifth generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 0 1 or 1 0 2 The iPod touch may not respond quickly to the system in some cases Make sure that the iPod firmware is updated Operating tips e iPod Shuffle and iPod mini are not supported e Some iPod operations may not be available with this system AUX AUX button To operate the iPod use one of the following methods e Push the Aux button and then turn the dial to select for the USB item Once highlighted push the Enter dial e Push the aux button repeatedly until USB is highlighted and the
383. riable Transmission CVT model Manual Transmission MT model 21 Push button ignition switch model with Intelli gent Key system 22 Tilting steering wheel lock lever 23 Ignition switch model without Intelligent Key system steering lock 24 Hood lock release handle 25 Fuel filler lid release handle 26 Idling Stop OFF switch 27 Headlight aiming control switch if equipped 23 24 25 26 27 JVC0449X Wiper and washer switch Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio control Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol Meters and gauges Driver s front impact air bag Horn Headlight fog light and turn signal switch Instruments and controls 2 5 METERS AND GAUGES JVC0453X Type A 1 Speedometer 2 Trip odometer reset switch trip computer mode switch 3 Clock adjusting knob 4 Automatic Transmission AT position indicator 5 Odometer twin trip odometer trip computer clock 6 Fuel gauge if equipped 2 6 Instruments and controls Type B Tachometer 7 Fuel gauge Speedometer if equipped Trip odometer reset switch trip computer mode switch Clock adjusting knob Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT position indicator Cruse control and speed limiter display Odometer twin trip odometer trip computer clock JVC0454X Instruments and controls 2 7 Oh PONS 6 if equipped 2 8 Type C
384. ring wheel audio controls fees Radio data system RDS Rain sensing auto wiper system Rear center seat belt Rear seats Rear window wiper and washer switch Rear window wiper blade Rearview Monitot ceeses Recommended fuel lubricants and capacities 9 2 Recommended SAE viscosity number Remote controller battery Remote keyless entry system Removing spots Repair and replacement procedure Room light 1 32 2 46 Safety Child safety Child safety rear door lock Safety precautions Scheduled maintenance Seat Center mark on seat belts 1 9 Front seats Precautions on seat belt usage Rear seats Three point type sea S at belt nania haa Center mark on seat belts Precautions on seat belt usage Seat belt warning light Seat belt s Child safety vives osetia annals Injured persons Pregnant women Pre tensioner seat belt system Rear center seat belt Seat belt maintenance Shoulder belt height adjustment Seat belts Seat belts Seats seat belts and supplemental restrain system SRS Security system Servicing air conditione Setting cruising speed Setting speed limit Shift lever Shift lock release Shift lock release Transmission Shift P warning Shifting CVT Continuously Variable Transmission 5 5 Shoulder belt height adjustment Side ventilators Side impact air bag system Slip indicator ligh
385. rn on in the mode that was used immediately before the system was turned off e If a CD is inserted or a USB and or an AUX device is connected when the system is turned off and if the system was turned on again with the devices removed or disconnected the radio will turn on To turn off the audio system push the I dial Volume control To control the volume turn the I dial Turn the dial clockwise to make the sound louder Turn the dial counterclockwise to make the sound quieter SETUP SETUP button To configure Audio Clock Language or Scroll direc tion settings perform the following procedure 1 Push the setup button 2 Push the dial 3 Turn the ENTER dial clockwise or counterclockwise The setting menu will be displayed in the following order Audio lt gt Clock lt gt Language lt Scroll Direction After the desired levels have been set either push the button repeatedly push the serur button or wait for several seconds without pushing any buttons to exit the menu screen Audio adjustments Push the serur button to enter the setup menu screen and then select Audio Each time the enter dial is pushed the mode will change as follows BASS TREBLE gt BALANCE gt FADE AUX VOL gt Audio setup menu screen gt BASS Turn the enter dial clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust t
386. rn signal lights will flash To turn off the hazard indicator flasher push the hazard indicator flasher switch again 6 2 In case of emergency FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions as follows STOPPING VEHICLE A warnine e Be sure to apply the parking brake firmly e Be sure to move the shift lever to the R Reverse position Manual Transmission MT model e Be sure to move the shift lever to the P Park position Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model e Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery area This is hazardous e Never change tires when the oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Call for professional road assistance 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic Turn on the hazard indicator flasher lights Park on a level surface Apply the parking brake a FON Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT model Move the shift lever to the P Park position Manual Transmission MT model Move the shift lever to the R Reverse position 6 Turn off the engine 7 Open the hood and set up the warning triangle if equipped e To warn other traffic e To signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 8 Have all passengers get out from the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from other traffic and clear of t
387. roadcasting station frequency automatically push the gt button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at the station Radio memory buttons The audio system can store up to 18 FM station frequencies six in each of FM 1 FM 2 and FM T 6 MW and 6 LW station frequencies To store the station frequency manually 1 Tune to the desired broadcasting station fre quency by using the PP lt lt or gt i lt button 2 Push and hold a radio memory button 1 until a beep sounds The radio mutes when the memory button is pushed 3 The channel indicator will display and the radio mute disengages indicating that the memory is stored properly 4 Perform steps 1 3 for all other memory buttons If the battery cable is disconnected or if the audio fuse blows the radio memory will be erased In such a case reset the desired stations Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 27 Radio data system RDS Alternative Frequency AF The AF function operates in the FM radio and CD modes When the AF mode is set to ON in the user setup menu mode the AF indicator illuminates For activation or deactivation details see Audio main operation P 4 25 Automatic switching function This function compares the strengths of the signals of all the stations on the AF list and selects the
388. roperly e Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions If a malfunction occurs in the system the VDC warning light illuminates in the instrument panel The VDC system automatically turns off The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system The VDC off indicator light illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the system the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel The VDC warning light flashes if this occurs All other VDC functions are off and the VDC warning light amp will not flash The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC warning light for Australia and New Zealand P 2 16 and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light P 2 18 The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system ON for most driving conditions When the vehicle is stuck in
389. ropriate device to connect to the Bluetooth audio system The following symbols indicate the capability of the registered device e cellular phone integration e p gt Audio streaming A2DP Advanced Audio Distribution Profile Delete Device A registered device can be removed from the Blue tooth audio system Select a registered device then push the enter button to confirm deletion On Off If Bluetooth has been switched off a notification message On Off appears when you select Bluetooth from the setup menu screen or push the button To turn the Bluetooth signal on push the enter dial and a follow up screen will appear Select On and push the enter dial to display the Bluetooth settings menu screen Bluetooth audio streaming main operation AUX BT Audio BTAudio 12 53 bum Songtitle Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position If the audio system is turned off while the Bluetooth audio is playing pushing the lt dial will start Bluetooth audio streaming AUX AUX button To operate Bluetooth audio streaming use one of the following methods e Push the aux button then turn the enter dial to highlight BT Audio and push the enter dial e Push aux repeatedly until BT Audio is highlighted then push the Jenter dial The type of display A or shown on the audio sys
390. rous driving techniques Reduce vehi cle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully e Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock absorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance and the VDC warning light amp may illuminate e If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recom mended or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate e If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the VDC warning light amp may illuminate e When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light amp may illuminate Do not drive on these types of roads e When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the VDC warning light amp may illuminate This is not Starting and driving 5 25 a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface e If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illu
391. s iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries A caution e Do not force the iPod cable into the USB port Inserting the iPod cable tilted or up side down into the port may damage the iPod cable and the port Make sure that the iPod cable is connected correctly into the USB port Some iPod cables come with a t mark as a guide Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction before inserting the iPod cable e Do not locate objects near the iPod cable to prevent the objects from leaning on the iPod cable and the port Pressure from the objects may damage the iPod cable and the port Compatibility The following models are supported e Third generation iPhone Firmware version 10S4 4 0 e Fourth generation iPhone Firmware version 10S4 4 0 Fifth generation iPod Firmware version 1 3 First generation iPod Classic Firmware version 1 1 1 or 1 1 2PC e Second generation iPod Classic Firmware ver sion 2 0 1 e First generation iPod touch Firmware version 1 1 5 or 2 2 1 e Second and third generation iPod touch Firm ware version 2 2 1 or OS4 4 0 0 e First generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 3 1 e Second generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 1 3 e Third generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 1 2PC or 1 1 3PC e Fourth generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 0 2 or 1 0 4 e Fifth generation iPod nano Firmware version 1 0 1 or 1 0 2 The
392. s e OTHER zot Select this submenu and set or reset the distance for replacing items other than the engine oil oil filter and tires To return to the top page of the setting mode select BACK R5 OPTIONS UNIT except for Hong Kong The option menu below can be set to your preference e UNIT Select this submenu to choose the unit e LANGUAGE Select this submenu to choose the display language e STOP START if equipped for Europe Select this submenu to choose the CO2 savings or the engine stop time using the Stop Start System See Stop Start System CO2 savings if equipped for Europe P 2 31 To return to the top page of the setting mode select BACK ga Tire angle indicator s 7 gt 2 for Hong Kong Select this submenu to set the tire angle indicator system See Tire angle indicator P 2 31 To return to the top page of the setting mode select BACK m Warning check JVIO137X MENTER NEXT JVI0014X Type B To see if there are any of the following warnings and corresponding details select this menu Seat belt warning No key warning Low fuel warning Parking brake release warning Door back door open warning SKIP eA Push the m switch A to move to the warning check mode Push the switch to select other menus ALERT 7 5 J This item is available only when a warning is displayed Select this menu to see the details of warnings
393. s 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch 2 Close all doors including the back door 3 Push the LOCK f button on the remote controller All doors will be locked Operate door handles to confirm that the doors have been securely locked A caution After locking the doors using the remote con troller be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles Unlocking doors 1 Push the UNLOCK remote controller A button on the 2 All doors including the back door will be unlocked All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the UNLOCK p button 2 on the remote controller while the doors are locked If during this 30 second time period the UNLOCK button on the remote controller is pushed all doors will be locked automatically after another 30 seconds e Opening any doors e Inserting the key into the ignition switch Selecting door unlock mode if equipped When you first receive the vehicle the door unlock mode is set to unlock all the doors with one push of the UNLOCK p button The door unlock mode can be switched to the selective door unlock mode which unlocks the passenger s doors at the second push of the UNLOCK button Selective door unlock mode 1 Push the UNLOCK remote controller A button on the The driver s door unlocks 3
394. s P 3 2 Door locks P 3 5 Intelligent Key system P 3 9 Remote keyless entry system P 3 7 Security system P 3 17 Child safety rear door lock P 3 7 if equipped Illustrated table of contents 0 3 JVC0450X 1 Recovery hook P 6 13 Bulb replacement P 8 30 2 Engine hood P 3 19 7 Fog lights 3 Windshield Switch operation P 2 36 Wiper and washer switch P 2 37 Bulb replacement P 8 29 Wiper replacement P 8 21 8 Clearance lights Washer fluid P 8 23 Switch operation P 2 33 4 Antenna P 4 19 Bulb replacement P 8 29 5 Windows P 2 40 9 Headlights 6 Front turn signal lights Switch operation P 2 33 Switch operation P 2 35 Bulb replacement P 8 29 0 4 Illustrated table of contents 12 13 14 Tires Tires and wheels P 8 42 P 9 8 Flat tire P 6 2 Side turn signal lights Switch operation P 2 35 Bulb replacement P 8 30 Outside rearview mirrors P 3 22 Doors Keys P 3 2 Door locks P 3 5 Intelligent Key system P 3 9 Remote keyless entry system P 3 7 Security system P 3 17 Child safety rear door lock P 3 7 if equipped EXTERIOR REAR Type A Stop tail lights P 8 30 Rear window Wiper and washer switch P 2 38 Rear window defogger P 2 39 High mounted stop light Model without rear spoiler P 8 30 High mounted stop light Model with re
395. s possible HOOD A warnine The hood must be closed and latched securely before driving Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident Never open the hood if steam or smoke is coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury OPENING HOOD 1 Pull the hood lock release handle 4 located below the instrument panel until the hood springs up 2 Locate the lever in between the hood and grille and push the lever sideways with your fingertips 3 Raise the hood 4 Remove the support rod and insert it into the slot Hold the coated parts A when removing or resetting the support rod Avoid direct contact with the metal parts as they may be hot immediately after the engine has been stopped JVP0217X CLOSING HOOD 1 3 While supporting the hood return the support rod to its original position Slowly lower the hood to about 20 to 30 cm 8 to 12 in above the hood lock then let it drop Make sure it is securely latched A caution Before closing the hood be sure to release the support rod and store it in position Otherwise the support rod will be damaged Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 BACK DOOR A warnine Make sure the back door has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving Do not drive with the back door open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle OPENING BACK DOOR JVP0
396. s used immediately before the system was turned off e f a CD a USB and or an AUX device was connected when the system was turned off and if the system was turned on again with the devices disconnected the radio will turn on To turn off the audio system push the I dial Volume control To control the volume turn the I dial Turn the dial clockwise to make the sound louder Turn the l dial counterclockwise to make the sound quieter MENU MENU button To change the audio settings push the menu button to select the mode Push the menu button repeatedly until the desired mode appears on the display Normal gt BAS Bass gt TRE Treble gt BAL Balance gt FAD Fader CLK Clock Normal Push the 44 button or A W button to adjust the audio settings BAS to decrease to increase TRE to decrease to increase BAL R to right balance L to left balance FAD F to front fade R to rear fade Once the audio settings are set to the desired level push the menu button until the normal audio display appears If no action is performed for approximately 5 seconds the audio settings mode will automatically return to the normal mode Clock display To display the clock on the screen perform the following operations 1 Push the menu button repeatedly until
397. s and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display if equipped and or in the meter See Vehicle information display P 2 20 and Warning indicator lights and audible remin ders P 2 12 A caution e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle e Never leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle e If the vehicle battery is discharged the ignition switch cannot be switched from the LOCK position and if the steering lock is engaged the steering wheel cannot be moved Charge the battery as soon as possible See Jump starting P 6 9 Operating range The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location the Intelligent Key system s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the ignition switch to start the engine e The luggage room area is not included in the operating range but the Intelligent Key may function e Ifthe Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel inside the glove box door pocket or the corner of the interior com
398. s could affect the system function Immobilizer INTELLIGENT KEY if equipped Type A with panic alarm Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 Type B without panic alarm 1 Intelligent Key 2 2 Mechanical key inside the Intelligent Key 2 3 Key number plate Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS components As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NATS of your vehicle Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer Immobilizer A caution e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelligent Key inside e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when driving The Intelligent Key is a preci sion device with a built in transmitter To avoid damaging it please note the follow 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments ing The Intelligent Key is water resistant however wetting may damage the In telligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet immediately wipe until it is com pletely dry Do not bend drop or strike it against anothe
399. s in the ACC OFF or LOCK position Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle Parking brake reminder chime The parking brake reminder chime will sound if the vehicle is driven at more than 7 km h 4 MPH with the parking brake applied Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake Seat belt warning chime if equipped When the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km h 9 MPH the chime will sound unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The chime will continue to sound for about 90 seconds until the seat belt is fastened Stop Start System reminder buzzer if equipped for Europe The Stop Start System reminder buzzer will sound if the engine hood is opened for CVT and MT models or the driver s door is opened or the driver s seat belt is unfastened for MT models while the Stop Start System is activated NOTE e Be sure to close the engine hood When the engine hood is open the engine will be in the normal stopped state In this case restart the engine with the ignition switch for CVT and MT models e Be sure to check that the driver s seat belt is fastened and the driver s door is closed When the driver s seat belt is unfastened or the driver s door is open the engine will be in the normal stopped state In this case restart the engine with the ignition switch for MT model Idling Stop System reminder buzzer for Hong Kong The Idling Stop
400. s lap e Infants and children need special protection The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury e Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint system while riding in the vehicle Failure to use a child restraint system can result in serious injury or death Child restraint systems specially designed for infants and small children are available from several manufacturers When selecting any child restraint systems place your child in the child restraint system and check the various adjustments to be sure that the child restraint system is compatible with your child Always follow the manufacturer s in structions for installation and use NISSAN recommends that the child restraint system be installed in the rear seat Accord ing to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat rather than in the front seat Follow all of the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions for installation and use When purchasing a child restraint system be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraint systems in your vehicle For a front facing child restraint system check to mak
401. s on O Push ENTER 1 1 3 Turn MENU VOL dial JO Push ENTER Push ENTER _ Turn MENU VOL dial O Push ENTER ENTER NUMBER Push ENTER then turn MENU VOL dial 23 Push ENTER 123456789 Turn MENU VOL dial O Push ENTER NOTE In the above example the contact name JO and phone number 123456789 will be added 1 To insert special characters select the following character options A Alphabetic characters 1 2 Numerical characters A Latin characters and Symbol characters 2 Select the number then confirm your selection by pushing the ENTER button and then proceed likewise for every number 3 To correct an entry briefly push the button then enter the correct details To delete all characters push the 3 button for more than 1 second NOTE You can also store the name and the phone number in one of the six preset buttons on the audio unit for frequently used phone numbers Transferring an entry to the phone book You can also send a name contact from a connected cellular phone to the phone book using Bluetooth technology Screen display Briefly push AA button 1 Turn MENU VOL dial fod sd Cid 1 2 JOE PushENTER nee ee eee 4 68 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Push ENTER SAVED ADD NAME AA Push sack for the main screen o 1 The Bluetooth icon will blin
402. se sound Treble control Use this control to enhance or attenuate the treble Balance control Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume between the left and right speakers Fader control Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume between the front and rear speakers if equipped AUX VOL Auxiliary volume control Use this control to adjust the volume output from the auxiliary source SPD VOL Speed volume control This mode controls the volume output from the speakers automatically in relation to vehicle speed Adjusting the setting to 0 zero turns off the speed volume feature Clock setting Push the serur dial n to enter the setup menu screen and then select Clock Turn the enter dial the mode will change as follows Set Time lt gt ON OFF Clock Format lt gt Set Time Set Time Select Set Time then adjust the clock as follows The hour display will start flashing Turn the lenter dial to adjust the hour and push the enter dial The minute display will start flashing Turn the enter dial to adjust the minute and push the enter dial to finish the clock adjustment ON OFF Set the clock display to on or off when the audio unit is turned off If set in the ON position the clock will be displayed when the audio unit is turned off either by pushing the l dial or when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
403. self Maintenance requirements cscsesseeseeseseseesieseesesseeseesiessseeseeseeesees Scheduled maintenance General maintenance Where to go for service General maintenance 0 Explanation of general maintenance items Maintenance precautions ou Engine compartment check locations HR12DDR engine model HR12DE engine model HR15DE engine model K9K engine model Engine cooling system Checking engine coolant level Changing engine coolant Engine oil Checking engine oil level Changing engine oil and oil filter Protect environment Fuel filter diesel engine model Draining water Bleeding fuel system Drive belts Spark plugs gasoline engine model Platinum tipped spark plugs if equipped lridium tipped spark plugs if equipped Nickel tipped spark plugs if equipped Brakes Checking parking brake Checking foot brake pedal Brake booster sarni taen ennaa e a nde Brake fl id iiss iiias ian ia a ii eiria aard eii aa Clutch fluid if equipped Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF if equipped Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid if equipped Air cleaner filter Wiper blades Windshield wiper blades Rear window wiper blade if equipped Window washer fluid Battery Vehicle battery Remote controller battery Intelligent Key battery Fuses Engine compartment Passenger compartment Lights Headlights
404. servoir P 8 23 Engine drive belts P 8 16 Engine oil filler cap P 8 11 Engine oil dipstick P 8 11 0 18 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats niin io a A oD E htt Bd eae E 1 2 1 2 Rear seats 1 4 Head restraints if equipped 5 Armrest if equipped 1 6 Seat belts 1 7 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 7 Child safety 1 8 Pregnant women 1 9 Injured persons 1 9 Center mark on seat belts Three point type seat belts Two point type seat belts if equipped Seat belt maintenance 0 seesessecsessesseeseeneesecnteeseentenseenneenee hild restr ints znana a iia ainda alanine 1 13 Precautions on child restraint usage occ 1 13 Universal child restraints for front seat and rear seats for Europe and Ukraine ISOFIX child restraint system if equipped 1 17 Child restraint anchorage if equipped 1 18 Child restraint installation using ISOFIX 1 19 Child restraint installation using seat belt 1 21 Supplemental Restraint System SRS if equipped 1 25 Precautions on Supplemental Restraint System SRS 1 25 Supplemental air bag systems Pre tensioner seat belt system if equipped Repair and replacement procedure SEATS A WARNING e Do not drive and or ride in the vehicle with the seatback reclined This can be danger ous The shoulder belt will not be properly agains
405. set sound mode for CD play Turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counterclock wise The mode will change as follows OFF lt gt ENHANCE lt gt OFF If the audio settings mode is unchanged for approxi mately 5 seconds the audio settings mode will automatically return to the normal mode Clock display Turning on off the clock display To turn on or off the clock display perform the following operations 1 Push the MENU button while the audio system is on 2 Turn the VOLUME control dial until CLOCK appears on the display 3 Push the ENTER button CLOCK OFF or CLOCK ON is displayed 4 To turn on the clock display turn the VOLUME control dial till CLOCK ON is displayed To turn off the clock display turn the VOLUME control dial till CLOCK OFF is displayed and push ENTER Clock adjustment To adjust the time of the clock perform the following operations 1 Push the ENTER button while CLOCK ON is displayed The hour display will flash Turn the VOLUME control dial to adjust the hour 4 Push the ENTER button The minute display will flash 5 Turn the VOLUME control dial to adjust the minute 6 Push the ENTER button to complete the clock adjustment X Mute button Push the MUTE button to mute the audio system MUTE appears on the display To unmute use any one of the following options e Push the MUTE button again e Turn the VOLUME control dial e Push the CD FM or AM button
406. sioner seat belt system P 1 31 Air bag warning label if equipped SRS air bag The warning label A is located on the surface of the passenger s sun visor 1 28 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SRS front impact passenger air bag The warning label if equipped is located on the side of the passenger s side instrument panel This label warns you not to fit a rear facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat as such a restraint system used in this position could cause serious injury to the infant in case of air bag deployment during a collision In vehicles equipped with a front impact passenger air bag system use a rear facing child restraint system only on the rear seats Extreme Hazard Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it When installing a child restraint system in your vehicle always follow the child restraint system manufacturer s instructions for installation For additional information see Child restraints P 1 13 SRS air bag warning light SPA1097 The SRS air bag warning light displaying in the instrument panel monitors the circuits for the air bag systems pre tensioners and all related wiring When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position the SRS air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This indicates that the S
407. sition and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake pedal depressed e Do not shift to the N Neutral position while driving Doing so may result in an accident due to loss of engine braking Starting and driving 5 17 Starting vehicle 1 After starting the engine depress the clutch pedal to the floor and move the shift lever to the 1 1st or R Reverse position 2 Slowly depress the accelerator pedal releasing the clutch pedal and parking brake at the same time Shifting gear To change gears or when upshifting or downshifting fully depress the clutch pedal shift into the appropriate gear then slowly and smoothly release the clutch pedal To ensure smooth gear changes fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted a gear noise may be heard Transmission damage could occur Start the vehicle in the 1 1st position and shift to the 2 2nd 3 3rd 4 4th and 5 5th gear in sequence according to the vehicle speed You cannot shift directly from the 5 5th position into the R Reverse position First shift into the N Neutral position then shift into the R Reverse 5 18 Starting and driving position If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the R Reverse or 1 1st position shift to the N Neutral position
408. skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces After handling the battery or battery cap immediately wash your hands thoroughly If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin or clothing flush with water immediately for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Battery fluid is acid If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns Before handling the battery read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive A WARNING Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce battery life and in some cases lead to an explosion 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself Checking battery fluid level indicator Type A DIO137MA JVMOO65X Type B Check the fluid level in each cell The battery fluid level should be between the UPPER LEVEL Q and LOWER LEVEL 2 lines If it is necessary to add fluid add only demineralized distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening Do not overfill 1 Remove the cell plugs if equipped 2 Add demineralized distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL 1 line 3 Replace and tighten the cell plugs e Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of
409. specially in sharp turns and at low speeds 5 38 Starting and driving BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking ability at two wheels BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the foot brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the foot brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle The stopping distance will be longer If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assisted brakes will not function Braking will be harder A warnine Do not coast with the engine stopped When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and firmly you may hear a clicking noise and feel a slight pulsation This is normal and indicates that the Brake Assist System is operating Using brakes Avoid resting your foot on the foot brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brake linings pads faster and increase fuel consump tion To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or accelera
410. ss the vehicle seat cushion and seatback If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Child restraint anchorage P 1 18 If the child restraint is equipped with other anti rotation devices such as support legs use them instead of the top tether strap following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 1 20 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0757A Step 6 Test the child restraint before you place the child in it Push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is held securely in place Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 3 through 6 CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING SEAT BELT Installation on rear outboard seats seat belts without automatic locking mode A warnine e The three point type seat belt on your vehicle is not equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor e The direction of the child restraint system depends on the type of the child restraint system and the size of the child If your vehicle is equipped with rear seat adjustment note the following e Attach the child restraints after adjusting the rear seats to the upright position e Do not recline the rear seats with the child restraints attached to them Front
411. ssibly fatal illness to people or animals e Properly secure all luggage to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place lug gage higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unsecured luggage could cause personal injury EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide A warnine e Do not breathe exhaust gas it contains colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is dangerous It can cause unconsciousness or death e If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all windows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately e Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage e Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for an extended period of time Starting and driving 5 3 Keep the back door closed while driving otherwise exhaust gas could be drawn into the passenger compartment If you must drive with the back door open follow these precautions Open all the windows Turn the air recirculation mode off and set the fan speed control to the highest level to circulate the air If electrical wiring or other cable connec tions must pass to a trailer through the seal of the back door or the body follow the manufacturer s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage follow the manufacturer s recommendation to pre vent carbon monoxide entry into t
412. st from the interior trim plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manufac turer s recommendations Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens covers A caution e Never use benzine thinner or any similar material e Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather natural finish e Never use fabric protectors unless recom mended by the manufacturer e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may damage the lens covers Appearance and care 7 3 AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions e Hanging type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an i
413. station with the optimum reception conditions Program Information PI search Program Information PI search begins automati cally if no suitable station is found with the above automatic switching function The PI search function checks each RDS station with the same PI code During this time the sound is muted and PI SEARCH is displayed The PI search opera tion stops when a suitable station is found If no station is found once all the frequencies have been searched the radio returns to the previous frequency Enhanced Other Network EON data update This function also operates when the AF mode is off When EON data is being received this enables automatic retuning of other preset stations on the same network Also network linked services can be used The EON indicator turns on during the reception of RDS EON stations in the FM mode RDS functions Programme Service PS function station name display function When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or manual tuning the RDS data is received and the Program Service PS name is displayed Emergency broadcast interrupt function ALARM INTERRUPTION EBU SPEC FOR INFO When the radio receives PTY code 31 an emergency broadcast code the sound is inter rupted the emergency broadcast is heard and PTY31 ALARM is displayed The volume level at this time is the same as that for traffic announce ments Once the emergency broadcast is finished the unit i
414. stem 1 31 Switch Audio control steering wheel switch Defogger switch Fog light switch Front fog lights Hazard indicator flasher switch Headlight aiming control Headlight and turn signal switch Headlight switch Ignition switch Power door lock switch Turn signal switch Wiper and washer switch Tachometer neye BE DD a ain Theft warning system Three point type seat belts Three way catalyst Tire Changing tires and wheels Installing spare tire Preparing tools Spare tire Stowing damage Tire AGE Tire equipment Tire inflation pressure Tire placard Tire replacement indicato Tire wear and damage Tires and wheels Tire angle indicator Tires Flat UPS acess onasi inin pagadia Tire chains Tire rotation Types of tires Uniform tire quality grading Tonneau board Towing Towing precautions Towing recommended by NISSAN Towing your vehicle Trailer towing Trailer towing Transmission Automatic transmission fluid ATF 00 8 20 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT flutes on etna 8 21 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT scccssessssssesssecssscssecsssesseesssenss 5 14 Driving with CVT Continuously Variable Transmission 5 5 Driving with Manual Transmission 5 17 Manual transmission MT 5 5 Transmission shift lever lock release 5 16 Trip
415. stem can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants in the vehicle e Always use an appropriate child restraint system An improperly installed child re straint system could lead to serious injury or death in an accident e When the child restraint system is not in use keep it secured with the ISOFIX child restraint system if equipped or a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be seated in a child restraint system You should choose a child restraint system that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use In addition there are many types of child restraint systems available for larger children that should be used for maximum protection A caution Remember that a child restraint system left in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in a child restraint system UNIVERSAL CHILD RESTRAINTS FOR FRONT SEAT AND REAR SEATS for Europe and Ukraine When selecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind e Choose a child restraint that complies with the latest European safety standard ECE Regulation 44 04 e Place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Always follow all of the r
416. stem searches for the blank intervals between selections If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs the system may not stop in the desired or expected location Push the tuning switch for more than 1 5 seconds to fast forward or rewind through the track CD USB MEMORY CARE AND CLEANING SAA0451 e Handle a disc by its edges Never touch the surface of the disc Do not bend the disc e Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used e To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use e A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated USB memory device if equipped e Do not touch the terminal portion of the USB memory device e Do not place heavy objects on the USB memory device e Do not store the USB memory device in highly humid locations Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 63 e Do not expose the USB memory device to direct sunlight e Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory device Refer to the USB memory device Owner s Manual for the details CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or a car phone in your vehicle be
417. stronger fre quency if the radio signal becomes weak When the REG mode is enabled the audio unit will maintain and maintain the station which is broadcasting local regional programmes e To change the display language briefly push the ENTER button when LANGUAGE appears on the display then turn the MENU VOL dial clockwise or counterclockwise to select the appropriate lan guage setting ENGLISH lt DUTCH lt FRENCH lt SPANISH lt GERMAN ITALIAN amp PORTUGUESE LW MW FM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD CHANGER ENGLISH After selecting the preferred language push the ENTER button to exit the menu To configure the SPEED volume and BEEP settings perform the following procedure 1 Push the MENU button 2 Turn the Volume control dial clockwise or counter clockwise The display message will change as follows SPEED VOL CLOCK BEEP e When SPEED VOL appears on the display briefly push the ENTER button then turn the VOLUME control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the level of the volume Adjusting the setting to O zero turns off the speed volume feature Increasing the speed volume setting results in the audio volume increasing more rapidly with vehicle speed Push the ENTER button again to save the setting e When BEEP appears on the display briefly push the ENTER button and then turn the VOLUME control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to switch the beep sound on or off Push the ENTER button
418. suitable conditions are present as described under NORMAL OPERATION The engine will then be prevented from automatically Starting and driving 5 23 stopping during the same journey e Whenever the Stop Start System is disengaged the indicator light on the Stop Start System OFF switch illuminates In this condition the Stop Start System cannot prevent unnecessary fuel con sumption exhaust emissions or noise during your journey NOTE The following messages may be displayed for a few seconds in the vehicle information display when the Stop Start System OFF switch is pressed More information about the Stop Start System can be checked using the Settings menu About the display see Vehicle information display P 2 20 5 24 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM if equipped except for Europe Australia and New Zealand A warnine e The VDC system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent acci dents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or due to careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully e Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock absorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN approved or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly This could a
419. sure to observe the following cautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the Engine Control System and other electronic parts A caution e Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the Electronic Control Module e Keep the antenna wire at least 20 cm 8 in away from the Engine Control harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harnesses e Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer e Connect the ground wire from the radio chassis to the body e For details consult a NISSAN dealer NOTE For Europe For further information visit the NISSAN web site www nissan europe com Select your coun try from the list and go to the SERVICES menu If not available on the web site contact a NISSAN dealer 4 64 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system Bluetooth HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM if equipped for model without navigation system A warnine e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation e If a conversation in a moving vehicle re quires you to take notes pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so A caution To avoid draining the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine NOTE Wireless LAN Wi Fi and the Bluetooth func tions share the
420. t Sonar parking sensor system Spare tire Spark plugs Speed limiter n D g om 2 n ak ka ak gS as a LT AINOOONNAKRANND e fi i He ek ack 1 3 3407 a aa 7 oOw 2 000 Speed limiter display and indicators Speed limiter indicator for Europe Speed limiter malfunction Speed limiter operations Speedometer Starting Before starting engine JUMP Starting Precautions when starting and driving Push starting Starting engine model wit Key SYStOM ssececssssescessseesessseeecessseesesneecesssnecessseeeeessnsess 5 10 Starting engine model without Intelligent Key system Starting vehicle Steering Electric power steering SYStEM eseee 5 37 Steering lOCK esses sesssesssessseesseiense 5 6 5 7 Steering lock release malfunction indicator 2 20 Steering wheel 3 21 Steering wheel switch for audio controls 4 63 Stop Start System 5 21 Stopping vehicle 6 2 Storages 2 44 Stowing damaged tire and tools 6 6 Sun visors 2 45 Sunshade 2 42 Super lock system Supplemental air bag SYStEMS sssse s1111rrssesee1 1 29 Supplemental curtain side impact air AQ SYSUSIM ioina nna na sree Siseee ver sonechsedctesuteegtees 1 31 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 30 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Supplemental side impact air bag sy
421. t it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some states and provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure that they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s in structions Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chains must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains In addition drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected Tire chains must be installed onl
422. t and rear type When the lock button 1 is pushed in the passen gers windows cannot be operated To cancel the passengers windows lock push the lock button 4 again Passenger s window switch SIC2311 The passenger s switch can control its corresponding window When the passengers windows lock button on the driver s switch is pushed in the passenger s switch cannot be operated Automatic function JVIO037X Front and rear type Automatic function is available for the switch that has an A mark on its surface The automatic function enables a window to fully open or close if equipped without holding the switch down or up To fully open the window push the power window switch down to the second detent and release the switch To fully close the window if equipped pull the power window switch up to the second detent and release the switch The switch does not have to be held during window operation To stop the window open close operation during the automatic function push down or pull up the switch in opposite directions Window timer if equipped The window timer allows the window switch to be operated for 15 minutes even if the ignition switch is turned off and the key is removed The window timer will be cancelled when the corresponding door is opened or the preset time has expired Auto reverse function if equipped A warnine There is a small distance just before the closed p
423. t injuring yourself and others After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal push the shift lever button and move the shift lever out of the P Park position If the ignition switch is the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the shift lever is in any positions other than the P Park position the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position If the ignition switch cannot be the LOCK position perform the following steps 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position while depressing the foot brake pedal 3 Move the shift lever to the P Park position 4 Model with Intelligent Key system Place the ignition switch in the OFF position Model without Intelligent Key system Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position P Park Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped and move the shift lever into the P Park position Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first and then move the shift lever into the P Park position R Reverse Use this position to back up Make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position N Neutral Neither the forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to the N Neutral position and restart a stalled engine while the vehi
424. t lock release button 5 Place the ignition switch to the ON position to release the steering wheel lock The vehicle may be moved by pushing to the desired location If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P Park position have a NISSAN dealer check the AT system as soon as possible 5 14 Starting and driving Fail safe When the fail safe operation occurs the AT will be locked in third gear If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subse quent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case turn the ignition switch off and wait for 3 seconds Then turn the ignition switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary DRIVING WITH CONTINUOUSLY VARI ABLE TRANSMISSION CVT The Continuously Variable Transmission CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment A WARNING Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control A caution e Th
425. t the body In an accident you and your passengers could be thrown into the shoulder belt and receive neck or other serious injuries You and your passengers could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious injuries e For the most effective protection while the vehicle is in motion the seatback should be upright Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly See Seat belts P 1 7 A caution When adjusting the seat positions be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or damages SSS0133A FRONT SEATS A WARNING Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation Manual seat adjustment A warnine After adjusting a seat gently shake the seat to confirm that the seat is locked securely If the seat is not locked securely it may move suddenly and could cause the loss of control of the vehicle 1 2 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Forward and backward 1 Pull up the adjusting lever 2 Slide the seat to the desired position 3 Release the adjusting lever to lock the seat in position Reclining 1 Pull up the adjusting lever 2 Tilt the seatback to the desired position 3 Release the adjusting lever to lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows the adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain
426. t the high temperature sensor in the engine coolant system is operational A caution If the high temperature warning light illuminates while the engine is running it may indicate the engine temperature is extremely high Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible If the vehicle is overheated continuing vehicle operation may seriously damage the engine For the immediate action required see If your vehicle overheats P 6 11 KEY Intelligent Key system warning light if equipped After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off This light illuminates or blinks as follows e The light blinks in yellow when the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle for model without vehicle information display e The light blinks in green when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power Replace the battery with a new one for model without vehicle information display See Battery P 8 24 e The light illuminates in yellow when it warns of a malfunction with the electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent Key system If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the engine is stopped it may be impossible to free the steering lock or to start the engine If the light
427. ta 47 SUMON Zaren Conan MATI NI BROJ SUBJEKTA MBS 080006703 Pod punom odgovorno u izjavijujemo da je R amp TT oprema undar DB So riety GON al RT Wt OPIS GP REM aera y TIESKA OZNAKA OPREME TWRTAOO MARKETIN KOG IME GPREME TARTA BRGIZVObAC OPREME ALPS BLESRIC COLTE eeann sukladna s bitnim zahtjevima iz lanka 98 stavak 3 Zakona o telekomunikacijama odnosno primjenjenim normama insvonterty wi gtesirqunrma at arias 3A pa 3 Ae Tow anisan io apat ENIDA 320 3 VIA 06 ENH 230 2 VI 3 t 2000 94 ENB 489 5 V1 6 2 2006 097 BN30t 4eG 3 VIA 2092 08 EN 69065 2DUZ Amd 1 2008 aaueve ty 51883 exgiup TROM NYSSIN ijesa i daom wane aa rime JVT0011X Technical information 9 13 NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS immobili FOR INDONESIA NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS immobili zer Remote keyless entry system if equipped i IZJAVA O SUKLAD t H iads tanta 98 siavak Zakona o tei NA 2200 RENAULT NISSAN HRVATSKA dme O ieee Gees E E 14619 POSTEL 2010 ae 2425 Pod punom odgovomos y izjavijujeme da je RITT oprema CalsonieKanset Corp 01737 POSTEL 2007 1708 JVT0015X sukladna s bitnim zahtjevima fz lanka 98 stavak 3 Zakona 0 JVT0013X telakomunikacljame odnosno primfenjenim normama FOR THAILAND This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement EN enoes 2002 ER 04 B94 VIS 2004 EN Leg 4889 V4 4 4 2002 EN a00 95044 vt 2
428. tch fluid reservoir Right Hand Drive RHD model 3 Engine oil filler cap 4 Air cleaner 5 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir Left Hand Drive LHD model 6 Fuse fusible link box pumn iraa EM PARS ocaleoa JA y aaa Ly O Zo _ _ JVC0452X 7 Window washer fluid reservoir 8 Engine oil dipstick 9 Radiator cap 10 Battery 11 Engine coolant reservoir For Manual Transmission MT Model Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 HR15DE ENGINE MODEL JVC0118X 1 Engine drive belts 7 Window washer fluid reservoir 2 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir 8 Engine oil dipstick Right Hand Drive RHD model 9 Radiator cap 3 Engine oil filler cap 10 Battery 4 Air cleaner 11 Engine coolant reservoir 5 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir For Manual Transmission MT Model Left Hand Drive LHD model 6 Fuse fusible link box 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself K9K ENGINE MODEL ON Oa PON Brake and clutch fluid reservoir 9 Air cleaner 10 Fuse Fusible link holders Priming pump Window washer fluid reservoir Engine drive belts Engine oil filler cap Engine oil dipstick SDI2711 Engine coolant reservoir Battery ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM A WARNING e Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator Wait until the eng
429. te in certain side collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper supplemental side impact air bag system operation Supplemental curtain side impact air bag system if equipped The supplemental curtain side impact air bag is located at the roof rails The supplemental curtain side impact air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact It may not inflate in certain side collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper supplemental curtain side impact air bag system operation PRE TENSIONER SEAT BELT SYSTEM if equipped A WARNING e The pre tensioner seat belt cannot be re used after activation It must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit e If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but the pre tensioner is not activated be sure to have the pre tensioner system checked and if necessary replaced by a NISSAN dealer e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre tensioner seat belt system This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre tensioner seat belt system e Work around or on the pre tensioner seat belt system should be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wiring should not be modified or disconne
430. tem can vary depending on the Bluetooth version of the device PPI 144 Fast Forward Rewind buttons Fast Forward Fast Reverse When the a button is pushed continuously the track will be played at high speed When the button is released the track will be played at normal playing speed Track up down By pushing the gt 1 144 button once the track will be skipped forward to the next track or backward to the beginning of the current played track Push the pi a button more than once to skip through the tracks DISP DISP button If the song contains music information tags ID3 tags the title of the played song will be displayed If tags are not provided the display will not show any messages When the ose button is pushed repeatedly further information about the song can be displayed along with the song title By pushing and holding the ois button the display will show a detailed overview which after a few seconds will return to the main display Push the o1sp button briefly to return to the main display immediately Radio Broadcast data system RBDS The RBDS is a system through which encoded digital information is transmitted by FM radio stations in addition to the normal FM radio broadcasting The RBDS provides information services such as station n
431. tem warning light may blink in yellow on the meter even if the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle This is not a malfunction To stop the warning light from blinking touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears on the Vehicle informa tion display or the Intelligent Key system warning light in the meter is blinking in green replace the battery as soon as possible See Battery P 8 24 STARTING ENGINE model without Intelligent Key system GASOLINE ENGINE 1 2 3 Apply the parking brake Depress the foot brake pedal Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model Move the shift lever to the P Park or N Neutral position The starter is designed to operate only when the shift lever is in the proper position Manual Transmission MT model Move the shift lever to the N Neutral position and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine The starter is designed to not operate unless the clutch pedal is depressed Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition switch to the START position Immediately release the ignition switch when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedures If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather depress the accelerator pedal
432. th again The alarm is activated by e Operating the door without using the Intelligent Key system e Opening the hood How to stop alarm e The alarm will stop by unlocking a door with the door handle request switch or UNLOCK gQ button 2 on the Intelligent Key e The alarm will stop when the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position If the system does not operate as described above have it checked by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN ANTI THEFT SYSTEM NATS The NISSAN Anti Theft System NATS will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered NATS key If the engine does not start using the registered NATS key it may be due to interference caused by e Another NATS key e Automated toll road device e Automated payment device e Other devices that transmit similar signals Start the engine using the following procedure 1 Remove any items that may be causing the interference away from the NATS key 2 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 again Start the engine Repeat the steps above until all possible inter ferences are eliminated If this procedure allows the engine to start NISSAN recommends placing the registered NATS key sepa rate from other de
433. th the Electronic Stability Program ESP system on for most driving conditions When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the ESP system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn Starting and driving 5 27 the ESP system off To turn off the ESP system push the ESP OFF switch located on the lower side of the instrument panel The amp indicator light will illuminate Push the ESP OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system 5 28 Starting and driving SPEED LIMITER if equipped for Europe The speed limiter allows you to set the desired vehicle speed limit While the speed limiter is activated the driver can perform normal braking and acceleration but the vehicle will not exceed the set speed A WARNING e Always observe posted speed limits Do not set the speed over them e Always confirm the setting status of the speed limiter on the vehicle information display and instrument panel When the speed limiter is on the cruise control cannot be operated SPEED LIMITER OPERATIONS Except for HR12DDR engine model The speed limiter can be set between 30 km h and 170 km h or 20 MPH and 105 MPH For HR12DDR engine model for MT model The speed limiter can be set between 30 km h and 180 km h or 20 MPH and 112 MPH For HR12DDR engine model for
434. the actual 1 m 3 ft distance on the hill is the place A Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it appears Backing up near a projecting object The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in the display However the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 3 Backing up behind a projecting object JVH0523X The position is shown further than the position in the display However the position is actually at the same distance as the position A The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position if the object projects over the actual backing up course MIRROR DISPLAY OPERATION SAA3341 Rearview monitor on off The rearview monitor is displayed automatically when the shift lever is moved to the R Reverse position To turn off the rearview monitor push the POWER ON OFF button The indicator light will illuminate in orange To return to the display the rearview monitor push the POWER ON OFF button A again or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The indicator light will illuminate in green To set the rearview monitor to be always not displayed push and hold the POWER ON OFF button for 12 seconds or more when the shift lever is in the R Reverse position The indicator light
435. the announcement is tuned in and the volume increases to the set level Once the traffic announcement is finished the unit returns to the source which was set before the traffic announcement started and the volume returns to the previous level For EON stations the radio is interrupted by another EON station with traffic announcements The traffic announcement interrupt mode is cancelled if the TA NEWS button is pushed during a traffic announcement The TA mode returns to the standby mode and the audio unit returns to the previous source News mode When the NEWS button or the TA NEWS button is pushed for longer than 2 seconds in the FM mode the news function is activated NEWS is displayed for 3 seconds and the NEWS indicator appears on the display When the news function is activated the radio Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system 4 61 receives a news code from the FM broadcasting news station and the play mode will be interrupted Once the news broadcast is finished the unit returns to the previous mode In some countries or regions this service is not available or the signal is too weak to be received 1 News standby mode e The news standby mode can be activated in the FM or CD mode e A news interruption will be announced and NEWS will be displayed when the radio detects the news code from the tuned station or EON stations The display will then change to the PS name of the interrupti
436. the TA mode is turned off and the TA indicator turns off The following function operates when the TA mode is on e Traffic announcement interrupt function When a traffic announcement is received the announcement is tuned in and the volume increases to the set level Once the traffic announcement is finished the unit returns to the source which was set before the traffic announcement started and the volume returns to the previous level For EON stations the radio is interrupted by another EON station with traffic announcements The traffic announcement interrupt mode is cancelled if the TA button is pushed during a traffic announcement The TA mode returns to the standby mode and the audio unit returns to the previous source News mode When the NEWS button is pushed for longer than 2 seconds in the FM mode the news function is activated NEWS is displayed for 3 seconds and the NEWS indicator appears on the display When the news function is activated the radio receives a news code from the FM broadcasting news station and the play mode will be interrupted Once the news broadcast is finished the unit returns to the previous mode In some countries or regions this service is not available or the signal is too weak to be received 1 News standby mode e The news standby mode can be activated in the FM or CD mode e A news interruption will be announced and NEWS will be displayed when the radio detects
437. the middle of the shoulder It must not rest against the neck e Be sure that the seat belt is not twisted in any way e Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is secured by trying to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down after adjustment The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder To adjust pull the release button 4 and move the shoulder belt anchor to the proper position 2 so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder Release the button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position Unfastening seat belts Push the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically retracts 1 10 Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Belt hook Hook the seat belt at the belt hook when folding down the rear seat NOTE Before folding down the rear seatback make sure that the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the belt clip Also make sure that the seat belt does not get caught in the seatback when folding down the rear seat Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement e When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor e When the vehicle slows down rapidly To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation by grasping the shoulder belt and pulling forward quickly The retractor shou
438. the tire pressure does not increase to 180 kPa 26 psi within 10 minutes the tire may be seriously damaged and the tire cannot be repaired with this tire repair kit Contact a NISSAN dealer 7 When the tire pressure is reaching the specified pressure or is at the minimum of 180 kPa 26 psi turn the air compressor off Remove the power plug from the power outlet and quickly remove the hose from the tire valve Attach the protective cap and valve cap A caution Leave the tire sealant bottle on the bottle holder in order to prevent sealant from spilling out 8 Immediately drive the vehicle for 10 minutes or 3 km 2 miles at a speed of 80 km h 50 MPH or less 9 After driving make sure that the air compressor switch is in the OFF position then screw the hose securely onto the tire valve Check the tire pressure with the pressure gauge The temporary repair is completed if the tire pressure does not drop Make sure the pressure is adjusted to the pressure that is specified on the tire placard before driving 10 If the tire pressure drops repeat the steps from 5 If the pressure drops again or under 130 kPa 19 psi the tire cannot be repaired with this tire repair kit Contact a NISSAN dealer A caution Do not reuse the tire sealant bottle or the hose For a new tire sealant bottle and hose see a NISSAN dealer After repairing tire See a NISSAN dealer for tire repair replacement as soon as possible JU
439. tic Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission model or the clutch pedal Manual Transmission model the ignition switch position will change as follows Push once to change to ACC Push two times to change to ON Push three times to change to OFF Push four times to return to ACC Open or close any door to return to LOCK when in the OFF position The indicator light A on the ignition switch illumi nates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position 5 8 Starting and driving LOCK position The ignition switch and steering lock can only be locked at this position The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key ACC position The electrical accessory power activates at this position without the engine turned on ON position The ignition system and the electrical accessory power activate at this position without the engine turned on OFF position The engine is turned off with the steering wheel unlocked A WARNING Never push the ignition switch to the OFF position while driving The steering wheel may lock and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle resulting in serious vehicle damage or personal injury A caution Do not leave the vehicle for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position and the engine is not running Th
440. tion When the buzzer sounds and the warning display appears be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key Type B model without dot matrix display A chime or beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and a warning light illuminates or blinks See the troubleshooting guide on the next page and Warning indicator lights and audible reminders P 2 12 Intelligent Key system warning light Hah P position selecting warning light A caution When the chime or beep sounds or the warning light illuminates or blinks be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key P Fi S Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE Symptom Action to take Type A The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously or for a few sec onds Type B The P position selecting warning light in the meter and the inside warning chime sounds continuously Automatic Transmission and Continuously Variable Transmission models When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine When shifting the shift lever to the P Park position Automatic Transmission and Continuously Variable Transmission models The inside warning chime sounds con tinuously When opening the driver s door to get The inside warning chime sounds con out of the vehicle tinuously Type A The NO KEY warning appears on the display the outside chime sounds 3 t
441. tion could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the foot brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly Driving uphill When starting on a steep grade it is sometimes difficult to operate both the brake and clutch for Manual Transmission model Apply the parking brake to hold the vehicle Do not slip the clutch When ready to start slowly release the parking brake while depressing the accelerator pedal and releasing the clutch pedal Driving downhill The engine braking action is effective for controlling the vehicle while descending hills For Manual Trans mission MT model the shift lever should be placed in the lower speed position prior to descending For Automatic Transmission AT model the 1 or 2 position should be selected For Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model the L position should be selected BRAKE ASSIST if equipped When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with lig
442. tion switch is pushed to the OFF position may continue to be displayed e When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momenta rily change the display Outside air temperature 444438 C if tae Axia equipped 00 c DE F ICY JVI0135X Type A Paes OUTSIDE TEMP F ICY 00 c Si o aR 4 JVI0012X Type B The outside air temperature is displayed in C in the range of 30 to 60 C The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature If the outside air tem perature is 3 C or below the warning ICY is displayed on the screen The outside temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat wind directions and other driving condi tions The display may differ from the actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards Accumulated time and current saved fuel consumption ml mililiter by Idling Stop System for Hong Kong Fa FIR RYJ S HR 00 00 00 SUR 000000 ml Si o aR 4 JVI0694X Type A FA FEIR RYJ ral SERRAR 000000 ml DE JVIO695X Type B The switch is used in the setting mode to select and decide a menu of Type A and B Accumulated time Type A The Accumulated time mode shows the accumulated time Idling S
443. tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be balanced as required SPARE TIRE Conventional spare tire A standard tire the same size as the road wheels is supplied with your vehicle Temporary use spare tire if equipped Spare tire label if equipped Observe the following precautions if the spare tire must be used otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident A caution e The spare tire should be used only for emergency It should be replaced by the standard tire at the first opportunity Maintenance and do it yourself 8 43 e Drive carefully while the spare tire is in stalled e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving e Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 80 km h 50 MPH e Do not use tire chains on a spare tire Tire chains will not fit properly on the spare tire and may cause damage to the vehicle e Tire tread of the spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear except for India e Because the spare tire is smaller than the original tire ground clearance is reduced To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught e Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles e Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time EMERGENCY
444. title as follows Track time gt Artist gt Album Folder name gt Track time Track details By pushing and holding the ois button the display will show a detailed overview and after a few seconds it will return to the main display Push the o1sp button briefly to return to the main display immediately 4 42 Monitor Heater and air conditioner and audio system iPod player operation Connecting iPod The USB outlet connector is located in the center console Open the USB outlet connector lid and connect the iPod cable to the USB connector The battery of the iPod is charged while the device is connected to the vehicle Depending on the version of the iPod the display on the iPod shows a NISSAN or Accessory Attached screen when the connection is completed When the iPod is connected to the vehicle the iPod music library can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries A caution e Do not force the iPod cable into the USB port Inserting the iPod cable tilted or upside down into the port may damage the iPod cable and the port Make sure that the iPod cable is connected correctly into the USB port Some iPod cables come with a mark as a guide Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction before inserting the iPod cable e Do not locate objects near the iPod cable to p
445. to movement of fuel in the tank The fuel gauge A and the low fuel warning light in the meter if equipped blink when the fuel level in the tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient before the gauge reads 0 For Type C The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position The gauge may move slightly during braking turning accelerating or going up and down hills due to movement of fuel in the tank The low fuel warning light in the meter illuminates when the fuel level in the tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient before the gauge reads 0 The arrow ffi indicates the fuel filler lid is located on the left side of the vehicle A caution Refuel before the gauge reads the empty 0 position AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT CON TINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT POSITION INDICATOR if equipped JVC0031X Example The Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT position indicator in dicates the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position ENGINE START OPERATION INDICATOR if equipped JVC0030X Example The engine start operation indicator A appears when the shift lever is in the P Park position This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed You can start the engine directly in
446. to the warning check mode Push the switch to select other menus ALERT 7 5 J The alert menu can be set to notify the following items e TIMER ess Select this submenu to specify when the time to rest indicator activates e ICY CREE Select this submenu to display the low outside temperature warning To return to the top page of the setting mode select BACK Ra TIME SETTING CURRENT TIME 833 e CURRENT TIME 337 609 Adjust the date and time hour and minute of the clock on the meter TIME SETTING Birthday and Anniversary ase The birthday and anniversary message reminds you of the anniversary or a birthday the driver should remember e BIRTHDAY 394 8 Select this submenu to adjust the date of the Birthday message e ANNIVERSARY 88 Select this submenu to adjust the date of the Anniversary message Select the display image to set the desired display image of the Anniversary message 2 30 Instruments and controls e WEDDING DAY x222 Select this submenu to adjust the date of the wedding day message MAINTENANCE 422 The maintenance intervals of the following items can be set or reset for the reminders e OlL ryyv 4i Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for changing the engine oil e FILTER 44343 Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter e TIRE 4 Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for replacing tire
447. ton then push the scrolling up down switch to scroll through the preset buttons for the stored phone numbers To confirm the selection push the g button to make the call e make a call via voice dialling by pushing the button for more than 2 seconds then say the voice tag clearly HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM Type B TUNE MENU 206 JVHO519X Buttons 1 Phone button 2 A Z button 3 ENTER dial 4 SETUP button Microphone The microphone is located near the map light A warnine While driving using the cellular phone is ex tremely dangerous because it significantly im pairs your concentration and diminishes your reaction capabilities to sudden changes on the road and it may lead to a fatal accident This applies to all phone call situations such as when receiving an incoming call during a phone conversation when calling through the phone book search etc A caution Certain country or region jurisdictions prohibit the use of the cellular phone in the car without hands free support This chapter provides information about the NISSAN hands free phone system using a Bluetooth connec tion Bluetooth is a wireless radio communication stan dard This system offers a hands free feature for your cellular phone to enhance driving comfort In order to use your cellular phone with the Bluetooth of the audio system the cellular phone must first be set up Once it has been set up the hands
448. top System has been operated since the last reset Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The saved fuel is also reset at the same time Current saved fuel consumption Type A The Current saved fuel consumption mode shows the current saved fuel consumption by Idling Stop System has been operated since the last reset Accumulated time Type B The Accumulated time mode shows the accumulated time Idling Stop System has been operated since the time the ignition switch was turned ON Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The saved fuel is also reset at the same time Current saved fuel consumption Type B The Current saved fuel consumption mode shows the current saved fuel consumption by Idling Stop System has been operated since the time the ignition switch was turned ON See Idling Stop System for Hong Kong P 5 19 Setting 5272 gt F7I L gt ABR gt AYFTFVYA gt DIPPYAIL BRE oE JVIO136X Type A gt SKIP gt ALERT gt TIME SETTING gt MAINTENANCE gt OPTIONS MENTER NEXT JVI0013X Type B example Setting cannot be made while driving A mes sage Setting can only be operated when stopped is also displayed on the vehicle information display The J switch and switch are used in the setting mode to select and set a menu Instruments and controls 2 29 SKIP x Push the J switch to move
449. trol P 4 63 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System con trol P 4 64 Meters and gauges P 2 6 Driver s front impact air bag Horn P 1 25 P 2 40 13 Headlight fog light and turn signal switch P 2 33 14 Outside rearview mirror control switch P 3 22 15 Fuse box P 8 28 16 Glove box P 2 44 17 USB AUX connector P 4 41 P 4 48 18 Power outlet P 2 43 19 Cup holder P 2 44 20 Shift lever Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model P 5 14 Manual Transmission MT model P 5 17 21 Push button ignition switch model with Intelli gent Key system P 5 6 22 Tilting steering wheel lock lever P 3 21 23 Ignition switch model without Intelligent Key system steering lock P 5 5 24 Hood lock release handle P 3 19 25 Fuel filler lid release handle P 3 20 26 Idling Stop OFF switch P 5 19 27 Headlight aiming control switch P 2 34 if equipped Illustrated table of contents O 11 METERS AND GAUGES JVC0453X Type A 1 Speedometer P 2 8 2 Trip odometer reset switch trip computer mode switch P 2 8 3 Clock adjusting knob P 2 42 4 Automatic Transmission AT position indicator P 2 10 P 5 11 5 Odometer twin trip odometer trip computer P 2 8 clock P 2 42 6 Fuel gauge P 2 10 if equipped 0 12 Illustrated table of contents Type B Tachometer P 2 10 7 Fuel gauge P 2 10 Speedometer P 2 8 if equipp
450. turn the VOLUME control knob Turn the knob clockwise to make the sound louder Turn the knob counterclockwise to make the sound quieter MENU MENU button To change the audio settings push the menu button to select the mode while the CD or radio is on Push the menu button until the desired mode appears on the display BASS TREBLE CLOCK BASS Push the SEEK TRACK button or TUNE FF REW FOLDER button 4 or adjust the audio settings gt FADE gt BALANCE gt BEEP gt W or WV to Bass to decrease to increase TREBLE to decrease to increase FADE F to front fade R to rear fade BALANCE R to right balance L to left balance Once the audio settings are set to the desired level push the mewu button until the radio or CD display appears If no action is performed for approximately 5 seconds the audio settings mode will automatically return to the normal mode To turn the beep sound off or on push the SEEK TRACK button or YW or TUNE FF REW FOLDER button 4 or W until the desired mode is displayed This turns on or off the beep sound when audio buttons are pushed Clock display To display the clock on the screen perform the following operations 1 Push the menu button repeatedly until CLOCK ON or OFF appears on the display while the audio system is on 2 Push the SEEK TRACK button TUNE FF REW FOLDER butto
451. turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before trying again If the starter motor does not start by pushing the ignition switch push the ignition switch to the OFF position before trying again 12 After the engine is started carefully disconnect the jumper cables in the opposite sequence from that illustrated 13 Remove and dispose of the cloth as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid 14 Replace the vent caps if removed NOTE 6 10 For model with Stop Start Idling Stop System use the special battery that is enhanced in regard to the charge discharge capacity and life performance Avoid using a non special battery for the Stop Start Idling Stop system as this may cause early In case of emergency deterioration of the battery or a malfunction of the Stop Start Idling Stop system For the battery it is recommended to use Genuine NISSAN parts For more informa tion contact a NISSAN dealer For model with Stop Start Idling Stop System it may take some time until Stop Start Idling Stop System activates when the battery is replaced or the battery term inal is disconnected for extended periods and then reconnected PUSH STARTING Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing the vehicle caution Automatic Transmission AT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT Manual Trans mission MT model cannot be started by pushing Attempting to d
452. u are wearing the seat belt properly adjusted and sitting upright and well back in the seat chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive even if your seating position includes the supplemental air bag systems SSS0134A SSS0136A Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 A WARNING Seatbelts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis chest and shoulders as applicable wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided Ser ious injury may occur if a seat belt is not worn properly Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible around the hips not the waist A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant it is danger ous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant s lap Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts Never wear seat belts inside out Belts should not be worn with straps twisted Doing so may reduce their effectiveness Seatbelts should be adjusted as firmly as possible consistent with comfort to provide the protection
453. uding oil filter and CVT model for India and CVT model for India ACEA A1 B1 A3 B3 A3 B4 A5 B5 C2 or C3 2 3 2 L for Europe and CVT 2 7 8 qt for Europe and Except for Europe Ukraine and South Africa model for India CVT model for India Genuine NISSAN engine oil 2 HR12DDR including oil filter 3 9L 3 3 8 qt API grade SL SM or SN 2 excluding oil filter 3 7L 3 1 4 qt ILSAC grade GF 3 GF 4 or GF 5 2 including oil filter 4 4L 3 7 8 qt Diesel engine K9K Genuine NISSAN engine oil 2 excluding oil filter 4 2L 3 3 4 qt ACEA B1 B5 2 Cooling system including reservoir tank capacity 0 7 L HBIDDR MT model 5 4L 4 3 4 qt CVT model 5 9 L 5 1 4 qt MT model for Thailand Brunei Sin gapore and Pakistan 5 7 L 5 qt MT model except for Thailand Brunei HR12DE Singapore and Pakistan 5 5L 4 7 8 qt AT model 55L 4 7 8 at Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality 4 CVT model for Thailand 5 8L 5 1 8 qt CVT model except for Thailand 5 6L 4 7 8 qt URO MT model 5 6 L 4 7 8 qt AT model 6 0 L 5 1 4 qt Cooling system including reservoir tank capacity 1 0 L KOK MT model 7 6 L 6 3 4 qt Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF 5 Except for Thailand India Brunei and Hong Kong Cy 3 Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 6 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid For Thailand India Brunei and Hong Kong Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 3 7 ae Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission F
454. ugs as frequently as the conventional type of spark plugs These spark plugs are designed to last much longer than the conventional type of spark plug A caution e Do not reuse the iridium tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re gapping e Always replace with the recommended ir idium tipped spark plugs NICKEL TIPPED SPARK PLUGS if equipped It is not necessary to replace the nickel tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type of spark plugs These spark plugs are designed to last much longer than the conventional type of spark plug A caution e Do not reuse the nickel tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re gapping e Always replace with the recommended nick el tipped spark plugs 8 18 Maintenance and do it yourself BRAKES CHECKING PARKING BRAKE Lever type a SDI1447A From the released position pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly If the number of clicks is out of the range listed see a NISSAN dealer For Thailand Indonesia Singapore Hong Kong Brunei and Pakistan 9 to 10 clicks Pulling force 196 N 20 kg 44 Ib For India 8 to 9 clicks for model with ABS or K9K engine model 9 to 10 clicks for model without ABS Pulling force 196 N 20 kg 44 Ib For Australia and New Zealand 11 to 12 clicks Pulling force 196 N 20 kg 44 Ib Except for Thailand Indonesia Singapore Hong Kong Brunei India Australia New Zealand and Pakistan 8 to 9 clicks Pulling force 1
455. urely onto the tire valve Make sure that the pressure release valve is securely tightened Make sure that the air com pressor switch is in the OFF O position and then insert its power plug into the power outlet in the vehicle In case of emergency 6 7 SCE0871 6 6 Push the ignition switch to the ACC position Then turn the compressor switch to the ON position and inflate the tire up to the pressure that is specified on the tire placard affixed to the driver s side center pillar if possible or to the minimum of 180 kPa 26 psi Turn the air compressor off briefly in order to check the tire pressure with the pressure gauge If the tire is inflated to higher than the specified pressure adjust the tire pressure by releasing air with the pressure release valve The cold tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the driver s side center pillar A caution e An incomplete connection between the hose and tire valve causes air leakage or sealant scatter e Do not stand directly beside the damaged tire while it is being inflated because of the risk of the rupture If there are any cracks or bumps turn the compressor off immedi ately 6 8 In case of emergency e There is a possibility that the pressure reaches 600 kPa while the tire is being inflated but it is normal condition Usually the pressure will drop in about 30 seconds e Do not operate the compressor for more than 10 minutes If
456. urn the key to the rear of the vehicle 2 For unlocking other doors use the power door lock switch See Locking with power door lock switch P 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the front doors push the inside lock knob to the lock position 4 and then close the door while pulling the door handle To lock the rear doors push the inside lock knob to the lock position and then close the door A caution e When locking the doors using the inside lock knob be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle e When the key is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the inside lock knob will not lock the door s To unlock pull the inside lock knob to the unlock position When the doors are locked pulling the driver s side door handle will unlock the door if equipped 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments Right Hand Drive RHD model if equipped SPA2709 To unlock and open the door pull the inside door handle as illustrated The doors cannot be opened by using the inside door handle when the Super Lock System is activated LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH if equipped JVP0004X JVP0003X Power door lock switch located on the center console To lock the doors push the power door lock switch to the lock position A caution e When locking the doors using the power door lock switch be sure not to leave the
457. used and the ignition switch Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open Do not allow water to contact the outlet When not in use be sure to close the cap Instruments and controls 2 43 STORAGES A warnine e The storages should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation e Keep the storage lids closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop GLOVE BOX Type A To open the glove box pull the handle To close push the lid in until the lock latches 2 44 Instruments and controls JVIO692X Type B To open the glove box turn the knob counterclockwise To close push the lid in and turn the knob clockwise UPPER INSTRUMENT BOX if equipped 2 2 zf JVC0034X To open the upper instrument box push the button To close push the lid down CARD HOLDER if equipped JVI0018X Slide a card in the card holder CUP HOLDERS A caution Avoid abrupt starting and braking especially when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the contents If the contents are hot they could scald you or your passengers Front SUN VISORS Rear TONNEAU BOARD if equipped A WARNING e Never put anything on the tonneau board no matter how small Any object on it could cause an injury in an accident or sudden stop e Do not
458. ush Sen for more than 1 5 seconds to go to main screen 1 Alternatively use the SEARCH mode to select the appropriate entry to edit SEARCH appears on the display then push the ENTER button Select the first character of the name then push the ENTER button The name should be displayed If necessary turn the MENU VOL dial to select the correct name 2 When the amp button is pushed briefly the cursor will move one step backwards and the last character will be deleted To delete all characters push the 3 button for more than 1 second 3 If necessary you can edit the telephone number After editing the name select OK then push the ENTER button to confirm and edit the number as described for name editing Delete a name To delete a name contact from the phone book proceed as follows 1 Briefly push the Q button 2 Turn the MENU VOL dial then select the DELETE NAME Push the ENTER button Turn the MENU VOL dial to the name that needs to be deleted then push the ENTER button 5 The display will show DELETE YES If applicable turn the MENU VOL dial to select DELETE NO 6 The display will show the message DELETED The search mode can also be performed as follows 1 Briefly push the JJ button 2 SEARCH appears on the display then push the ENTER button 3 Select the first character of the name then push the ENTER button
459. utton is released the CD will return to normal play speed gt gt TRACK UP 44 DOWN button When the 1 button is pushed while a CD is being played the present track will be advanced and move to the next track Push the 1 button several times to skip forward tracks The CD will advance the number of times the button is pushed When the last track of the CD is forwarded the first track will be played When the 44 button is pushed while a CD is being played the present track will start over from the beginning Push the ma button several times to skip back tracks The CD will rewind the number of times the button is pushed When the first track of the CD is rewound the last track will be played MIX Repeat MIX button Push the iix button repeatedly to change the play mode as follows RPT REPEAT TRACK gt MIX DISC gt RPT REPEAT ALL RPT TRACK The CD player plays the current track continuously RPT ALL All the tracks on the CD will be played in sequential order MIX DISC All the tracks on the CD will be played in a random order CD EJECT button When the button is pushed while a CD is loaded the CD will be ejected When the button is pushed twice the CD will be ejected further and the CD can be removed with ease If a CD is ejected by pushing the
460. vation or deactivation use the MENU button Details are explained later in this section Automatic switching function This function compares the strengths of the signals of all the stations on the AF list and selects the station with the optimum reception conditions Program Information PI search Program Information PI search begins automati cally if no suitable station is found with the above automatic switching function The PI search function checks each RDS station with the same PI code During this time the sound is muted and PI SEARCH is displayed The PI search opera tion stops when a suitable station is found If no station is found once all the frequencies have been searched the radio returns to the previous frequency Enhanced Other Network EON data update This function also operates when the AF mode is off When EON data is being received this enables automatic retuning of other preset stations on the same network Also network linked services can be used The EON indicator turns on during the reception of RDS EON stations in the FM mode RDS functions Programme Service PS function station name display function When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or manual tuning the RDS data is received and the Program Service PS name is displayed Emergency broadcast interrupt function ALARM INTERRUPTION EBU SPEC FOR INFO When the radio receives PTY code 31 an emergency broadcast code th
461. ve SWitCh eee 5 13 Overheat If your vehicle overheats 6 11 P Parking Parking brake wee 3 24 Parking Sensor Indicator 5 34 Parking space measurement operation 5 35 Parking Parking brake operation 5 41 Passenger compartment 8 28 Phone Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System 4 64 Car phone or CB radio 4 64 Power Electric power steering system 5 37 Locking with power door lock switch we 3 6 Power outlet we 2 43 Power windows 2 40 Precautions Audio OPE ration 4 11 Brake precautions 5 38 Maintenance 8 5 Precautions on child restraint usage 1 13 Precautions on push button ignition SWITCH Operation sssssssisssssrreriisseseesrrrrrrrssssrerrrreeennre 5 6 Precautions on Supplemental Restraint System SRS 5 Precautions when starting and driving 5 3 Safety precautions 4 2 1 7 1 0 Seat belt usage Towing precautions 6 1 Precautions on cruise CONFI 5 3 Precautions on push button ignition switch OPELatiON cesses 5 6 10 4 Pregnant women Preparing tools Pre tensioner seat belt system Push starting Push warning Push button ignition switch model with Intelligent Key SyStemM cccssccsssesessseeeessneeeeesneeeees 5 6 Car phone or CB radio FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player 4 20 4 24 4 29 4 33 4 38 4 44 LW MW FM radio with Compact Disc CD player 4 52 4 57 Stee
462. vices are listed and can be selected for connection e Delete Device A registered Bluetooth device can be deleted e On Off If this setting is turned off the connection between the Bluetooth devices and the in vehicle Blue tooth module will be cancelled Pair Device a Select Device Delete Device Y Ready to Pair Pin 1234 Pair Device 1 Push the serur button Select the Bluetooth key by turning the enter dial and then push the enter dial You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth audio cellular phone devices However you can only use one device at a time If you have 5 different Bluetooth devices a newly registered device can only replace one of the already registered 5 existing paired devices Use the Delete Device key to delete one of the existing paired devices 2 Select the Pair Device key The pairing procedure depends on the connected device e Cellular phone The message Ready to Pair Pin 1234 will be displayed e Audio device without PIN code The Bluetooth connection will be automati cally connected without any further input e Audio device with PIN code A new screen will appear Assign the 4 digit PIN code by turning the enter dial to each digit of the code and pushing the enter dial to confirm each digit After the PIN code is input select Validate and push the enter dial The Bluetooth connection w
463. vices to avoid interference FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harm ful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Security indicator light SIC2045 The security indicator light is located on the meter panel It indicates the status of NATS The light operates whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF or ACC position The security indicator light indicates that the security systems on the vehicle are operational If NATS is malfunctioning this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position If the light remains on and or the engine does not start contact a NISSAN dealer for NATS service as soon as possible Be sure to bring all NATS keys that you have when visiting a NISSAN dealer for service For Right Hand Drive RHD model for Europe If NATS is malfunctioning the security indicator light will illuminate when the ignition switch is in the ON position However if the security indicator light turns off after 15 minutes you can start the engine once See a NISSAN dealer for NATS service as soon a
464. vicing the air conditioner system Technical information 9 5 ENGINE Engine Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke mm in Displacement cm cu in Idle speed at the N Neutral rpm position Ignition timing B T D C Spark Standard plugs Spark plug gap mm in Camshaft operation HR12DDR Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC 3 cylinder in line 78 0 x 83 6 3 071 x 3 291 1 198 73 10 CVT 775450 MT 750450 CVT 11 2 MT 11 2 DILKAR7E11HS 1 1 0 043 Timing chain Maximum vehicle speed for Gulf standard models 10 MT km h MPH AT km h MPH HR12DE Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC 3 cylinder in line 78 0 x 83 6 3 071 x 3 291 1 198 73 10 CVT 750450 MT 75050 1 3 a 86050 2 6 7 9 AT 775 50 6 CVT 9 2 MT 12 2 AT 8 2 FXE20HR11 1 REA12WMB4 3 8 REA12MC4 4 6 7 9 DILKAR6A11 5 1 1 0 043 Timing chain HR15DE Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC 4 cylinder in line 78 0 x 78 4 3 071 x 3 087 1 498 91 41 MT 650450 AT 700450 MT 5 2 7 AT 5 2 REA12WMB4 1 1 0 043 Timing chain 180 112 170 106 K9K Diesel 4 cycle 4 cylinder in line 76 0 x 80 5 2 992 x 3 169 1 461 89 15 MT 800450 Timing belt 1 For Thailand Singapore MT model Indonesia MT model and Brunei 2 For India Australia and New Zealand 3 For Europe 4 For India MT model Austra
465. when songs are recorded additionally in the root folder To return to the previous folder screen push the button RPT RPT button Push the RPT button and the current track will be played continuously MIX MIX button Push the MIX button and all the tracks will be played in random order DISP DISP button While a CD with recorded music information tags CD text ID3 text tags is being played the title of the played track is displayed If the title information is not provided then Track is displayed When the osP button is pushed repeatedly further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows CD Track time Artist CD with MP3 WMA Track time Artist gt Album Folder name gt Track time gt Song Album gt Track time Track details By pushing and holding the osp button will turn the display will show a detailed overview and after a few seconds will return to the main display Push the ose button to return to the main display immediately A cD Eject button When the amp button is pushed while a CD is loaded the CD will be ejected When the amp button is pushed twice the CD will be ejected further so that the CD can be removed with ease When the ignition switch is in the OFF
466. will turn off and the radio will turn on To change the radio bands push the FM AM button until the desired band FM1 FM2 AM is displayed The FM stereo indicator ST will display during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception gt gt 44 TUNE FF REW FOLDER button When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually push the gt or lt lt button until the desired frequency is achieved When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically push the gt or lt 4 button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at the station PPI 144 SEEK UP DOWN button When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically push the gt 144 button When the system detects a broadcasting station it will stop at the station SCAN button When the scan button is pushed the system will seek and stop at the detected broadcasting station for 5 seconds and then it will start to seek for the next broadcasting station Push the scan button in this 5 second period to stop seeking Radio memory button The audio system can store up to 12 FM station frequencies for FM1 and FM2 and 6
467. xis Select the switch position by referring to the following samples A Number of Number of Switch po Font Seat reap meat Weight of load in lug sition age compartment occupants occupants gag p pants Approximately 48 kg 106 Ib Approximately 70 kg r 154 Ib 2 Approximately 42 kg 93 1b 1 Approximately 73 kg 161 Ib 2 Approximately 279 kg 615 Ib No occu Approximately 292 kg pants 644 Ib 1 Approximately 306 kg 675 b 2 1 For the Middle East 2 For Hong Kong No load 1 3 TURN SIGNAL SWITCH SIC3786 A caution The turn signal switch will not be cancelled automatically if the steering wheel turning angle does not exceed the preset amount After the turn or lane change make sure that the turn signal switch is returned to its original position Turn signal To turn on the turn signals move the lever up Q or down towards the desired direction When the turn is completed the turn signal cancels automati cally Lane change signal To turn on the lane change signals move the lever up or down 2 towards the desired direction If the lever is moved back right after moving up 4 or down 2 the light will flash 3 times if equipped To cancel the flashing move the lever to the opposite direction Instruments and controls 2 35 FOG LIGHT SWITCH if equipped FRONT FOG LIGHTS SIC3811 Type A Type B To turn on the front fog lights turn
468. y section should be carefully followed 5 Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting the engine to warm up Drive at moderate speeds for a short distance first especially in cold weather A caution Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is warming up 6 To stop the engine move the shift lever to the N Neutral position apply the parking brake and push the ignition switch to the OFF position DRIVING VEHICLE DRIVING WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS SION AT The Automatic Transmission AT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment A warnine Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control A caution e The cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting the transmission into a forward or reverse position before the engine has warmed up e Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle is stopped This could cause unex pected vehicle movement e Never shift to either the P Park or R Reverse position while the vehicle is mov ing This could cause serious damage to the transmission e Except in an emergency do not shift to the N Neutral position while driving Coast ing with th
469. y a NISSAN dealer e The SET indicator and cruise control indicator light may blink when the cruise control MAIN switch is turned on while pushing the RES SET CANCEL switch To properly set the cruise control system use the following procedures CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at speeds above 40 km h 25 MPH without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal The cruise control will automatically be canceled if the vehicle slows down more than approximately 13 km h 8 MPH below the set speed Moving the shift lever to the N Neutral position Continuously Variable Transmission model or depres sing the clutch pedal Manual Transmission model will cancel the cruise control and the SET indicator will turn off The cruise control switches are located on the steering wheel SSD0891 RES switch SET switch CANCEL switch Cruise control MAIN switch Speed limiter MAIN switch For details see Speed limiter if equipped for Europe P 5 28 Ci rN oe Cruise control display and indicators Type B model CRUISE km h JVS0027X The cruise control operating condition is shown on the vehicle information display and instrument panel Vehicle information display 1 CRUISE indicator 2 Set speed indicator Instrument panel 3 Cruise control indicator light 4 SET indicator light Cruise control display and indicators Type C mo
470. y form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer Replacing halogen headlight bulb The halogen headlight is a semi sealed beam type which uses replaceable headlight halogen bulbs They can be replaced from inside the engine compart ment without removing the headlight assembly A caution e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped JVMO0002X Type A Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 A caution EXTERIOR LIGHTS e When handling the bulb do not touch the Wattage W glass envelope Front turn signal light e Use the same number and wattage as Front clearance light originally installed Front fog light if equipped Side turn signal light Halogen headlight model High beam bulb 60W H4 Rear combination lights Low beam bulb 55W H4 Tum signal light Stop Tail light LED or 21 5 e Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight Reverse light for Thailand reflector for a long period of time as dust Brunei Hong Kong and 16 moisture and smoke may enter the headlight Micra for India body and affect the performance of the Reverse light except for headlight Thailand Brunei Hong 21 Aiming adjustment is not necessary if onl
471. y is removed A caution e DEPRESS THE FOOT BRAKE PEDAL Shift ing the shift lever to D R 2 or 1 without depressing the foot brake pedal causes the vehicle to move slowly when 5 12 Starting and driving the engine is running Make sure the foot brake pedal is depressed fully and the vehicle is stopped before shifting the shift lever e MAKE SURE OF THE SHIFT LEVER POSI TION Make sure the shift lever is in the desired position D 2 and 1 are used to move forward and R to back up e WARM UP THE ENGINE Due to the higher idle speeds when the engine is cold extra caution must be exercised when shifting the shift lever into the driving position immedi ately after starting the engine Shifting gear JVS0008X Left Hand Drive LHD model JVSO009X Right Hand Drive RHD model Push the button A while depressing the foot brake pedal zZ Push the button A gt Just move the shift lever A WARNING e Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage e Ifthe shift lever cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the foot brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an acciden
472. y on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels Never install tire chains on a temporary use spare tire TEMPORARY USE ONLY Do not use the chains on dry roads TIRE ROTATION NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated every 10 000 km 6 000 miles However the timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and the road surface conditions For the tire replacement see Flat tire P 6 2 warnine e After rotating the tires adjust the tire pressure e Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 1 000 km 600 miles also in cases of a flat tire etc e Do not include the temporary use spare tire in tire rotation e Incorrect tire selection fitting care or main tenance can affect vehicle safety with risk of accident and injury If in doubt consult a NISSAN dealer or the tire manufacturer TIRE WEAR AND DAMAGE aval Wear indicator Wear indicator location mark Tires should be periodically inspected for wear cracking bulging or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire should be replaced immediately The original tires have a built in tread wear indicator When the wear indicator is visible the tire should be replaced Improper service of a spare tire may result in serious personal injury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer TIRE AGE Never use a tir
473. y the bulbs Kong and Micra for India are replaced When aiming adjustment is necessary Rear fog light if equipped 21 contact a NISSAN dealer High mounted stop light LED or 16 License plate light 5 JVM0276X Type B example 1 Disconnect the battery negative cable 2 Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb Pull off the rubber cap Push and turn the retaining pin to loosen it 5 Remove the headlight bulb Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it 6 Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself INTERIOR LIGHTS Wattage Room Fgh Cargo light if equipped See a NISSAN dealer for replacement Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 LIGHT LOCATIONS 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself JVM0288X 1 Interior light 2 Front fog light if equipped 3 Front turn signal light 4 Clearance light for Micra Active 5 Clearance light except for Micra Active 6 Headlight 7 Side turn signal light 8 Stop tail light 9 High mounted stop light Model without rear spoiler 10 High mounted stop light Model with rear spoiler 11 Rear turn signal light 12 Reverse light or Rear fog light if equipped 13 License plate light 14 Cargo light if equipped For the Left Hand Drive LHD model On the Right Hand Drive RHD model the rear fog light is located on the opposite side JVM0273X
474. y with a key holder that contains a magnet e Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip ment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal compu ters or cellular phones If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthor ized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer The Intelligent Key function can be disabled For information about disabling the Intelligent Key function contact a NISSAN dealer OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 4 When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location the Intelligent Key system s operating range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 80 cm 31 50 in from each request switch Q If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch and lock unlock the doors USING INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM The request swit
475. yed continuously in sequential order The display indicates no symbol mark While the RDM button is pushed the display indicates RPT DISC RDM DISC All the tracks or folders CD with MP3 or WMA only of the CD will be played continuously in random order While the RDM button is pushed the display indicates RDM DISC RDM FOLDER All the tracks of the selected folder will be played continuously in random order CD with MP3 or WMA only While the RDM button is pushed the display indicates RDM FOLDER amp CD EJECT button To eject a CD push the CD EJECT amp When the amp button is pushed twice the CD will be ejected further and the CD can be removed with ease button If a CD is ejected by pushing the amp button and it is not taken out from the loading slot the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD 12 cm discs only FM AM radio operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position FM AM button When the FM AM button is pushed while the audio system is off the audio system will turn on and the radio will turn on When the FM AM button is pushed while another audio source is playing the another audio source
476. yed properly on display Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended General notes for USB use e The USB device may not function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high Lower the temperature before use e During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to humidity If this occurs remove the USB device and dehumidify or ventilate the USB player completely e Do not connect a USB device if a connector cable or USB port is wet Allow the connector cable and USB port to dry completely before connecting the USB device Wait for 24 hours or more until it is dry If the connector and USB port are exposed to fluids other than water evaporative residue may cause a short circuit between the connector pins and USB port In this case replace the cable and USB port Otherwise damage to the USB device and a loss of function may occur e If the cable is damaged insulation cut connectors cracked contamination such as liquids dust dirt etc in the connectors do not use the cable Replace the cable with a new one Do not put a USB device in a location where static electricity occurs electrical noise is generated or hot air from the air conditioner blows directly on it Doing so may cause the data stored on the USB device to be corrupted Notes for iPod use if equipped iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Improperly plugg

(Thailand) Co., Ltd.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents